i/j^  P^^e 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 
in  2010  witii  funding  from 
Duke  University  Libraries 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/doomedstartlingmOOrose 


'Others  followed  my  example;  and  bct'orc  one  could  count 
twenty,  as  many  darts  were  embedded  in  the  monster's 
flesh." 


DOOMED 

A  Startling  Message  to  the  People  of  Our  Day,  inter- 
woven in  an  Antediluvian  Romance  of  Two 
Old  Worlds  and  Two  Young  Lovers 


BY 

QUEEN  METEL  and  PRINCE  LOAB 

of  Atlo,  Re-incarnated  in  its  Editors,  Marian  and  Franklin  Mayoe 


By  the  Atlon  Calendar,  the  Year  14,909; 
by  Our  Calendar,  the  Year  1920. 


Illustrations  by 
R.  EMMETT  OWEN 


NEW  YORK 

FRANK  ROSEWATER,  Publisher 

1920 


Copyright,  1920 
By  frank  ROSEWATER 


Printed  in  the  United  States  of  America 
All  Rights  Reserved 


Published  Oct.-Nov.,  1920 


A  WORD  TO  BEGIN 

By  the  Editors 

In  offering  to  our  readers  so  remarkable  a 
production  as  "Doomed,"  some  rational  explana- 
tion of  its  source  is  due.  How  came  it  into  our 
possession?  That,  in  as  few  words  as  possible, 
we  will  now  endeavor  to  explain. 

Traveling  last  year  along  one  of  the  tribu- 
taries of  the  Amazon,  we  were  simultaneously 
stricken  with  one  of  those  malignant  fevers  so 
common  in  that  region.  On  recovery,  my  wife 
astounded  me  with  the  tale  of  a  weird  vision  I 
also  had  at  the  same  time  beheld. 

In  this  vision,  two  figures  faced  us — such  per- 
fect counterparts  of  ourselves,  we  gasped  with 
astonishment.  As  with  one  voice,  they  spoke,  say- 
ing we  were  their  hundredth  re-incarnation.  More 
than  a  hundred  centuries  had  passed  since  their 
day;  and  now  they  were  here  to  deliver  through 
us,  for  our  world,  a  most  momentous  message 
from  the  people  of  their  long  forgotten  world. 

"Loab  Ben  Phra  and  Metel  Mafra  are  we," 
they  explained,  "once  Prince  of  Sidon  and  Queen 


iv  A  WORD  TO  BEGIN 

of  Omshola.  Our  tale  had  at  the  time  been 
written  on  fresh  papyrus;  but  that  copy  has  long 
since  crumbled  to  dust.  So  we  have  rewritten 
the  story  containing  the  great  message — this  time 
in  your  own  tongue;  and  here  it  is." 

With  these  words,  they  each  laid  their  portion 
of  the  story  upon  a  table  near  our  cots,  and 
thereupon  vanished. 

We  should  have  laughed  heartily  over  the 
strange  vision,  but  that,  glancing  at  the  table, 
there  lay  the  manuscript  copy  of  the  story,  in  three 
parts — two  by  the  husband  and  one  by  the  wife; 
and  it  was  identically  the  same  as  that  given  our 
readers  under  the  title  "Doomed." 

Both  story,  and  the  message  interwoven  therein, 
speak  so  well  for  themselves,  nothing  we  might 
further  say  would  add  a  jot  to  the  interest  of  the 
one  or  the  mighty  import  of  the  other. 

And  now,  having  had  our  say,  let  our  readers 
do  the  rest.  It  will  be  for  them  to  determine  the 
import  of  the  message  it  conveys,  and  to  act  upon 
it  as  conscience  will  dictate. 

New  York,  August  lo,  1920. 


CONTENTS 


A  WORD  TO  BEGIN— By  the  Editors 

PART  I 
OUR  BETROTHAL— As  Told  by  Prince  Loab 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.  The  Secret  of  the  Nobles 3 

II.  In  the  Wider  World 14 

III.  Beyond  the  Wider  World 30 

IV.  Atlic,  the  Wonderful 38 

V.  The  Wonder- Working  Secret 47 

VI.  An  Hour  in  the  Oroto 56 

VII.  Protected  Private  Property 65 

VIII.  Atlo's  Wonderful  Push  Wing 73 

IX.  The  Gathering  Cloud 88 

PART  II 

WORLDS  APART— As  Told  by  Queen  Metel 

I.  The  Throne  Awaiting  Me loi 

11.  On  Atlo's  Fighting  Front 114 

III.  Under  Siege  in  Their  Oros 125 

IV.  Made  Queen  of  Omshola 132 

V.  The  Dawn  of  Liberty 145 

VI.  From  Free  Slave  to  Free  Man 153 

VII.  The  End  of  the  Goro  Goros 162 

VIII.  Good  News  from  Atlo 168 

V 


vi  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

IX.  The  Plot  of  the  Kones 176 

X.  BoROK  Springs  a  Sensation 186 

XL  The  Invasion  of  Omshola 193 

PART  III 

UNITED  AT  LAST— As  Told  by  Prince  Loab 

I.  The  Beast  Behind  the  Cloud 205 

11.  The  Basilisk  Invasion 221 

III.  The  Loyalty  of  Metal 230 

IV.  To  Atlonize  the  World 238 

V.  Atlo's  Tragic  End 246 


A  PARTING  WORD— By  the  Editors 
APPENDIX — Editorial  Comments 


\ 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


FACING 
PAGE 

"Others  followed  my  example;  and  before  one  could 
count  twenty,  as  many  darts  were  embedded  in  the 
monster's  flesh."  Frontispiece 

"Advancing  like  a  huge  leviathan  with  open  jaws,  came 
the  flood  of  waters  hungering  to  swallow  ship  and 
all.  To  longer  remain  aboard  was  to  court  certain 
death."  28 

"Loab  was  the  first  to  get  out;  but  only  to  be  con- 
fronted by  the  giant  beast,  with  its  huge  club  up- 
raised to  dash  out  his  brains."  121 

"Could  this  be  the  face  of  the  Great  Spirit  ruling  over 
all  the  worlds,  of  which  the  Kones  had  taught  him?"  188 

"By  midnight  ...  we  began  to  scour  the  land  in  many 
directions  ...  to  make  the  extermination  of  the 
beasts  complete."  .t..f t..t..,,.,,,.,,,.  228 


vii 


PART  I 


OUR  BETHROTHAI^-AS  TOLD  BY 
PRINCE  LOAB 


CHAPTER  I 

The  Secret  of  the  Nobles 

My  earliest  recollection  is  of  being  fondled  and 
petted  by  a  big  black  woman,  my  nurse,  over 
whose  funny  nose  I  puzzled  my  little  head  from 
day  to  day  without  arriving  at  any  answer  to  the 
strange  riddle  it  presented.  To  my  infantile  mind 
the  huge  shining  ring  inserted  in  that  organ 
seemed  to  be  a  part  and  parcel  of  it,  and  would 
have  awed  me  but  for  the  repeated  kindnesses  she 
bestowed  upon  me.  I  at  that  time  seldom  saw  my 
mother,  and  this  Nubian  nurse  was  more  than 
mother  to  me. 

In  my  early  boyhood  I  was  pampered  with  every 
privilege  and  luxury  that  wealth  could  command. 
For,  of  my  father's  numerous  wives,  Folka,  my 
mother,  was  the  chief  favorite,  and  my  father  was 
one  of  the  wealthiest  of  the  Princes  of  Sidon.^  We 
lived  in  a  lordly  mansion.  In  the  heart  of  the  city, 
and  not  far  from  the  string  of  warehouses  on  the 
water  front,  from  which  my  father  carried  on 
most  of  his  trade. 

1  Very  likely  the  Sodom  of  biblical  fame. 

3 


4  DOOMED 

Prince  Phra,  my  father,  stood  high  In  the  coun- 
cils of  State;  had  more  than  fifty  stout  galleys 
plowing  the  seas  in  behalf  of  his  trade;  owned 
such  enormous  tracts  of  land  that  all  the  thousands 
of  slaves  thereon  could  not  cultivate  the  quarter 
thereof;  and  held  also  so  many  secured  notes  and 
such  hoards  of  silver  and  of  gold,  as  to  dwarf  in 
comparison  all  the  rest  of  his  possessions. 

Like  all  successful  men,  my  father  was  de- 
voutly religious,  worshipping  all  the  gods  from 
Eshmum  and  Astarte  to  Sat  ^  and  his  consort 
Mammon,  the  goddess  of  gain,  who  never  ap- 
peared to  mortals  save  in  serpent  form.  This 
Mammon  was  the  most  popular  of  Sidon  gods, 
exerting  a  most  potent  influence  upon  the  pros- 
perity of  all  Phoenicia. 

Upon  nearing  the  age  of  six,  I  remember  being 
placed  in  the  care  of  a  tutor  named  Merto,  who 
began  Avith  teaching  me  the  Phoenician  alphabet 
in  which  are  as  many  as  twenty-two  different  sound 
symbols,  through  which  the  spoken  language  is 
easily  transcribed  to  papyrus  or  parchment. 

The  alphabet  once  mastered,  it  was  just  fun  to 
go  on  forming  out  of  it  all  sorts  of  familiar  words. 
It  required  some  effort;  but  it  was  an  exertion  I 
could  enjoy,  as  if  It  had  been  a  game. 

2  The  same  as  the  Egyptian  deity  Set — the  Satan  of  Christian 
theology. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  NOBLES  5 

Books  once  puzzled  me  as  an  unintelligible  con- 
glomeration of  mysterious  hieroglyphics;  but  with 
the  alphabet  at  my  command,  they  seemed  so  no 
longer.  Now  they  were  lights,  affording  me  daily 
new  glimpses  of  the  world. 

Tutor  Merto  selected  my  books,  at  first  all  de- 
lightful fairy  tales  and  love  romances,  in  which 
their  heroes  invariably  triumphed  in  the  end.  It 
would  have  been  a  shame  to  have  ended  other- 
wise; and  had  any  of  them  so  ended,  I  believe  I 
should  have  torn  them  into  shreds. 

In  the  course  of  time  I  finally  tired  of  these 
humdrum  tales,  which  merely  repeated  one  an- 
other, and  were  all  tuned  rather  to  the  palate  of 
the  mind  than  for  its  sustenance. 

So  I  was  now  put  on  books  of  travel,  which  cast 
a  new  luster  on  my  little  world,  broadening  the 
horizon  of  my  mind.  .  .  And  when  at  length 
books  of  history  were  placed  at  my  disposal,  how 
much  wider  scope  it  gave  to  my  views  of  life  I 
What  a  romance  it  unfolded !  Nations  played  its 
heroes,  and  the  ages  were  the  arena  in  which  they 
combated.  Was  ever  greater  romance  than  is 
set  down  in  the  story  of  mankind?  But  how  few 
there  are  who  can  reduce  into  an  intelligible  whole 
the  brief  glimpses  and  distorted  images  we  have 
to  draw  on,  in  weaving  its  romance ! 


6  DOOMED 

Think  not,  reader,  my  physical  education  was 
in  the  meantime  being  neglected.  Far  from  it: 
for  between  the  hours  of  my  reading  I  was  allowed 
to  indulge  in  much  sport  and  play,  and  also  re- 
ceived instruction  In  the  arts  of  using  bow  and 
arrow  and  spear,  of  handling  sword  and  dagger, 
of  riding,  swimming  and  rowing,  and  of  all  prac- 
tices that  would  help  to  make  of  me  a  huntsman, 
a  warrior  and  a  courtly  gentleman. 

Swiftly  these  happy  years  sped,  till  my  four- 
teenth year  had  been  reached,  when  I  was  seized 
with  a  powerful  longing  to  see  the  great  world 
with  my  own  eyes.  I  had  seen  enough  through 
books,  which  are  but  the  eyes  of  other  men. 

Daily  I  now  besought  my  fond  parents  to  let 
me  go  abroad,  if  only  for  a  single  voyage;  but  to 
no  purpose.  My  mother,  Folka,  was  the  most 
steadfast  and  unyielding,  dreading  to  part  with 
me.  But  time  by  degrees  prepared  her  for  the 
ordeal,  so  that  as  soon  as  father's  consent  was 
secured,  that  of  my  mother  quickly  followed. 

My  parents  well  knew  that  sooner  or  later  such 
a  course  of  travel  would  have  to  be  undertaken  in 
order  to  make  me  efficient  in  the  arts  of  trade  and 
social  Intercourse  becoming  a  Phoenician  noble — 
one  who  was  always  master  of  ship  and  shekel, 
as  well  as  of  sword. 

I  had  already  received  lessons  in  the  art  of 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  NOBLES  7 

reckoning  sums;  and  In  both  the  Hellenic  and 
Egyptian  tongues,  which  were  most  needed  in  trad- 
ing abroad;  and  also  in  the  art  of  bargaining — a 
practice  requiring  even  more  skill  than  the  use  of 
either  styl  or  sword.  For  there  is  neither  top  nor 
bottom  to  prices  in  foreign  lands,  and  there  it 
behooves  the  buyer  to  be  able  to  well  conceal  his 
desire,  whether  to  buy  or  to  sell.  There  was  in- 
deed more  thrust  and  feint  in  this  art  than  in  the 
use  of  the  sword.  And  none  were  more  skilled 
therein  than  we  Phoenicians. 

But  there  was  one  trick  that  our  Phoenician 
merchants  made  common  practice  of — out  of  pure 
patriotism,  as  well  as  from  love  of  the  gain  it 
yielded.  It  was  through  this  very  practice  our 
dear  Phoenicia  was  forging  ahead  of  other  na- 
tions, and  promised  soon  to  acquire  mastery  of 
the  world.  Already  she  was  owner  of  more 
slaves,  more  lands,  more  gold  and  silver  and 
precious  gems,  more  stout  ships  and  more  wealth 
in  loans  to  foreign  potentates  (secured  by  host- 
ages) than  any  nation  had  ever  gathered  together. 

Fortunately,  I  am  now  residing  in  the  land  of 
Atlo,  where  I  may  without  peril  of  my  life  reveal 
to  you,  my  readers,  what  this  trick  consisted  in. 
The  cunning  trick  was  taught  our  Phoenician 
nobles  by  Mammon  or  Mam,  the  goddess  of  gain, 
who  appeared  before  them  in  her  serpent  form, 


8  DOOMED 

bringing  to  them  the  silver  shekel,  to  be  employed 
in  doing  their  trading.  But  the  trick  was  involved 
in  the  use  of  her  maxim  bidding  them  SPEND 
FOR  THEIR  LIVING  NO  MORE  THAN 
THE  HALF  OF  THEIR  INCOME— PUT- 
TING THE  REMAINDER  INTO  HOARD, 
AND  ONLY  INVESTING  IT  SUBJECT  TO 
RETURN  WITH  ADDITION.  Their  per- 
sistent adherence  to  this  maxim,  they  were  as- 
sured, would  in  time  make  them  masters  of  the 
world. 

This  maxim  won  the  approval  of  all  the  nobles; 
and  was  by  them  communicated  to  the  lesser  mer- 
chants, by  whom  it  was  also  admired  and  ardently 
applied. 

So  it  came  to  pass,  that  after  all  our  mer- 
chants had  been  for  a  goodly  period  tacitly  com- 
bined in  spending  no  more  for  their  living  than 
the  half  of  what  they  took  in,  a  countless  num- 
ber of  unspent  shekels  kept  on  gathering  in  their 
hoards,  ever  more  and  more,  until  at  length  an 
intense  money  famine  became  felt  among  the  non- 
mercantile  people  at  home  and  the  nations  abroad 
with  whom  our  merchants  had  been  trading.  For 
the  fat  hoards  of  our  merchants  were  only  bulging 
with  what  had  been  extracted  from  the  purses  of 
those  they  had  been  dealing  with  and  which  they 
had  left  lean  and  empty. 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  NOBLES  9 

Obeying  the  maxim  of  Mam,  the  Goddess  of 
Gain,  our  merchants  allowed  their  unspent  shekels 
to  remain  in  hoard  only  long  enough  to  produce 
a  tight  squeeze,  under  pressure  of  which  most  of 
It  could  be  so  Invested  as  to  Insure  return  with 
addition.  Under  the  pressure  of  hoarding,  which 
causes  an  artificial  scarcity,  men  were  compelled 
to  part  with  properties  at  low  valuations ;  to  con- 
tract loans  at  interest;  and  often  even  to  sell  them- 
selves into  bondage,  or  else  their  wives  and  chil- 
dren. For  the  pinch  of  poverty  Is  like  unto  a 
thumbscrew  that  tortures  till  honor,  virtue  and  the 
last  shred  of  self  respect  are  sacrificed  for  present 
relief.  I  have  since  observed  that  dispossession 
stops  not  with  mere  material  properties,  but  drags 
into  its  net  the  very  souls  of  men. 

So  both  at  home  and  abroad  did  our  merchants 
acquire  fat.  Income-yielding  properties,  batch  after 
batch,  as  their  shekels  kept  on  returning,  and  pass- 
ing again  out  of  hoard  and  Into  Investments — pil- 
ing up  Into  a  very  mountain  of  wealth,  to  the  na- 
tion's glory  and  power.  It  was  this  that  made  the 
maxim  a  patriotic  shibboleth  and  won  the  heart 
of  the  nation. 

Although  at  the  time  a  mere  boy,  the  far-seeing 
shrewdness  of  this  maxim  quite  enamored  me. 
Its  wisdom  was  so  clear  and  manifest.     Could 


10  DOOMED 

statecraft  have  chosen  a  better  maxim?  Just 
think  how  so  small  a  germ  of  inequality  could 
mould  a  whole  world  to  its  own  disproportion. 
What  a  conquering  sword  was  concealed  beneath 
this  diabolic  maxim — a  sword  invisible,  keen  and 
irresistible,  through  whose  use  all  the  people  of 
this  wide  earth  could  be  peaceably  vanquished 
and  subjugated — conquered  without  departure 
from  pious  righteousness — all  dispossessed  and 
turned  into  outcasts  and  bondsmen!  And  mean- 
while the  merchants  of  Phoenicia  would  become 
so  enriched,  the  least  of  them  would  dwell  in 
palaces  and  live  in  feasting  and  revels,  surrounded 
with  the  fair  women  of  their  harems. 

How  I  admired  the  ingenious  maxim !  How 
I  worshipped  its  wisdom — the  wisdom  that  had 
in  it  the  guile  of  the  serpent,  of  the  Goddess 
Mam! 

I  did  not  then  understand  that  it  was  Sat's  aim 
in  sending  up  to  us  his  dam  Mammon,  to  cause 
our  world  to  become  divided  into  hostile  classes, 
facing  one  another  as  possessors  and  dispossessed, 
masters  and  dependents,  rich  and  poor,  fattened 
drones  and  starved  tollers,  all  driven  by  the  pinch 
of  an  everlasting  shekel  famine  or  the  boundless 
rivalry  of  crazed  ostentation  and  love  of  power — 
all  set  at  loggerheads  with  each  other,  class 
against    class,    faction    against    faction,    section 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  NOBLES      ii 

against  section,  nation  against  nation  and  man 
against  man.  Between  the  lowest  depths  of  dis- 
possession and  the  loftiest  pinnacles  of  affluence, 
the  entire  human  family  might  forever  be  kept  a 
prey  to  his  temptations  and  in  the  chains  of  his 
bondage.  All  men  were  thereby  doomed  to  be- 
come his  subjects  In  the  underworld. 

But  what  cared  we  patriotic  Phoenicians  for 
Sat's  motives — we  who  would  stop  at  naught,  if 
adding  to  the  glory  and  power  of  our  dear 
Phoenicia ! 

Writing  now,  after  long  years  of  residence  in 
Atlo,  where  trade  is  conducted  so  differently  from 
what  is  the  case  in  all  other  lands — a  manner  In- 
finitely superior — I  can  readily  perceive  the 
brazen  fraud  involved  in  the  devil's  cunning 
maxim,  and  also  realize  the  awful  horror  of  its 
consequences.  What  a  cheat  to  sell  an  excess  of 
productions,  and  only  take.  In  return  for  the  ex- 
cess, the  properties  of  those  they  traded  with — 
thus  stripping  them  to  nakedness  and  servitude! 
I  now  marvel  I  should  ever  have  been  so  stupid 
as  to  have  admired  this  detestable  fraud. 

Before  the  day  of  my  departure  from  home,  I 
for  the  first  time  accompanied  my  father  to  do 
worship  in  the  temple  of  Mammon.  It  was  a 
vast  structure,  glittering  in  the  sun  as  if  one  huge 


12  DOOMED 

mass  of  jewels,  though  all  was  of  colored  glass 
bordered  and  seamed  with  showy  ornamentations 
in  gold  and  silver  paint.  To  the  very  core,  the 
structure  was  flimsy — all  show  and  sham,  well 
befitting  the  serpent  therein  worshipped. 

I  still  vividly  recall  the  grave  solicitude  of  my 
father,  on  imparting  to  me  his  final  instructions 
before  starting  on  the  contemplated  voyage. 
Wisely  did  he  admonish  me  to  conduct  myself 
with  due  respect  to  elders  and  superiors  in  rank, 
and  to  compel  adequate  deference  from  inferiors. 
.  .  .  Though  sparing  of  my  funds  as  became 
a  son  of  Phoenicia,  I  was  not  to  refrain  from  be- 
ing lavish  with  them,  when  demanded  by  the  dig- 
nity of  my  rank.  .  .  .  Against  the  seductions 
of  the  fair  sex  he  cautioned  me,  naming  some  of 
the  devices  these  creatures  employed,  and  at  the 
same  time  advising  me  to  soon  take  unto  myself 
a  wife  coming  from  a  family  of  wealth  that  could 
becomingly  dower  her.  Should  my  choice  prove 
unfortunate,  he  assured  me,  I  might  find  remedy 
in  taking  unto  myself  additional  wives.  (While 
jotting  down  these  lines  my  wife,  Metel,  has  taken 
me  unawares  and  is  smiling  at  my  stupid  confes- 
sion. ) 

A  magnificent  outfit  had  been  provided  for  me, 
and  also  a  fine  retinue  of  servants,  such  as  be- 


THE  SECRET  OF  THE  NOBLES  13 

came  a  prince ;  for  with  that  title  I  was  thereafter 
to  be  honored. 

My  mother  wept  profusely  as  she  pronounced 
her  benediction,  her  hand  resting  upon  my  head, 
and  at  parting  handed  me  a  few  precious  keep- 
sakes, among  which  was  an  amulet  in  whose 
golden  frame  was  set  a  topaz  of  brilliant  yellow. 
With  this  suspended  around  my  neck,  sadness 
would  be  banished  and  enchantments  dispelled. 

A  canopied  altar  had  been  erected  at  the  sea 
side,  and  upon  this  my  father  now  offered  a  lamb 
to  the  god  of  the  sea,  accompanying  the  act  with 
the  recital  of  a  long  ritual  of  prayers  and  a  final 
invocation  in  behalf  of  my  safe  return. 

These  ceremonies  over,  I  was  given  my  father's 
final  blessing,  and  then  stepped  lightly  into  the 
tiny  boat  that  bore  me  speedily  to  the  side  of  the 
Golden  Moon,  into  which  I  was  now  hoisted  and 
which  was  soon  bearing  me  over  the  waves  into 
that  wider  world  I  so  much  longed  to  see. 


CHAPTER  II 
In  the  Wider  World 

The  Golden  Moon,  the  vessel  in  which  I  sailed, 
was  patterned  after  the  very  latest  models,  broad 
breasted,  and  with  a  tall  prow  bearing  on  it  the 
image  of  the  serpent,  by  which  it  might  be  dis- 
tinguishable as  a  trading  vessel.  From  her  upper 
deck  rose  three  tall  masts  to  which  were  fastened 
canvas  sails  so  set  as  to  be  able  to  catch  each 
transient  breeze.  ...  In  her  hold,  chained  to 
benches,  sat  twenty  rowers,  of  hardened  look,  who 
were  compelled  to  labor  with  their  oars  by  the 
lash  in  the  hands  of  a  master  stationed  behind 
them.  They  were  one  and  all  condemned  crimi- 
nals, sold  into  this  form  of  bondage. 

For  some  time  the  voyage  was  a  delightful  one, 
passing  under  balmy  skies  and  gazing  upon  charm- 
ing scenes,  in  which  each  feathery  cloud  glowed  in 
fiery  tints,  and  the  shimmering  waters  of  the  vast 
expanse  before  us,  kissed  by  the  sunlight,  seemed 
one  mass  of  gleaming  emeralds.  Along  the 
shores,  the  wooded  heights  and  frequent  villages 
were  also  picturesque.     .     .     .     But  even  beauty 

14 


IN  THE  WIDER  WORLD  15 

loses  its  charm  by  constant  repetition;  and  so  did 
this  scenery,  till  it  finally  ceased  to  attract,  and 
even  became  tiresome. 

For  many  weeks  we  sailed  on  over  the  smooth 
waters  of  the  great  Central  Sea,i  on  whose  shores 
and  along  whose  streams,  lie  nearly  all  the  cities 
of  the  world  that  are  of  any  consequence. 

Port  after  port  we  made,  trading  at  each — I 
cannot  say  for  their  number  how  many  of  them 
there  were — till  we  at  length  arrived  at  the  famed 
city  of  Athens.  Here  I  was  landed,  and,  to- 
gether with  my  retinue,  I  was  to  remain  for  a 
whole  year,  improving  my  tongue  in  the  language 
of  the  Hellenes,  called  Greek,  and  my  mind  as 
well.  For  in  this  city  is  the  world's  center  of 
learning  and  of  art;  and  here,  it  is  said,  even  a 
fool  may  gather  some  wisdom. 

I  had  a  servant  at  once  engage  quarters  for  me 
in  the  Acropolis,  which  is  a  new  section  of  the 
city  and  lies  high  up  in  view  of  the  region  known 
as  the  Peloponnesus,  separated  from  the  main- 
land by  a  narrow  strip  of  sea. 

Fine  palaces  and  mansions,  as  well  as  grand 
temples  and  other  public  buildings  surrounded  us 
here,  and  rarely  did  we  encounter  a  plot  of 
ground  but  that  it  contained  either  some  sparkling 
fountain  or  graceful  statuary. 

1  The  Mediterranean. 


i6  DOOMED 

The  whole  city  was  a  gem  of  magnificence,  by 
the  side  of  which  our  beloved  Sidon  would  have 
been  shamed. 

What  a  host  of  strange  people  walked  its 
streets,  thronging  every  park  and  pathway — men 
hailing  from  every  quarter  of  the  earth,  each 
decked  out  in  the  costume  of  his  native  land  and 
attended  by  his  servants  or  slaves,  after  the 
fashion  of  his  own  country.  There  were  tall, 
frowsy-haired  men  from  Ethiopia,  black  as  ebony 
and  shiny  as  silk;  stout,  swarthy  Libyans  from  the 
desert  plains  of  Afric;  haughty  Egyptians  from 
the  fertile  banks  of  the  famed  river  Nil;  semi- 
naked  barbarians,  hairy  as  apes,  from  a  region 
far  to  the  north  clad  in  a  sheet  of  eternal  white 
and  lashed  by  cold  winds  so  sharp  they  cut  Into 
the  very  bones;  and  there  were  also  tall,  sky-gaz- 
ing men  from  the  land  of  Ind,  so  distant  it  be- 
longed rather  to  another  world.  There  were 
many,  many  more — far  too  many  for  my  con- 
fused memory  to  recall. 

How  I  doted  on  the  opportunity  to  converse 
with  these  strangers,  from  whom  so  much  was  to 
be  learned — so  much  never  set  down  in  books. 
How  fascinating  were  their  talks  concerning  the 
manifold  aspects  of  their  different  worlds;  their 
customs  and  manners;  their  sources  of  subsistence; 
the  domestic  animals;  the  slaves  who  toiled  for 


IN  THE  WIDER  WORLD  17 

them;  and  the  beasts  of  the  wilds;  and  also  the 
numerous  gods  there  worshipped.  Never  had  I 
heard  of  so  many  different  deities.  To  listen  to 
all  their  tales  of  prowess  in  battle,  and  their 
strange  experiences  and  adventures,  how  it  thrilled 
my  blood,  and  filled  my  soul  with  new  ambitions. 

Schools  of  philosophy  were  plentiful;  and  one 
could  hardly  go  out  without  encounterine;  their 
heavy-browed,  long-bearded  pedagogs,  sedately 
leading  a  column  of  pupils,  and  now  and  then 
stopping  to  deliver  lengthy  discourses. 

Little  heed  did  I  give  to  these  speculative  phil- 
osophers, who  presumed  to  weigh  shadows  and 
split  hairs.  I  once  met  one  of  them  holding  in 
his  hands  a  painted  globe,  which  he  made  his 
pupils  believe  represented  the  earth  revolving  both 
around  itself  and  around  the  sun.  His  bold  auda- 
city so  amused  me,  I  was  tempted  to  interrupt  his 
discourse  by  asking  him  how  it  came  that  if  the 
earth  was  round,  men  fell  not  off,  and  its  waters 
did  not  spill  themselves  over  the  skies  and  drown 
the  very  gods?  To  this  he  made  reply,  saying 
that  a  mysterious  force  held  all  things  bound  fast 
to  the  earth — explaining  one  ridiculous  statement 
by  another  equally  as  absurd.  For  were  all  things 
bound  fast  to  the  earth,  how  came  it  we  were  able 
to  walk  about? 

Detesting  this  "brazen  audacity,  I  spat  in  the 


i8  DOOMED 

fellow's  face,  and  was  in  consequence  hailed  be- 
fore a  solemn  magistrate,  charged  with  assault. 
Hearing  the  pleas  on  both  sides,  this  venerable 
official  promptly  exonerated  me,  while  subjecting 
my  opponent  to  a  substantial  fine  for  daring  to 
teach  the  Athenian  youth  so  bold  a  contradiction 
of  the  obvious  truth. 

The  native  Athenian  Is  in  many  ways  a  supe- 
rior type  of  being,  lithe  and  muscular  in  limb, 
fluent  in  speech  and  nimble  in  wit.  Lusty  lungs  he 
also  has,  shouting  and  singing  with  a  rare  spirit 
and  gaiety.  He  also  dances  exquisitely,  in  all 
his  movements  being  a  perfect  model  of  grace. 
.  .  .  But  no  men  are  perfect :  for  with  all  their 
many  virtues,  I  find  them  fickle  and  deceitful.  .  .  . 
Few  of  the  fair  sex  did  I  chance  to  encounter 
without  their  faces  being  hooded;  and  if  all  were 
as  fair  as  those  whose  features  I  was  permitted 
to  behold,  they  may  well  be  counted  the  most 
beautiful  of  women. 

Slaves  do  all  the  arduous  labor  both  in  the  city 
and  on  the  surrounding  lands,  the  freemen  devot- 
ing themselves  mainly  to  the  arts  and  learning, 
carving  the  elegant  statuary  one  sees  upon  all  sides 
and  all  the  beautiful  ornamentations  on  palaces 
and  temples.  They  also  paint  and  do  much 
architectural  designing,  as  well  as  that  which  ap- 


IN  THE  WIDER  WORLD  19 

pears  In  the  rich  tapestries  and  on  the  fine  pottery 
they  make.  There  are  also  among  them  a  moiety 
of  jugglers  and  dancers,  of  musicians  and  players, 
of  rhetoricians  and  sophists,  of  smiths  and  sword 
makers,  of  philosophers,  soldiers  and  of  priests. 

Yet  along  with  all  this  array  of  busy  freemen, 
there  are  no  lack  of  Idlers  and  filchers  who  live 
on  the  toil  of  others — mendicants,  beggars  and 
thieves.  One  had  but  to  go  near  the  market  place 
to  see  this  herd  of  pickpockets. 

The  government  of  this  city  Is  called  a  democ- 
racy— a  new-fangled  experiment  In  which  the  free- 
men elect  their  own  rulers — of  course  from  those 
named  by  the  wealthy  class,  from  whose  patron- 
age the  freemen  live. 

What  more  could  be  expected  where  the  Idle 
poor  were  depraved,  and  the  rest  were  so  de- 
pendent on  the  good  will  of  the  rich?  They  were 
free;  but  perhaps  more  lorded  over  by  their  pa- 
trons than  other  slaves.  Were  they  not  always 
on  the  very  edge  of  despair,  forever  worrying — 
to  make  ends  meet,  to  keep  the  roof  over  their 
heads? 

There  was  something  truly  grand  in  the  pride 
of  this  artist  freedom,  and  something  in  it  pitiably 
ridiculous.  For  while  they  were  eternally  laud- 
ing their  liberty,  hard-handed  tyranny  was  making 
sport  of  them. 


20  DOOMED 

I  shall  never  forget  the  delightful  year  spent 
in  this  queen  of  cities — a  year  that  sped  so  swiftly, 
1  was  startled  on  hearing  the  arrival  of  the  Golden 
Moon  announced,  allowing  me  barely  time  to  bid 
my  friends  farewell,  before  taking  my  leave. 

Our  shipmaster,  named  Gogol,  of  whom  I 
should  have  made  earlier  mention,  rushed  for- 
ward to  embrace  me,  on  once  more  setting  foot 
aboard  ship.  He  was  delighted  to  note  my  al- 
tered appearance  and  demeanor.  He  was  a  man 
of  large  figure,  with  fierce,  dark  eyes,  a  prominent 
nose,  and  a  protruding  chin.  His  deep,  bellowing 
voice  could  be  heard  above  the  din  of  the  wildest 
storm. 

Leaving  Athens,  after  having  taken  aboard 
many  of  her  fine  productions,  such  as  tapestries, 
paintings,  pottery  and  carvings,  we  traded  at 
many  ports,  till  we  came  to  a  vast  isle,  the  larg- 
est in  the  world,  known  as  Sicania,^  which  we 
thereafter  skirted,  gathering  much  booty  in  rav- 
aging unprotected  villages  along  the  coast.  Most 
of  it  was  in  gold,  and  fair  women  whom  we  took 
to  be  sold  as  slaves  in  Sidon.  We  also  captured 
many  lads  in  these  raids,  and  also  bought  num- 
bers of  them  for  the  sake  of  the  bounty  paid  on 
them  at  Sidon,  where  the  bringing  in  of  slaves 

iThe  island  of  Sicily. 


IN  THE  WIDER  WORLD  zi 

was  encouraged.  These  added  profits,  derived 
from  slaves  and  the  bounties  on  them,  made  it 
the  easier  for  us  to  underbid  everywhere  and  sell 
the  excess  of  productions  by  which  Phoenicia  was 
to  become  mistress  of  the  nations. 

Returning  to  Sidon,  we  left  our  cargo  in  my 
father's  warehouses,  whence  we  took  a  fresh 
cargo  for  the  next  voyage. 

Of  the  shekels  realized  from  the  slaves,  the 
tenth  part  was  set  aside  for  the  ship's  crew — a 
practice  insuring  their  loyalty. 

Our  next  voyage  carried  us  up  the  great  river 
Nil,  with  whose  numerous  cities  we  did  a  very 
profitable  trade.  In  its  waters  we  beheld  gigantic 
beasts  called  behemoths  sporting  like  kittens,  and 
we  also  saw  countless  numbers  of  huge  bone-en- 
crusted serpents  basking  idly  on  its  sandy  banks, 
and  not  a  few  pursuing  our  vessel  to  catch  the 
offal  thrown  overboard.  They  had  dreadful 
mouths  lined  with  rows  of  monster  fangs  that 
could  carve  their  prey  as  one  might  carve  cheese. 
They  were  called  crocodiles. 

Several  other  voyages  we  made  before  finally 
venturing  a  trip  beyond  the  confines  of  the  Cen- 
tral Sea,  passing  through  the  narrow  strip  ^  of 
water  lying  between  what  are  called  the  Pillars 
of  Hercules — massive  rocks  stationed  like  a  pair 

IThe  Straits  of  Gibraltar. 


22  DOOMED 

of  gate  posts  at  the  entrance  to  the  unbounded 
waters  of  the  Western  Sea,^  on  which  few  ma- 
riners dare  to  venture.  For  not  only  are  its 
waters  infesied  with  monsters  possessed  of  super- 
natural powers,  but  also  with  devilish  wizards, 
and  of  mermaids  who  entice  mariners  Into  the 
depths  and  there  inflict  upon  them  horrible  deaths. 
There  is  also  always  danger  of  being  inextricably 
caught  in  the  mighty  swirl  of  its  waters  and 
dashed  to  destruction  over  the  bottomless  preci- 
pice at  the  world's  end. 

Not  far  westward  dared  we  venture  on  this 
trip,  clinging  ever  close  to  shore.  To  the  north 
we  directed  our  course,  till  we  reached  our  des- 
tination in  a  remote  region  abounding  with  a 
rare  ore  from  which  we  derived  one  of  the  ingre- 
dients of  bronze.  The  savages  we  traded  with 
were  a  fierce  body,  ready  to  fight  at  the  slightest 
provocation,  ever  swinging  over  their  heads  their 
huge  war  clubs. 

Returning  from  this  voyage,  adverse  winds,  long 
continued,  drove  us  out  of  our  course;  and  one 
tempest  following  quickly  on  the  heels  of  the 
other,  finally  got  us  so  confused,  we  knew  not 
where  we  were  located. 

So  we  kept  on  drifting  until,  one  morning,  a 
strange  land  came  Into  view,  whose  shores  we 

2  The  Atlantic. 


IN  THE  WIDER  WORLD  23 

followed  many  days  without  reaching  any  end 
thereof.  From  this  we  concluded  it  must  be  the 
great  continent  of  Atlantis,  the  land  of  the  Sun 
God,  of  which  we  had  heard  strange  tales. ^ 

Toward  dusk  of  the  fifth  day,  a  snug  harbor 
opened  its  arms  to  receive  us;  and  as  we  glanced 
shoreward,  we  beheld,  standing  a  ways  inland,  a 
single  isolated  structure  of  considerable  size — a 
rather  handsome  building. 

Along  its  sides  were  rows  of  peculiar  squares, 
that  shone  like  so  many  massive  rubies.  The 
surroundings  were  also  quite  attractive,  its  down- 
ward sloping  lawn  ornamented  with  flower  beds, 
and  fountains,  and  shrubbery.  To  its  rear 
seemed  to  lie  a  great  stretch  of  ground,  on  which 
groups  of  children  of  varied  ages  were  sporting — 
laughing  and  shouting  with  such  glee  as  had  never 
before  greeted  my  ears. 

There  was  no  sign  of  fortifications;  and  as  we 
pondered  over  the  sight,  we  all  realized  It  augured 
a  rich  harvest  of  spoils  for  us.  Here  must  have 
resided  many  families  from  which  large  booty, 
even  if  only  in  slaves,  was  to  be  derived. 

3  The  continent  is  sometimes  alluded  to  as  Atlantica.  Plato 
in  his  Critias  says  that  nine  thousand  years  before  the  time  of 
Solon  the  people  of  this  continent  had  been  a  powerful  nation. 
....  Plato,  Horace  and  some  others  allude  to  two  Atlanticas, 
Hesperides  and  the  Elysian  Fields,  believed  to  be  the  abode  of 
the  blessed. 


24  DOOMED 

Hardly  were  we  anchored  than,  without  loss  of 
a  single  moment,  Shipmaster  Gogol  summoned  to 
his  side  all  our  fighting  men.  Quietly  he  now  bid 
them  gather  their  war  equipments,  preparatory  to 
landing.  Then,  pointing  to  the  structure,  with 
a  peculiar  turn  in  the  gesture,  he  let  them  know 
his  object. 

Both  warriors  and  equipments  were  soon 
landed,  and  a  few  moments  after,  the  men  stood 
in  line,  twenty  in  all,  togged  in  the  full  panoply 
of  war. 

It  was  a  sight  to  behold  these  stalwart  men 
lined  up,  arrayed  for  battle,  their  heads  encased 
in  shining  helmets  and  their  broad  chests  covered 
with  stout  bull-hide  breast  plates.  They  bore  as 
fighting  weapons  long  javelins,  keen-bladed  swords 
and  sharp  poniards. 

Much  against  my  desire,  I  was  not  allowed  a 
place  in  the  ranks;  though  to  conciliate  me,  I 
was  allowed  to  occupy  an  elevation  nearby. 

Led  by  Master  Gogol,  the  advance  now  began, 
darkness  having  set  in.  All  was  quiet,  the  chil- 
dren in  the  rear  having  retired  within  the  great 
building.  Noiselessly  they  moved  onward,  soon 
standing  upon  the  broad  lawn  fronting  the  strange 
mansion. 

Here  they  encountered  a  great  number  of  rising 


IN  THE  WIDER  WORLD 


2S 


pipes  of  greatly  varying  height,  with  wide,  punc- 
tured heads  whose  object  they  were  unable  to 
interpret.  But  suddenly,  from  all  these  pipes  rose 
jets  of  light  spray;  and,  as  if  in  a  flash,  the  whole 
atmosphere  seemed  to  be  a  vast  seething  furnace. 
The  mere  dropping  of  a  rocket  upon  these  foun- 
tains seemed  as  if  by  magic,  to  have  started  the 
terrible  blaze.  It  made  a  beautiful,  but  horrible 
sight;  and  I  looked  never  again  to  set  eyes  on  these 
men  save  as  cindered  corpses. 

Overwhelmed  by  the  atmosphere  of  flame, 
Master  Gogol  and  his  men  fell  prone  to  the  earth, 
closing  their  eyes  and  holding  their  nostrils.  Each 
also  now  inwardly  prayed  to  his  favorite  god, 
offering  every  imaginable  sacrifice  if  succored  in 
this  dilemma. 

Around  them  hissed  and  roared  the  flames, 
heating  the  atmosphere  to  suffocating.  Not  long 
could  it  be  endured. 

It  seemed  to  me  an  eternity  before  the  flames 
subsided;  and  I  already  counted  our  men  as  among 
the  dead.  Who  could  survive  so  long  a  spell  of 
flame  and  heat? 

No  one  was  therefore  more  astonished  than  I, 
after  the  flames  had  subsided,  to  see  the  men 
finally  rise  to  their  feet,  staggering  with  weakness, 
and  greatly  rejoiced  that  they  were  able  to  do  as 
much. 


26  DOOMED 

Opening  their  eyes,  as  they  became  more  set- 
tled, they  saw  standing  before  them  a  trio  of  state- 
ly figures  bearing  themselves  with  all  the  majestic 
grace  of  heavenly  angels.  Yet  they  were  only 
three  women,  the  leader  of  whom  now  spoke,  ad- 
dressing them  in  their  own  tongue,  though  with  a 
foreign  accent,  saying: 

"Strangers  from  the  East;  barbarians  and 
pirates,  who  have  come  here  for  plunder,  and  to 
carry  off  our  lads  and  women;  worshippers  also 
of  Mam,^  we  pity  your  benighted  state;  and  there- 
fore pardon  you,  sparing  your  lives.  But  this  we 
do  on  the  one  condition,  that  you  instantly  leave 
these  shores,  and  return  no  more.  You  have  wit- 
nessed the  power  we  wield.     Go  !" 

The  severely  stern  manner  of  this  utterance  by 
angel,  goddess,  witch  or  siren,  was  such  as  de- 
manded obedience.  It  augured  possession  of 
supernatural  powers  which  mortals  had  better 
leave  unchallenged. 

In  the  blanched  faces  of  his  followers.  Master 
Gogol  could  discern  no  trace  of  further  fight; 
neither  could  he  stir  his  own  chilled  blood  to 
warmth. 

Brave   as  these  warriors  were,   they  had  no 

1  Mammon,  the  serpent  and  goddess  of  gain,  was  known  by 
the  Atlons  only  as  Mara,  by  which  we  may  infer  that  these 
women  were  Atlons. 


IN  THE  WIDER  WORLD  27 

heart  to  cope  with  wizardry  such  as  that  from 
which  they  had  so  narrowly  escaped.  So,  with 
downcast  mien  and  bowed  heads,  at  their  leader's 
bidding,  they  wheeled  about  and  made  a  bee  line 
for  our  vessel;  and  there,  we  who  had  been  idle 
spectators  of  the  scene,  joined  them.  However 
much  disappointed  in  our  expectations,  we  were  all 
glad  again  to  be  safe  aboard  ship. 

But  we  had  not  entirely  escaped  the  wizardry 
of  this  weird  continent,  as  shall  presently  be  seen. 
No  sooner  were  we  again  far  out  at  sea,  away  as 
we  thought  from  this  witch-haunted  shore,  than  a 
great  lull  began,  the  air  grew  stifling  and  our  sails 
became  useless.  There,  far  out  upon  the  horizon 
could  now  be  seen  a  single  speck  of  cloud,  and 
though  only  a  mere  dot,  it  brought  to  Master 
Gogol  a  feeling  of  great  uneasiness. 

In  a  little  while  that  tiny  speck  had  swollen  into 
an  ominous  body  of  swiftly  moving  blackness, 
heading  directly  for  our  ship.  Soon  after,  raving 
winds  sprang  like  harpies  out  of  the  cloud  and 
tore  mercilessly  at  our  sails,  forcing  our  men  to 
take  down  the  last  rag  of  them,  and  that  with 
much  peril  to  their  lives.  Before  we  had  time  to 
think,  the  whole  sky  had  become  one  solid  mass  of 
black,  enveloping  us  in  a  gloom  so  dense  we  could 
scarcely  see  an  arm's  length  ahead.     The  feeble 


28  DOOMED 

light  of  a  few  ship  lanthorns  and  the  lurid  flashes 
of  Jove's  thunderbolts  were  all  we  had  to  guide 
our  steps.  By  and  by,  timbers  began  to  creak  and 
groan,  and  anon  tall  masts  came  crashing  down 
upon  us,  killing  not  a  few;  while  over  the  deck 
swept  mountainous  waves  making  it  perilous  for 
even  our  stoutest  men  to  remain. 

In  the  awful  crash  of  elements,  our  frail  vessel 
was  a  mere  egg  shell,  cracked  and  leaking  from  so 
many  pores  as  to  be  beyond  repair.  How  she 
tossed  and  reeled !  I  shall  never  forget  the  man- 
ner in  which  we  were  tumbled  about.  Advancing 
like  a  huge  leviathan  with  open  jaws,  came  the 
flood  of  waters  hungering  to  swallow  ship  and  all. 
To  longer  remain  aboard,  was  to  court  certain 
death. 

With  Master  Gogol  and  many  others,  I  now 
desperately  sprang  overboard,  hopeless  of  sur- 
vival. Well  for  me  now  were  the  lessons  in  swim- 
ming I  had  received;  for  these  enabled  me  to 
breast  the  waves  until  able  to  clutch  a  floating 
spar,  to  which  I  clung  for  dear  life. 

While  thus  floating,  I  bethought  me  of  the  poor 
galley  slaves,  chained  to  their  benches,  in  the  hold 
of  the  sinking  vessel.  Who  now  but  the  gods 
could  rescue  them  from  their  peril?  At  the  very 
moment,  the  vessel  seemed  to  split  asunder  and 
sink  from  view,  taking  my  breath  with  its  sud- 


"Advancing  like  a  hnge  leviathan  with  open  jaws,  came  the 
flood  of  waters  hungering  to  swallow  ship  and  all.  To 
longer   remain    ahoard   was    to   court   certain   death." 


IN  THE  WIDER  WORLD  29 

denness.  So  ended  the  career  of  these  desperate 
men,  after  having  suffered  full  penance  for  their 
crimes;  and  who  knows  how  many  of  them  had 
been  more  sinned  against  than  sinning! 

All  night  long  was  the  spar  bearing  me  tossed 
heedlessly  by  the  mad  waves,  dashed  mercilessly 
against  the  rocks  with  which  the  shoreward  waters 
abounded.  How  my  bruised  limbs  ached,  till 
utter  exhaustion  drove  me  into  a  sleep  hovering 
twixt  life  and  death,  and  which  a  mere  breath 
might  turn  either  way. 


CHAPTER  III 

Beyond  the  Wider  World 

Little  the  worse  was  I  for  the  scratches  and 
bruises  I  had  received  in  the  tempest  of  the  previ- 
ous day.  I  was  now  lodging  in  the  home  of  a 
physician  named  Gomar,  who  had  attended  me 
after  my  rescue  on  the  waterfront  of  the  city  of 
Athc,  in  the  land  of  Atlo — a  part  of  the  continent 
of  Atlantis. 

I  had  passed  beyond  that  wider  world  I  had 
so  much  longed  to  see,  and  of  which  I  had  en- 
joyed a  few  glimpses.  .  .  But  here  in  this  new 
world  my  stay  was  to  be  brief,  unless  I  chose  to 
become  a  permanent  resident,  forever  renouncing 
the  world  I  had  left  behind.  It  was  an  impossible 
demand,  though  tempered  with  the  assurance  that 
if  I  remained  I  would  be  admitted  to  Atlon  citi- 
zenship and  endowed  with  an  Atlon's  due  share  of 
inalienable  property. 

To  many  persons  the  offer  would  have  been 
irresistibly  tempting,  since  such  liberality  was  a 
thing  unheard  of.  In  all  other  lands,  arriving  as 
I  did,  I  should  have  been  either  held  for  ransom, 
or  else  sold  into  bondage. 

30 


BEYOND  THE  WIDER  WORLD  31 

It  was  for  this  reason  a  very  handsome  offer, 
though  to  me  appearing  meanly  inadequate.  How 
could  I  renounce  home  and  kin  and  country,  and 
also  my  princely  fortune  and  rank — each  a  sep- 
arate jewel  above  compare  with  the  gift  they 
offered? 

In  no  other  way  could  I  view  the  alternatives 
given  me,  until  my  host,  the  physician  harboring 
me — talking  to  me  in  his  quaint  mask  of  Aramaic, 
from  which  our  Phoenician  had  been  derived — 
managed  to  open  my  eyes. 

It  was  marvelous,  the  way  his  few  simple  words 
shattered  all  my  previous  conceptions !  What  a 
blight  they  cast  upon  my  former  world,  making  it 
now  seem,  in  my  eyes,  a  vast  den  of  thieves — an 
abode  of  horrors! 

What  a  pickpocket's  tool  my  host  made  of 
Mam's  maxim,  with  which,  until  this  day,  I  had 
been  so  enamored!  He  made  me  see  how  the 
myriads  of  shekels  had  passed  from  the  pockets 
of  the  people  Into  a  few  bulging  hoards;  and  how, 
in  failing  to  return,  they  had  kept  strong  hands 
shackled  for  want  of  hire  and  tables  bare  for  want 
of  bread — the  beast  of  hunger  meanwhile  gnaw- 
ing at  the  vitals  of  the  people.  Each  hoarded 
shekel  had  been  a  separate  wolf  at  the  toiler's 
door — invisible,  but  to  all  inmates  an  ever-present 


32  DOOMED 

apparition — a  ghostly  vampire  sucking  at  their 
blood,  till  pallid  faces  and  furrowed  brows,  and 
hollow  eyes,  bespoke  its  presence  in  language  more 
eloquent  than  words. 

In  all  my  previous  days  had  such  sights  con- 
fronted me,  though  I  heeded  not.  For  my  heart 
was  then  hard  with  class  arrogance,  accepting  the 
sad  lot  of  the  many  as  a  thing  that  had  to  be,  like 
rain  and  cold  and  storm.  Besides,  had  they  not 
courted  this  doom  by  multiplying  so  fast?  Would 
not  better  fare  lead  them  to  breed  the  faster,  and 
so  defeat  the  object  aimed  at?  Did  not  our  wise 
men  so  teach,  by  way  of  caution?  Did  not  the 
path  of  wisdom  lie  in  keeping  them  well  curbed; 
with  a  strong  ruling  class  in  power,  to  maintain 
peace  and  order? 

But  it  had  not  at  that  time  been  shown  to  me 
how  the  hoarding  of  the  shekels  deprived  men 
both  of  work  and  bread;  and  often  even  of  life. 
I  had  not  yet  seen  it,  save  as  an  innocent  prac- 
tice, leading  to  higher  rank  and  station.  I  had 
never  dreamt  it  had  bred  famines  and  swept 
whole  regions  like  flies  to  death,  unburied  and 
unmourned.  I  had  believed  all  famines  were  due 
to  negligence  or  chance,  never  SLuspecting  any  of 
them  due  to  the  neglect  of  the  rich  to  do  their 
share  of  spending! 

Well  enough  I  realized,  our  class  did  enormous 


BEYOND  THE  WIDER  WORLD  33 

spending;  but  that  had  been  out  of  the  lesser  part 
of  their  income,  while  adding  ever  more  and  more 
to  their  unspent  hoards.  All  were  alike  spurred 
on  to  this  course  by  the  spirit  of  cupidity;  holding 
their  hoards  back,  till  the  pressure  of  want  was 
sufficient  to  compel  the  grant  of  their  terms — a  re- 
turn of  the  principal  with  interest  added 

Through  this  dire  pressure  they  made  a  gambling 
hell  of  trade,  and  a  treadmill  out  of  toil.  The 
shekels  reached  not;  the  work  reached  not;  and 
in  all  ranks  raged  bitter  strife,  along  with  woeful 
failures  and  broken  lives.  From  all  sides  despair 
hurled  men  into  the  mires  of  depravity  and  crime. 

The  hoarded  shekels  were  a  strangling  rope 
around  the  neck  of  the  poor,  keeping  them  for- 
ever on  the  rack  of  poverty — choking  them  till 
driven  into  premature  graves. 

As  in  a  stupor,  so  lived  the  toilers  on,  from 
century  to  century — a  life  depressed,  distorted, 
bestialized — at  far  intervals  waking  up  to  a  vague 
realization  of  the  degradation  to  which  they  stood 
condemned;  and  then,  in  these  momentary  fits, 
they  tore  down  thrones  and  toppled  dynasties,  de- 
posed political  parties  and  factions — raging  till 
their  fever  of  destruction  subsided,  and  again  they 
bent  their  backs  under  the  eternal  yoke,  without 
having  struck  a  blow  at  the  throne  of  Mam,  queen 
of  the  hoarding  world. 


34  DOOMED 

The  very  thought  of  this  new  aspect  of  my 
former  world  caused  me  to  shudder.  What  a 
ghastly  mockery  it  made  of  my  princely  state! 
Should  I  now  return,  how  was  I  to  face  the  accus- 
ing eyes  of  the  outraged  multitudes,  whose  voice- 
less sorrow  would  lash  my  soul  like  knives  gash- 
ing at  my  flesh! 

Were  that  which  I  had  but  now  learned  the 
real  truth,  which,  in  my  heart  of  hearts,  I  was 
unable  to  deny,  how  could  I  return  to  my  former 
world?  Had  I  not  rather  walk  into  some  seeth- 
ing furnace,  than  face  its  horrors? 

To  discard  my  fortune,  and  seek  there  an  hon- 
est livelihood  was  unthinkable  on  Sidon  terms. 
Rather  were  I  a  dog,  than  bow  beneath  the  yoke 
of  toil  in  Sidon. 

Should  I  return,  and  teach  there  the  lesson  I 
had  here  learned?  That  also  was  unthinkable. 
My  own  class,  even  my  father,  would  be  so  bit- 
terly envenomed  against  me,  I  would  be  stoned  to 
death.  Why,  even  the  toilers  had  among  them 
too  many  belly-crawling  wretches  who,  for  the 
smallest  drippings  from  the  fleshpots  of  the  rich, 
would  make  an  end  of  me  I 

Could  it  be  that  my  mind  had  become  fettered 
in  some  spell  of  enchantment?  Could  it  be  possi- 
ble my  physician  host  was  gifted  with  powers  of 


BEYOND  THE  WIDER  WOPLD  35 

wizardry,  with  which  he  was  deluding  me?  Per- 
haps to  make  a  jest,  or  to  punish  me  for  my  tres- 
pass upon  these  shores?  Was  I  not,  in  his  eyes, 
one  of  the  pirate  crew  that  had  sought  to  raid 
this  coast?  Had  they  not  seen  Into  my  heart — a 
thing  easy  for  wizardry  to  do?  And  were  they 
not  now,  perchance,  toying  with  me,  to  rack  my 
mind  with  torture,  before  administering  the  final 
blow  avenging  my  offense? 

But  how  unjust  it  was  of  me  to  look  with  sus- 
picion upon  the  host  who  harbored  me  under  his 
roof,  and  whose  bread  he  shared  with  me?  What 
an  ingrate  I  was ! 

Was  ever  mortal  placed  in  stranger  position? 
Did  appearances  ever  seem  so  hard  to  believe,  and 
yet  so  difficult  to  disbelieve  ?  Yet,  upon  the  reality 
of  my  newly-formed  belief,  my  entire  future  hung 
in  the  balance. 

And  now,  reflecting  upon  the  glowing  colors  in 
which  my  host  had  depicted  the  wonders  of  my 
new  Atlon  world,  the  thought  came  to  me,  what  if 
all  this  dazzling  brilliance  were  but  the  trumpery 
of  a  conjuror's  tricks?  I  had  heard  of  men  cap- 
able of  so  working  upon  men's  minds  as  to  cast 
before  their  eyes  such  visions  as  they  chose.  And 
this  man,  the  physician  Gomar,  what  knew  I  of 
him,  whom,  till  the  previous  day,  I  had  never  set 
eye  on? 


36  DOOMED 

Well  for  me  it  was  I  had  been  given  a  whole 
month  in  which  to  determine  my  course.  The 
spell  of  wizardry,  if  such  it  was,  might  by  that 
time  have  lost  its  power,  leaving  my  mind  free 
and  unclouded.  I  had  never  been  one  of  that  nar- 
row-gauge sort  that  rebels  at  rising  above  the  rut 
in  which  most  minds  travel.  I  well  realized  that 
the  most  Improbable  things  were  not  for  that 
reason  impossible.  Why  then  might  not  all  my 
host  had  depicted  be  true  to  the  very  letter? 

Joining  my  host  at  the  evening  repast,  I  was  In- 
troduced to  the  members  of  his  family,  consisting 
of  Mafra,  his  spouse,  and  Metel,  his  daughter. 
The  meal  was  quite  novel,  consisting  mainly  of 
nutritious  cereals  and  vegetables  prepared  In  a 
manner  making  them  strange  to  my  palate,  though 
so  highly  relished  I  had  to  have  my  dishes  refilled 
more  than  once.  Delicious  fruits  and  condiments 
were  also  offered,  while  of  flesh  naught  was  served 
— being  a  form  of  food  Atlons  rarely  used. 

Mafra,  or  Mother  Mafra,  as  she  was  usually 
addressed,  was  of  middle  age,  prepossessing,  tall, 
and  of  light  complexion.  Though  Inclined  to 
austerity,  she  held  In  reserve  an  elastic  mood 
tinged  with  a  dry  humor,  indicating  breadth  of 
mind. 

The  daughter,  Metel,  was  a  bright  damsel  of 


BEYOND  THE  WIDER  WORLD  37 

perhaps  sixteen  summers,  slender,  of  medium 
height,  and  vivacious.  Of  her  mother's  light  com- 
plexion, her  mood  was  livelier.  She  was  an  adept 
at  the  harp,  and  a  graceful  dancer,  who  lacked 
not  admiring  suitors. 

Physician  Gomar  was  a  tall  man,  of  regular 
features,  wearing  glasses  over  his  eyes.  His  high 
forehead  and  modulated  voice  bespoke  both  intel- 
ligence and  culture. 

Our  repast  over,  we  spent  a  delightful  evening 
In  conversation  about  the  two  worlds  we  repre- 
sented; and  what  I  gleaned  therefrom  only  sharp- 
ened my  appetite  for  more  knowledge  concerning 
this  novel  world.  Before  retiring,  I  had  the 
promise  of  my  hosts  to  accompany  me  on  the  mor- 
row upon  a  jaunt  through  the  city,  enabling  me 
to  see  with  my  own  eyes  all  the  things  I  so  much 
wondered  at. 


CHAPTER  IV 
Atlic,  the  Wonderful 

According  to  promise,  my  hosts  were  out  early 
the  next  day,  escorting  me  to  the  leading  places 
of  interest. 

Go  in  any  direction,  Atlic's  long  avenues  pre- 
sented the  appearance  of  an  extended,  uninter- 
rupted park,  shaded,  lawned,  paved,  and  embell- 
ished with  every  imaginable  attraction.  Not  even 
Athens  could  boast  cleaner  thoroughfares  or  walks 
less  obstructed;  for  upon  these  avenues  neither 

vehicles  nor  beasts  of  burden  ever  intruded 

Here  Immense  trees  spread  their  rich  foliage  over 
the  heads  of  pedestrians,  and  canopied  benches 
offered  them  shade  and  rest,  when  wearied.  As 
we  strolled  on  the  fine  walks,  we  passed  between 
beds  of  flowers  smiling  in  every  dainty  hue,  and 
marble  statues  posing  in  every  attitude  of  grace 
and  vigor.  And  there  were  no  end  of  tinkling 
fountains,  whose  merry  notes  mingled  with  those 
of  the  birds  overhead. 

But  all  this  served  only  as  background  to  the 
myriads  of  cheerful  people  we  encountered  on  all 

38 


ATLIC,  THE  WONDERFUL  39 

sides,  gaily  absorbed  in  lively  conversations,  whose 
sweet  cadence  poured  like  music  into  one's  ears. 
What  model  features,  beaming  with  intelligence; 
and  what  graceful  charm  there  was  in  their  every 
move! 

Even  their  dress,  so  varied  one  could  character- 
ize it  by  no  single  style,  exhibited  a  taste  seldom 
to  be  met.  Their  garments  seemed  to  be  part  of 
their  very  bodies,  so  did  they  harmonize  with  the 
peculiarities  of  each  wearer. 

Fully  as  graceful  and  lithe  of  limb  as  Athenians, 
were  these  Atlicans,  and  a  half  a  head  taller. 
Passing  amongst  them,  I  seemed  to  be  moving 
among  gods,  and  not  mere  mortals.  This  alone 
was  enough  to  stamp  my  environment  as  that  of 
another  world. 

And  while  we  everywhere  met  these  cheerful 
groups,  nowhere  did  we  encounter  any  crowds. 
What  was  still  more  striking,  was  the  uniform 
good  will  visible  on  all  sides.  Not  a  suggestion 
was  there  of  classes  such  as  scowled  at  one  an- 
other in  the  streets  of  other  cities.  How  different 
from  the  scenes  in  which  our  mounted  Sidon  nobles 
had  to  force  their  way  through  mobs  in  the  nar- 
row streets,  preceded  by  ruffians  using  vile  epithets 
and  clubs  to  part  the  crowds.  .  .  .  Nor  passed 
we  anywhere  between  musty  shops  and  their  heaps 
of  wares  piled  in  front  of  them,  with  boisterous 


40  DOOMED 

criers  shrieking  their  praises,  and  anon  with 
smooth-tongued  importunities  enticing  wayfarers 
in.  Neither  heard  we  the  jangling  clamor  of  tire- 
less tongues,  higgling  in  every  doorway. 

Throughout  the  entire  length  of  each  avenue 
also  ran  a  smooth-trimmed  hedge  beyond  which, 
four  cubits  lower,  hidden  from  view,  ran  the 
street,  crossed  at  intersections  by  stout  bridges 
and  reached  from  basement  floors  and  station 
stairways  upon  the  avenue. 

It  was  a  strange  sight,  looking  down  upon  a 
street  from  an  avenue  bridge,  to  behold  the  numer- 
ous queer  vehicles  called  jubros  whizzing  by  like 
so  many  phantoms,  noiseless,  and  more  wondrous 
still — self-propelled ! 

I  was  perfectly  dumbfounded  by  the  mystery 
of  this  uncanny  demonstration.  I  would  have  been 
ready  to  believe  the  vehicles  inhabited  by  genii, 
or  other  supernatural  beings,  but  for  the  explan- 
ation given  by  my  good  host,  that  the  power  driv- 
ing them  was  one  generated  through  the  burning 
of  a  fluid,  called  Atlene,  so  named  after  the  Sun 
God  AT,  and  obtained  from  a  mountain  lake 
daily  kissed  by  that  great  deity  to  renew  its  inflam- 
mability. It  then  occurred  to  me  that  It  must  have 
been  the  spray  from  this  liquid,  that  had  been 
afire,  and  had  so  alarmed  Shipmaster  Gogol  and 
his  men. 


ATLIC,  THE  WONDERFUL  41 

The  almost  noiseless  gliding  of  these  strange 
chariots,  my  host  informed  me,  was  due  to  an 
elastic  substance  placed  over  their  wheels,  made 
from  the  sap  of  a  tree  originally  brought  to  Atlo 
from  a  world  far  to  the  west,  called  Nameless 
Land. 

But  silent  as  were  these  Atlon  chariots,  they 
could  emit  noises  upon  occasion,  enough  to  freeze 
one's  blood.  These  they  emitted  as  signals  for 
slower-paced  vehicles  in  their  way  to  turn  aside. 

Along  the  avenue  sides  rose  immense  detached 
buildings,  stately  and  impressive,  called  oros,  each 
of  which  housed  many  families.  They  were  faced 
with  brick  and  stone,  in  variegated  colors,  and 
supplied  v\^ith  glistening  windows,  curtained  within, 
and  hung  with  canvas  awnings.  Each  family  had 
its  separate  quarters,  while  a  portion  was  kept 
apart  for  common  use,  called  the  oroto.  In  this 
portion  they  met  one  another  in  a  social  way,  mak- 
ing it  a  broader  parlor  or  club  room. 

In  the  heart  of  the  city,  the  entire  area  was 
given  up  to  public  structures,  both  of  the  munici- 
pality and  the  State,  Atlic  being  the  capital  of 
Atlo.  These  were  all  palatial  buildings,  of  pol- 
ished marble,  with  inlaid  floors  and  tapestried 
walls.  Such  magnificence  was  nowhere  else  to  be 
seen.    They  were  not  as  majestic  as  the  Athenian 


42  DOOMED 

temples,  nor  faced  with  such  imposing  arrays  of 
massive  pillars,  nor  as  colossal  in  stature  as  tem- 
ples I  had  seen  upon  the  Nil;  but  apart  from  their 
superior  elegance,  they  contained  features  of 
utility  making  them  far  surpass  all  others. 

Permitted  to  mount  to  the  roof  of  one  of  these 
edifices,  I  had  a  splendid  view  of  the  entire  city, 
spreading  out  to  the  endless  sea  on  the  north,  and 
on  the  south  to  a  dark  line  of  low  hills  crossing 
the  horizon.  Running  parallel  with  the  sea  coast 
was  a  long  silver  streak,  the  Atlic  Canal,  its  bosom 
dotted  with  vessels  that  sped  hither  and  thither 
with  great  speed.     They  were,  like  the  jubros, 

Atlene-propelled,  and  were  called  jubrets 

Upon  either  side  of  the  canal,  lined  up  innumer- 
able wharves  and  warehouses,  and  not  a  few  great 
factories  overhung  with  clouds  of  smoke.  It  was 
a  bustling  district,  the  industrial  heart  of  the  city, 
as  the  palatial  district  was  its  civic  center. 

All  the  rest  of  the  city  was  filled  with  tall  oros, 
of  uniform  height,  with  red-tiled  roofs,  grouped 
in  squares  facing  its  avenues,  from  which  rose  to 
the  same  level  rows  of  tall  tree  tops,  breaking  the 
red  squares  of  oro  roofs  with  their  bright  green 
lines  and  giving  the  oro  sections  the  appearance 
of  a  huge  checker  board  spread  out  before  the 
eye. 


ATLIC,  THE  WONDERFUL 


43 


Conversing  with  the  fair  damsel,  Metel,  I  asked 
her  in  what  portion  of  the  city  its  poor  resided. 

"We  have  no  poor  in  Athc,"  she  replied,  "nor 
in  all  Atlo.  Yet  your  world,  as  I  hear,  fairly 
swarms  with  them?    What  a  pity!" 

"With  shame  I  confess  what  you  say  is  all  too 
true,"  I  retorted.  "It  is  a  brand  of  terrible  in- 
competence,  or  else  willful  evil,  on  the  part  of  our 
rulers." 

Returning  homeward  in  a  jubro,  I  was  given 
fresh  cause  for  marvel,  seeing  with  what  precision 
this  automatic  beast  was  driven  and  controlled. 

Arrived  home,  our  party  separated,  Metel  to 
do  some  shopping,  and  her  father  to  attend  his 
professional  business.  So  it  fell  upon  Mother 
Mafra  to  show  me  through  the  interior  of  their 
oro. 

^  Passing  from  floor  to  floor,  she  drew  my  atten- 
tion to  the  splendid  condition  in  which  the  build- 
ing was  kept,  and  also  to  its  attractive  ornamenta- 
tions. One  after  the  other,  she  then  drew  my  at- 
tention to  its  unique  equipments,  explaining  the  use 
of  each.  In  the  number  and  variety  of  these  no 
Sidon  palace  could  compare. 

How  my  eyes  bulged  when,  down  in  the  base- 
ment floors,  I  beheld  the  amazing  store  of  choice 
household  supplies  and  provisions,  all  carefully 


44  DOOMED 

spread  on  trays  and  racks,  and  all  exposed  to 
ample  ventilation  in  the  soft  glare  of  Atlene  lamps. 
And  all  this  I  was  informed  constituted  but  a 
moiety  of  their  stores — the  remainder  being  kept 
in  oro  warehouses  from  which  these  stores  were 
daily  replenished.  .  .  .  All  these  supplies,  more- 
over, were  already  paid  for,  and  a  large  quantity 

of  undelivered  materials  one-half  prepaid 

They  made  most  of  their  purchases  from  co- 
operative shops  and  factories,  and  also  from  co- 
operative groups  of  husbandmen,  with  rarely  a 
dealer  to  intervene.  All  the  cost  of  this  great  pro- 
fusion also  embodied  no  more  than  that  of  the 
labor  entering  into  their  making  and  delivery.^ 

In  the  family  quarters  of  Mother  Mafra,  I  was 
shown  their  stores  of  napery  and  table  ware,  of 
which  there  seemed  to  be  enough  to  last  for  gen- 
erations— all  of  excellent  texture,  and  much  of  it 
ornamented  with  embroidered  designs.  Not  even 
my  mother,  Folka,  could  boast  such  an  outfit. 
.  .  In  another  chamber  I  was  shown  the  ward- 
robes of  each  member  of  the  family — a  display 
the  proudest  nobles  in  my  world  could  hardly 
equal  in  quality  and  variety.     What  gowns  and 

1  One  might,  from  these  remarks  of  Mother  Mafra,  easily  be 
misled  into  assuming  that  the  Atlons  had  in  operation  some 
form  of  Socialism.  Yet  nothing  were  further  from  the  truth, 
as  later  information  will  amply  demonstrate;  for  nowhere  was 
private  property  so  fully  developed  and  shielded. 


ATLIC,  THE  WONDERFUL  45 

cloaks,  tunics,  kaftans,  breeches,  sacques,  jackets, 
head  gear  and  foot  gear,  besides  the  infinite 
variety^  of  soft,  dehcate  underwear,  were  here 
spread  out  upon  its  broad  sHding  racks,  which  lay 
so  convenient  of  access,  enclosed  in  the  massive 
wardrobes. 

On  the  floor  above,  we  visited  the  oroto — the 
social  section  of  the  oro.  Here  were  spacious 
assembly  rooms  devoted  to  dances,  theatricals, 
lectures,  ceremonials  and  all  purposes  requiring 
assemblage.  Here  also  were  reading  rooms  and 
a  library,  separate  gymnasiums  for  each  of  the 
sexes,  and  a  series  of  parlors  in  which  to  indulge 
in  conversation  or  in  games  and  pastimes.  .  .  . 
Every  oro  also  had  its  spare  rooms  for  guests,  a 
sick  ward,  and  a  nursery  in  which  little  ones  were 

cared  for  in  the  absence  of  their  guardians 

Each  had  also  an  immense  court  on  the  interior, 
in  which  the  smaller  oro  children  romped  and 
revelled. 

Such  was  the  oroto  and  its  adjuncts — the 
broader  parlor  into  which  the  individual  parlors 
of  private  quarters  opened,  making  of  the  oro 
residents  a  broader  family  group.  Within  its  pre- 
cincts, only  real  distinctions  counted — actual 
merit,  to  which  all  showed  deference.  Pretensions 
based  on  birth,  or  deceit  of  any  kind,  were  here 


46  DOOMED 

so  frowned  upon  that  it  was  folly  to  endeavor 
to  make  use  of  them. 

Returning  to  our  quarters,  my  hostess  assured 
me  that  what  I  had  here  seen,  whether  within  the 
oro,  or  outside  in  Atlic,  was  to  be  met  with  in  all 
parts  of  Atlo — in  city,  town  or  in  its  rural  dis- 
tricts, where  isolated  oros  and  small  groups  of 
them  took  the  place  of  villages.  Everywhere,  the 
men  owned  the  outfits  of  their  occupation,  and  the 
women  the  homes,  all  of  which  were  so  conducted 
as  to  be  made  inalienable.  Through  this  scrupu- 
lous care  of  the  people's  properties,  this  land  was 
free  from  the  curse  of  poverty. 

"That  any  land  could  possibly  be  blessed  with 
such  prodigious  wealth,"  I  confessed,  "as  what  I 
have  this  day  seen  exhibited,  is  more  than  I  would 
ever  have  believed;  and  even  now,  after  having 
seen  the  palpable  evidences  of  the  marvel,  my 
mind  still  seems  to  view  it  as  a  profound  mystery 
— a  work  of  wizardry,  rather  than  the  product 
of  simple  wisdom  and  industry." 

"I  do  not  wonder  at  the  feeling  of  amazement, 
and  the  spirit  of  doubt  that  still  mingles  in  your 
thoughts,"  my  hostess  replied,  "but  this  very 
evening,  after  our  repast  and  your  needed  siesta, 
the  way  in  which  we  achieve  these  grand  results 
will  be  fully  explained,  and  its  simplicity  will  be 
as  great  a  surprise  to  you,  as  the  marvelous  tokens 
of  our  affluence." 


CHAPTER  V 

The  Wonder-Working  Secret 

My  siesta  over,  I  was  ushered  into  a  smug 
library,  illumined  by  myriads  of  tiny  jets  softly 
sparkling  from  a  dark  velvety  belt  girdling  the 
walls  of  the  room.  The  material  of  which  the 
belt  was  composed  was  incombustible,  as  were  also 
the  slender  cords  leading  to  the  jets  from  jars  of 
Atlene  concealed  in  wall  niches. 

After  a  spell  of  preliminary  conversation,  in 
which  all  Indulged,  Physician  Gomar  began  the 
promised  revelation  of  the  secret  of  Atlo's  mar- 
velous prosperity.  .  .  .  "You  already  under- 
stand, my  young  friend,  the  blighting  effects  pro- 
duced in  your  Mamnist  world  by  shekel-hoarding 
— how  it  produces  on  one  side  artificial  scarcity  of 
shekels  and  wealth,  and  on  the  other  a  monopoly 
of  them,  through  which  permanent  dispossession 
and  poverty  become  the  lot  of  the  masses,  making 
their  lives  one  endless  reign  of  want  and  worry. 
.  .  .  You  realize  all  this  so  well,  I  need  dilate  no 
further  on  the  horror." 

"All  my  life,"  I  interjected,  "has  this  tragedy 
of  the  ages  been  playing  before  my  eyes — this 

47 


48  DOOMED 

visible  symptom  of  a  gruesome  disease  eating  out 
the  better  part  of  man — a  sort  of  leprosy — a 
disease  incurable." 

"Say  not  incurable,"  protested  my  host,  "since 
its  source  Is,  by  your  own  admission,  well  under- 
stood; and  that  is  of  itself  half  a  cure.  With  this 
abomination  of  shekel-hoarding  stopped,  the  cure 
follows  of  itself." 

"But  it  seems  to  me,  that  to  stop  shekel-hoard- 
ing were  as  great  a  stumbling  block  as  to  find  the 
cure.  The  one  seems  to  me  as  impossible  as  the 
other." 

"Far  from  being  impossible,  my  dear  friend," 
he  suavely  retorted,  "the  prevention  of  shekel- 
hoarding  is  already  in  Atlo  AN  ACCOM- 
PLISHED FACT.  You'll  see  it  In  operation 
here  every  day;  and  if  you'll  listen  to  Mother 
Mafra  a  few  moments,  she'll  make  the  manner 
of  its  doing  so  clear  to  you,  you'll  be  surprised  at 
its  simplicity." 

Responding  to  this  appeal.  Mother  Mafra  be- 
gan: "In  Atlo  everyone  is  obliged  to  spend  FOR 
HIS  LIVING  every  shekel  he  takes  in— LEAV- 
ING NO  CHANCE  TO  HOARD." 

"It's  plain  enough  that  compelling  men  to  spend 
all  their  shekels  would  make  it  impossible  to  hoard 
any.  But  who  is  to  watch  EVERYBODY,  and 
see  that  ALL  shekels  are  spent?"  I  protested. 


THE  WONDER-WORKING  SECRET  49 

"We  take  care  of  that,  friend  Loab,  by  using 
bronze  shekels  which  each  gets  on  paying  out  sil- 
ver ones,  and  which  each  of  us  has  to  give  on  re- 
ceiving any  of  silver,  shekel  for  shekel.  The 
recipient  of  silver  shekels  has  not  only  to  give  the 
payer  the  articles  paid  for,  but  as  many  bronze 
shekels  in  addition,  .  .  Were  I  to  buy  a  hat  for 
ten  shekels,  the  seller  would  have  to  give  me  both 
the  hat  and  ten  bronze  shekels,  .  .  So  it  goes  on 
from  one  person  to  the  next,  no  one  able  to  take 
in  silver  without  giving  bronze,  or  able  to  get 
bronze  shekels  without  paying  out  silver  ones. 
.  .  The  bronze  shekels  being  so  necessary, 
EVERYBODY  insists  on  getting  them  when  pay- 
ing out  silver;  so  EVERYBODY  compels 
EVERYBODY  ELSE  to  keep  on  spending  if  they 
wish  to  keep  on  taking  in  any  money.  Everybody 
has  to  SPEND  as  much  as  he  takes  in.  It's  stop 
taking  in,  if  you  stop  spending." 

"At  that  rate,"  I  conceded,  "you  have  in  every 
man  and  woman  an  officer  of  the  law  compelling 
the  silver  shekels  to  keep  forever  MOVING  ON, 
since  no  one  wants  to  really  stop  taking  in  any 
more  of  them.  A  man's  buying  must  here  keep 
close  pace  with  his  selling,  just  as  one's  right  leg 
has  to  keep  close  pace  with  his  left.  They  can 
never  get  far  apart," 

"Our  trade  is  always  on  the  trot  and  in  im- 


so  DOOMED 

mense  volume — so  different  from  what  It  had  been 
in  our  Old  Atlo,  which  was  Mamnlst.  In  those 
days  everybody  shunned  buying  as  If  It  were  a 
plague  and  courted  selling  with  lying  tongue  and 
every  artifice.  Why?  Because  we  were  tacitly 
offering  Income-yielding  fortunes  to  those  who 
took  in  the  most  and  spent  the  least.  Behind 
every  shekel  one  spent  lurked  the  danger  of  being 
unable  to  replace  It  to  bar  from  the  door  the  wolf 
of  hunger.  This  necessity  to  dread  spending 
stifled  Industry  and  starved  humanity.  It  retarded 
all  development  and  turned  Into  demons  count- 
less numbers  who  had  else  been  angels." 

"A  Mamnlst  philosopher,"  said  I,  "compared 
our  earth  to  an  insane  ward  in  the  scheme  of  the 
universe." 

"If  It's  not  the  insane  ward  of  the  universe," 
she  replied,  "It  must  be  an  earthly  Hades,  whose 
tortures  are  presided  over  by  old  Sat  himself." 

"But  if  you  spend  ALL  your  shekels  here  for 
a  living,"  I  now  asked,  "how  does  a  man  manage 
to  acquire  any  properties  of  his  own?  How  did 
you  manage  to  get  any  properties  after  making 
your  shekels  UNHOARDABLE?" 

"To  spend  our  shekels  for  a  living  does  not  pre- 
vent us  from  acquiring  our  own  properties.  To 
perpetuate  the  home  is  as  much  a  living  cost  as  to 


THE  WONDER-WORKING  SECRET 


51 


replace  your  coat  or  shoes.    So  it  Is,  to  perpetuate 
the  shop  you  work  in,  together  with  all  its  equip- 
ments.  .   .  We  help  our  people  to  acquire  these  by 
preventing  the  shekels  needed  for  it  from  being 
diverted  by  shekel  and  property  hoarders. 
The  acquisitions  we  do  not  allow  are  those  com- 
prising a  loanable  surplusage  of  properties— prop- 
erties having  no  other  use  than  to  be  applied  so  as 
to  yield  an  income  through  the  mere  fact  of  their 
possession— an  income  those  have  to  contribute 
who  have  been  left  without  properties  of  their 
own,^  as  the  very  result  of  the  hoarding  by  which 
acquisition    of   such    surplusages   of   property   is 
achieved." 

"I  see;  what  you  forbid,  is  the  acquisition  of 
properties  to  be  turned  into  PROFITEERING 
CAPITAL — the  cumulative  result  of  deficient 
spending,  through  which  the  masses  become  dis- 
possessed and  are  forced  to  submit  to  the  profiteer- 
ing exaction  of  INTEREST  on  capital." 

"Were  we  to  permit  the  acquisition  of  profiteer- 
mg  properties,  it  would  only  open  another  outlet 
for  accumulated  hoards  and  render  futile  the  use 
of  bronze  shekels.  It  would  only  revive  both  the 
opportunity  and  the  incentive  to  shekel  hoarding." 

"But  if  the  masses  earned  so  little,"  I  now 
asked,  "and  couldn't  take  in  more  than  they  spent, 


52  DOOMED 

I  fall  to  see  how  they  could  have  earned  enough 
to  have  acquired  properties.  You  can  no  doubt 
explain  how  it  was  done — something  I  will  be  glad 
to  learn." 

"Accompanying  the  introduction  of  bronze 
shekels,  a  liberal  supply  of  which  were  given  free 
to  every  toiler,  we  commandeered  the  surplus 
properties  of  our  profiteering  capitalists.  .  .  In 
other  words,  we  bought  the  properties  from  them 
on  time  for  their  respective  operatives,  to  whom 
we  turned  over  possession.  .  .  We  Immediately 
assessed  both  their  commercial  and  their  real 
value — the  former,  as  the  basis  for  the  portion 
each  seller  was  to  receive,  after  a  common  element 
of  Inflation  was  deducted — determined  by  the  dif- 
ference between  the  actual  and  the  commercial 
value  of  the  aggregate  properties. 

"The  tollers  were  to  pay  for  them  In  monthly 
instalments  made  for  a  period  of  ten  years,  and 
beginning  a  month  after  they  took  possession.  .  .  . 
In  order  to  evade  forfeiting  these  payments  the 
capitalists  had  to  provide  themselves  with  bronze 
shekels  to  give  the  payers,  the  acquisition  of  which 
necessitated  spending  proportionally.  .  .  .  The 
tollers,  now  able  to  earn  what  had  previously  gone 
Into  paying  Interest  on  capital,  had  an  ample  mar- 
gin from  which  to  pay  the  deflated  body  of  capital, 
besides  enjoying  a  far  better  living  than  before — • 


THE  WONDER-WORKING  SECRET  53 

since,  under  the  enormous  Increase  in  the  volume 
of  shekels  now  spent  by  the  capitalists,  labor 
prices  rose  proportionally. 

"They  suffered  no  longer  by  the  delinquent 
spending  of  the  profiteering  capitalists  and  the 
artificial  scarcity  of  demand  for  labor,  but  were 
making  the  capitalists  make  good  all  the  previous 
delinquent  spending — a  colossal  debt  still  due 
them.  What  had  been  wrested  from  them  by 
deficient  spending  on  the  part  of  the  profiteers  was 
now  being  restored  by  making  good  the  deficient 
spending,  and  thereby  swelling  instead  of  shrink- 
ing labor  values." 

"It  seems  strange,  but  capitalists  had  always 
been  credited  with  being  prodigious  spenders?"  I 
querulously  remarked. 

"Capitalists  have  always  been  large  spenders, 
but  only  of  shekels  previously  EXTORTED 
from  toilers,  either  in  INFLATED  prices  on 
monopolized  wares,  or  else  In  UNDER- 
VALUED labor  that  had  to  be  sold  In  the  face 
of  an  extremely  SHORT  labor  demand — a  de- 
mand Improperly  shrunken  by  extensive  shekel 
hoarding.  The  extorted  shekels  he  spent, 
OTHER  PEOPLE'S  SHEKELS,  made  a  de- 
mand for  labor  of  the  kind  made  by  locust  pests 
in  devouring  crops.  They  made  a  large  demand 
for  labor,   but  NOT   for   REMUNERATIVE 


54  DOOMED 

labor.  .  .  .  The  tollers  were  given  work,  but 
no  PAID  work  came  to  them  through  the  spend- 
ing done  by  capitalists.  They  In  reality  received 
only  a  portion  of  the  work  made  by  their  own 
consuming;  and  for  what  they  spent  In  paying  the 
capitalist's  extortions  they  received  no  compensa- 
tion. The  demand  the  capitalist  made  by  spend- 
ing shekels  previously  extorted  was  In  reality  a 
COUNTERFEIT  labor  demand  just  as  the 
quantity  of  work  It  added  was  UNPAID  work." 

"I  now  understand,"  I  joyously  exclaimed. 
"While  doing  a  prodigious  counterfeit  spending, 
they  practically  did  no  real  spending,  and  you 
STOPPED  their  counterfeit  spending  and  com- 
pelled them  to  make  good  their  delinquent  real 
spending.  Artificially  short  labor  demand  and 
artificially  short  product  supply  had  both  been 
skinning  toilers  to  the  bone;  and  you  reversed  the 
conditions,  giving  the  tollers  a  retributively  long 
labor  demand  and  retributively  large  earnings,  by 
which  to  honestly  wipe  out  the  old  score." 

"I  am  very  glad  to  see  you  so  quick  to  grasp 
the  situation,  Loab.  For  the  government  to 
allow  a  counterfeit  demand  to  be  palmed  off  on 
the  people  was  just  as  bad  as  if  It  had  allowed  the 
people  to  be  cheated  by  skillful  money  counter- 
feiters. .  .  .  We  had  many  such  cunning  value 
manipulators  circulating  In  the  Old  Atlo;  and  to 


THE  WONDER-WORKING  SECRET  55 

preserve  their  divine  privileges,  they  were  always 
dabbling  in  politics,  and  getting  control  of  our 
government,  and  bringing  it  into  disrepute.  At 
last  they  became  so  brazen,  It  was  no  longer  safe 
for  one  of  them  to  remain  in  Atlo — they  had 
made  it  so  lawless." 

"And  now,  suppose  we  drop  the  subject  for 
today;"  interposed  Physician  Gomar,  "and  if 
agreeable,  we  will  go  on  with  it  tomorrow  evening. 
What  say  you?" 

"I  am  very  thankful  to  you,  friends,"  I  re- 
sponded, "for  teaching  me  this  valuable  lesson 
that  has  so  opened  my  eyes,  I  begin  to  see  things 
in  a  new  light.  It  will  be  a  pleasure  for  me  to 
be  present  at  tomorrow's  sitting." 

And  so  we  parted,  after  listening  to  a  pathetic 
harp  solo  by  Metel,  and  a  recitation  by  her 
mother. 


CHAPTER  VI 

An  Hour  in  the  Oroto 

Together  with  Metel,  I  took  a  stroll  the  next 
morning  through  the  bustling  district  of  the  canal 
front,  lined  with  rattling  factories  and  huge  ware- 
houses, between  which  plied  innumerable  jubrets 
laden  with  productions,  either  brought  in  from  the 
outlying  rural  districts  or  sent  out  from  the  busy 
factories  and  destined  for  the  cities  and  towns  on 
and  adjacent  to  the  canal. 

The  factory  warehouses  contained  few  finished 
productions — these  almost  invariably  being  at 
once  dispatched  to  oro  warehouses,  to  be  there 
held  till  called  for  by  the  respective  oros.  Only 
the  materials  entering  into  their  productions  were 
kept  in  the  factory  warehouses,  but  in  large  quan- 
tities; for  factories  always  had  large  numbers  of 
advance  orders,  one-half  prepaid  and  the  other 
half  due  on  delivery;  and  all  these  prepayments 
enabled  them  to  carry  large  stores  of  prepaid  ma- 
terials. 

Observing  a  stout  old  man,  in  stepping  out  of 
a  jubro,  handing  the  driver  a  small  coin,  and  re- 

56 


AN  HOUR  IN  THE  OROTO  57 

celving  no  bronze  coin  in  return,  I  was  mystified, 
and  asked  Metel  for  an  explanation,  since  I  had 
been  given  to  understand  that  bronze  equivalents 
must  be  returned  for  all  silver  coins  taken  in. 

"It  was  only  a  sheklet — a  fractional  coin — the 
man  paid,"  she  replied,  "and  no  bronze  is  re- 
quired in  return  for  fractional  coins.  In  fact,  no 
fractional  coins  are  issued  in  bronze." 

"Then  your  jubro  drivers,  who  take  in  most  of 
their  silver  in  small  coins,  evade  the  necessity  to 
give  bronze,  and  by  that  means  can  practice  hoard- 
ing if  they  will." 

"That  is  guarded  against  by  their  inability  to 
obtain  bronze  in  spending  their  fractional  silver; 
and  also  by  the  necessity  to  give  bronze,  shekel 
for  shekel,  in  exchanging  their  fractional  for  even 
shekels.  They  merely  wait  till  they  have  a  large 
quantity  of  sheklets,  and  then  trade  them,  and 
give  the  bronze  shekels  all  in  one  deal,  instead 
of  having  to  carry  fractional  bronze,  and  use 
them  in  every  trivial  deal." 

"That  wonderfully  simplifies  the  use  of  your 
bronze  shekels — evading  their  use  for  fractional 
amounts  and  trivial  expenditures.  It  practically 
removes  the  objection  to  their  use  people  might 
offer  on  account  of  inconvenience." 

"It's  a  great  convenience  to  eliminate  their  frac- 
tional use;"  my  companion  responded,  "but  the 


58  DOOMED 

people  of  Atlo,  knowing  the  benefits  their  use 
confers,  would  not  do  without  them  for  ten  times 
the  inconvenience." 

We  lunched  at  Big  Bear  oro  on  our  way,  re- 
ceived as  guests  with  every  mark  of  attention  and 
given  a  table  to  ourselves  in  its  airy  dining  hall, 
spick  and  span  and  simple.  Napery  and  dishes, 
service  and  viands  were  all  above  reproach. 

"I  imagined  we  were  guests!"  I  remarked,  on 
noting  Metel  handing  out  a  coin  on  leaving. 

"So  we  were,"  she  explained.  "But  in  Atlo 
we  all  chip  in  to  meet  the  costs,  as  in  a  private 
picnic.  Politeness  itself  would  forbid  either 
party  to  put  the  other  out  and  make  them  appear 
parasites.  So  visitors  always  pay;  but  the  oros 
never  charge  more  than  cost.  They  would  re- 
sent an  offer  involving  profits.  I  imagine  in  the 
Mamnist  world,  such  conduct  would  be  incompre- 
hensible. .  .  .  Why,  a  person  having  a  good 
behavior  card  can  travel  from  one  end  of  Atlo  to 
the  other,  and  be  received  as  a  guest  in  any  oro, 
remaining  as  long  as  he  chooses,  and  paying  them 
only  cost.  ...  In  every  oroto  we  are  con- 
sequently meeting  persons  from  other  parts  of 
the  land;  and  so,  traveling  ourselves  very  much, 
we  become  thoroughly  socialized.  It  makes  ofi 
all  Atlo  one  home,  with  one  roof  over  our  heads." 


AN  HOUR  IN  THE  OROTO  59 

"But  do  not  your  homes  lose  in  privacy  by  it?" 
I  asked. 

"On  the  contrary,  they  are  made  more  private 
by  it — friends  all  meeting  in  the  orotos.  Be- 
tween the  orotos  and  travel,  we  have  so  much 
change,  it  removes  all  friction  in  the  private 
home." 

Stopping  on  our  return  in  Red  Star  oroto,  we 
met  two  of  Metel's  friends,  Lady  Lorn  and  Lord 
Manko,  whose  titles,  very  common  here,  will  soon 
explain  themselves.  I  was  introduced  as  a 
stranger.  Prince  Loab,  of  Sidon. 

As  a  stranger  in  the  land,  my  new  friends  were 
particularly  attentive  to  me.  Both  being  artists 
who  painted  in  oil,  I  learned  many  things  from 
them  regarding  the  state  of  Atlon  art  in  their 
line,  while  I  communicated  to  them  what  I  knew 
concerning  art  abroad. 

Overhearing  an  aged  person  greet  a  friend  here 
with  the  words  "sholem  oronoyo,"  which  means 
"peace  be  your  heritage,"  Lady  Lorn,  in  a 
whisper,  remarked,  "A  very  antiquated  greeting, 
coming  down  from  our  Old  Atlo.  We  do  less 
wishing  nowadays,  and  far  more  doing;  or  rather, 
our  new  social  order  leaves  us  little  more  to  wish 
for  In  the  way  of  peace  and  prosperity." 

"We   were    always   wishing   each    other   good 


6o  DOOMED 

things,"  I  declared,  "in  my  Mamnist  world;  and 
to  be  given  such  wishes,  was  perhaps  the  nearest 
thing  to  the  things  themselves  most  of  its  people 
ever  got." 

"I'm  glad  I  didn't  live  in  the  Mamnist  world," 
interposed  Metel.  "Nothing  would  have  sick- 
ened me  more  than  the  creeping,  unreliable  and 
unsteady  course  of  its  lordly  shekel  servants — I 
mean  its  silver  shekels.  It  must  have  seemed  as 
if  men  kept  a  supply  of  liquid  glue  in  their  pockets, 
and  a  shekel  once  getting  in,  could  never  again  be 
detached.  What  a  loafer  and  tyrant  the  shekel 
is,  in  that  world — ^busy  half  the  time  turning  the 
thumbscrews  on  industry  by  remaining  idle,  and 
the  rest  of  the  time  making  toilers  miserable  by 
robbing  them   through  extortionate   exactions!" 

"When  everybody  resisted  spending,"  added 
Lord  Manko,  "as  if  it  were  taking  poison;  and 
they  were  all  ready  to  cut  each  other's  throats  in 
order  to  add  to  their  sales,  the  commercial  world 
must  have  been  a  madman's  picnic.  Could  you 
think  of  anything  at  once  more  comical  and  tragi- 
cal I  The  devil  was  surely  at  the  head  of  affairs 
in  that  world !" 

"One  can  imagine  how  stagnant  trade  was," 
explained  Metel,  "when  the  bulk  of  all  produc- 
tions had  to  lay  for  months  and  months  and  often 
years,  detained  in  shops  and  stores  and  ware- 


AN  HOUR  IN  THE  OROTO  6i 

houses  represented  by  an  infinite  number  of 
middleman  establishments  interposed  between 
factory  and  farm,  and  fireside — all  at  a  devouring 
cost  in  shelfwear,  storage,  risks,  handling  and 
interest,  besides  the  terrible  cost  of  each  separate 
seUing  in  transfer  from  one  dealer  to  the  next — a 
ruinous  cost  that  ate  like  filthy  worms  into  the 
fruit  of  toil,  leaving  the  toilers  hardly  the  shadow 
of  what  should  have  been  their  share.  .  .  . 
Father  called  this  tedious  and  difficult  progress  of 
productions  from  producer  to  consumer  a  scourge 
of  industrial  indigestion.  He  said  also  it  was  ac- 
companied with  periods  of  greater  severity  which 
he  classed  as  cases  of  acute  indigestion.  The  lat- 
ter were  usually  called  periods  of  famine;  so  com- 
pletely did  industry  seem  blocked,  leaving  the 
people  to  starve  and  live  by  the  bitter  bread  of 
charity!" 

"Atlo  for  me,"  declared  Lady  Lorn,  "with  its 
shekels  always  on  the  go,  and  its  productions  mov- 
ing at  an  irresistible  and  uninterrupted  pace.  Atlo 
for  me,  where  the  whole  cost  of  transfer  from 
producer  to  consumer,  save  of  bulky  wares,  is 
seldom  more  than  a  moiety  of  five  per  cent  of 
their  cost  of  making,  instead  of  taking  two-thirds 
of  the  cost.  Atlo  for  me,  where  everyone  buys, 
and  keeps  on  buying,  to  the  very  highest  limit,  so 
as  to  be  able  to  keep  on  earning  to  the  highest 


6z  DOOMED 

limit  of  his  capacity.  .  .  .  Atlo  for  me,  where 
there  Is  as  much  Inducement  to  spend  as  there  Is 
to  earn,  and  not  a  lopsided  incentive  to  stifle 
trade  by  spending  as  little  as  possible,  and  to 
jostle  each  other  with  Interminable  strife  and  even 
bloodshed,  so  as  to  secure  a  larger  portion  of 
trade!" 

"I  have  seen  it  recorded,"  said  Metel,  "that' In 
our  Old  Atlo  philosophers  had  advocated  the  doc- 
trine that  It  was  every  man's  right  to  buy  as  he 
pleased  and  to  also  sell  as  he  pleased,  without  re- 
gard to  his  neighbor.  Not  even  the  State,  urged 
these  philosophers,  had  the  right  to  Interfere  with 
this  royal  prerogative  of  the  buyer.  Think  of 
such  a  doctrine  being  taught  to  human  beings — a 
doctrine  I  would  judge  fit  for  pigs  In  a  pig's 
Elysium  I 

"The  doctrine  was  a  subtle  justification  for 
shekel  and  wealth  hoarding,  and  Profiteering  Cap- 
italism. It  pleased  the  profiteering  upper  class, 
and  no  wonder  they  were  fascinated  with  the 
works  of  the  first  philosopher  who  boldly  advo- 
cated It." 

"And  as  It  botched  the  distribution  of  produc- 
tions," added  Lady  Lorn,  "so  also  did  it  botch 
the  distribution  of  population,  scattering  men  over 
a  region  tenfold  as  large  as  they  needed,  and  treb- 
ling the  cost  of  every  step  of  travel  or  transporta- 


AN  HOUR  IN  THE  OROTO  63 

tion  made.  For  with  their  hoarded  shekels  they 
bought  up  great  tracts  of  lands  which  they  found 
they  could  keep  and  withhold  for  later  prices  and 
rentals  yielding  often  much  more  than  interest. 
.  .  .  Wherever  afterwards  settlements  arose, 
and  social  and  industrial  intercourse  became  easier, 
up  went  the  prices  of  lands  and  rentals,  so  that  on 
all  sides  it  became  a  matter  of  indifference  where 
settlers  located — being  obliged  to  either  suffer  the 
Inconveniences  of  Inferior  location,  or  else  the 
risen  tax  of  the  landholder.  So,  pell  mell,  they 
scattered  to  the  four  winds,  and  suffered  a  fright- 
ful wastage  of  labor  and  expense  through  the  su- 
perfluous distances  they  had  to  cover.  It  seemed 
strange  why  so  many  would  locate  in  marshy  river 
bottoms  or  at  the  mouths  of  dangerous  volcanoes, 
or  In  the  wilderness  depths  a  day's  journey  to 
their  nearest  neighbors.  But  such  was  the  work 
of  Profiteering  Capitalism,  with  its  marvelous  en- 
terprise in  the  work  of  blocking  Industry  till  its 
tax  of  Interest  was  assured." 

"Since  we  are  picking  the  flaws  In  our  Old  Atlo 
conditions,"  added  Lord  Manko,  "it  may  be  well 
enough  to  consider  the  attractive  fleshpots  found 
in  Its  enormous  gross  profit  margins,  out  of  which 
all  sorts  of  commissions  could  be  extracted  by 
those  gifted  with  the  power  in  any  way  to  divert 
trade.     What  a  series  of  gold  mines  our  former 


64  DOOMED 

legislators  found  in  them,  to  trade  against  their 
power  to  divert  the  patronage  of  the  State.  What 
a  lot  of  jackal  statesmen  it  drew  to  the  fleshpots, 
and  what  a  fine  lot  of  statesmen  It  made  of  these 
jackals.  An  honest  man  had  no  chance  against 
the  power  of  the  fleshpots — so  pressing  was  the 
strife  of  the  jackal  class  to  monopolize  them;  and 
surely,  they  could  outbid  any  real  statesmen.  .  .  . 
Why,  every  great  organization  having  patronage 
to  dispense,  even  charitable  and  eleemosynary  in- 
stitutions, were  subject  to  the  depredations  of  this 
class.  .  .  .  Can  you  wonder  that  the  Old  Atlo 
was  so  corrupt,  the  smell  tainted  the  atmosphere 
of  the  entire  universe,  all  but  the  realm  of  our 
Sun-God,  whose  burning  glory  it  could  not  pene- 
trate I" 

"Your  Old  Atlo,  and  the  present  Mamnist 
world,"  I  declared,  "were  both  subject  to  this 
dread  Industrial  disease,  whether  indigestion  or 
leprosy.  It  is  well  our  new  Atlo  is  rid  of  the  dis- 
ease. Its  wonderful  affluence,  as  I  now  see  It,  is 
merely  an  expression  or  manifestation  of  unim- 
paired health  and  unimpeded  vigor.  Its  founda- 
tion is  sound,  and  the  whole  structure  is  sound." 


CHAPTER  VII 

Protected  Private  Property 

Once  more  assembled  in  the  library,  to  con- 
tinue the  instruction  given  me  on  the  previous 
evening,  at  her  father's  request,  Metel  began  by 
entertaining  us  with  a  sweet  song  she  accompanied 
on  the  harp,  a  song  full  of  melody  and  pathos. 

Her  father  now  informed  me  that  all  property 
in  Atlo  is  so  safeguarded  by  the  State  that  every 
child  inherits  a  due  portion,  accompanying  its  in- 
heritance of  the  NEED  of  property  as  a  shield 
to  its  liberty  and  a  means  of  exemption  from  the 
subjection  attending  poverty  under  civilization. 
.  .  .  As  soon  as  a  son  arrives  at  the  maturity 
implied  in  mastery  of  a  trade,  profession  or  other 
vocation,  he  is  endowed  with  a  property  interest 
in  the  establishment  to  which  he  attaches  his  ser- 
vice; and  this  property  becomes  his,  during  active 
service — through  it  sharing  in  the  earnings  of  the 
establishment,  and  having  voice  in  determining 
its  management.  Such  a  portion  each  operative 
gets  and  holds,  be  the  estabHshment  one  requir- 
ing large  or  small  capital." 

6s 


ee  DOOMED 

"At  that  rate,  some  Inherit  much  more  than 
others,  do  they  not?" 

"No;  they  really  inherit  alike,  since  the  cost  of 
original  acquisition  and  constant  perpetuation  of 
plants  involving  larger  outlay  Is  collected  by  be- 
ing incorporated  in  the  prices  of  the  productions 
of  the  plant,  and  is  larger  if  the  cost  of  the  plant 
is  larger.  The  public  at  large  thus  pays  for  it, 
while  net  earnings  in  all  establishments  are  based 
on  labor  alone,  under  that  fair  competition  which 
results  when  all  elements  of  monopoly  are  re- 
moved." 

*'But  such  munificence  on  the  part  of  the  State, 
how  is  it  possible?"  I  asked. 

"It  is  no  munificence  on  the  part  of  the  State;" 
came  the  reply,  "for  the  cost,  as  I  have  said,  is 
drawn  out  of  the  gross  earnings  of  all  establish- 
ments. The  State  is  merely  custodian  of  these 
funds,  the  trustee  in  charge  of  them — in  this  man- 
ner fulfilling  its  obligation  to  see  that  the  property 
is  handed  down  safely,  and  duly  enlarged,  from 
one  generation  to  the  next.  Through  this  cus- 
tody, the  property  is  really  made  INALIEN- 
ABLE. Through  this  care,  no  one  can  make  use 
of  a  surplusage  of  property,  there  being  none  de- 
pendent on  its  hire,  and  no  gain  to  be  derived 
from  its  acquisition — granted  that  were  possible. 
.     .    .    With  all  people  duly  equipped  with  their 


PROTECTED  PRIVATE  PROPERTY  ^7 

portion  of  productive  property,  there  Is  no  chance 
for  profiteering  properties,  even  If  the  State  were 
base  enough  to  lend  Its  protection  to  them." 

"You  then  make  the  vahdity  of  property  rest 
entirely  on  the  PRODUCTIVE  use  made  of  It," 
I  interposed.  "You  refuse  to  accept  the  stupid 
assumption  so  common  In  the  Mamnlst  world  that 
a  person  may  do  as  he  will  with  his  own  property 
— a  very  dangerous  doctrine,  that  would  allow 
one  to  stab  his  fellows  If  done  with  his  own  dag- 
ger; and  by  analogy,  it  Is  right  to  deny  protection 
to  property  for  uses  inimical  to  the  welfare  and 
security  of  our  fellow  men.  Neither  can  It  know- 
ingly countenance  such  uses  of  money — once 
understood  how  to  prevent  them." 

"You  are  right,  Loab,  as  to  the  obligations  of 
the  State.  Productive  property,  the  need  of  which 
every  child  of  civilization  inherits,  cannot  be  al- 
lowed to  be  diverted  into  the  hands  of  greedy 
and  heartless  profiteers.  The  society  that  cannot 
protect  its  unborn  from  such  depredators,  should 
blush  indeed." 

"But  how  were  it,"  I  finally  asked,  "if  owners 
sold  their  property,  squandering  the  money  re- 
ceived for  It?" 

"That  Is  made  impossible  through  the  fact  that 
in  all  property  transfers,  the  money  paid  to  the 


68  DOOMED 

seller  Is  merely  transferred  from  the  buyer's  ac- 
count to  that  of  the  seller,  always  remaining  in 
custody  of  the  State — all  but  the  small  margin  left 
when  the  purchase  of  a  new  property  costs  less 
than  what  was  realized  from  that  sold — happen- 
ing only  when  the  stock  of  a  concern  is  above  par, 
through  superior  management  whereby  like  labor 
in  the  one  establishment  can  produce  more  than 
in  others  of  the  same  character.  Should  such  a 
balance  remain  in  favor  of  the  seller,  it  is  given 
him,  and  he  is  at  liberty  to  do  with  it  as  he  wishes. 
But  if  the  sale  leaves  a  deficiency,  he  is  obliged  to 
make  it  good  through  a  deficiency  tax  levied  on  his 
earnings  until  it  is  made  good." 

"It  is  very  important  then  for  the  co-operatives 
to  select  able  managers,  is  it  not?" 

"The  management  of  a  co-operative  under  At- 
lism  is  so  easy  that  they  encounter  small  difficulty 
in  securing  capable  men  for  the  position.  The 
atmosphere  of  Atlon  trade  is  so  completely  void 
of  sharp  practices;  of  having  to  give  credit;  of 
having  to  spend  fortunes  In  securing  trade;  of 
having  to  speculate  as  to  what  is  to  be  made.  In 
what  style  and  in  what  quantities,  to  serve  the 
whims  of  a  fickle  public;  of  necessity  to  compete 
against  untold  volumes  of  obstructive  capital  and 
for  securing  loans  and  credits  in  markets  unduly 
restricted.     With    their    orders    received    from 


PROTECTED  PRIVATE  PROPERTY  69 

samples  and  catalogs;  placed  far  In  advance;  and 
half  prepaid,  with  the  rest  to  be  paid  on  delivery; 
how  much  easier  it  is  to  manage  a  business !  They 
have  really  no  risks  to  assume;  and  besides,  we 
have  under  the  State  a  Push  Wing  to  steer  all 
enterprises  involving  any  hazard.  Of  this  pecu- 
liar branch  of  government,  you  will  hear  enough 
before  long." 

"I  presume  your  property  In  homes  or  oros  is 
all  handled  on  the  same  principle?"  I  queried. 

"With  slight  modifications,"  responded  Mother 
Mafra,  "the  same  principles  are  applied.  Every 
woman,  upon  marriage.  Is  dowered  with  stock  in 
an  oro  proportional  to  the  quarters  she  is  to  oc- 
cupy; and  in  addition  she  Is  endowed  with  an  in- 
come for  family  maintenance,  subject  to  increase 
as  the  family  becomes  larger.  Out  of  this  income, 
however,  the  State  withholds  enough  to  cover  the 
cost  of  oro  wear  and  reconstruction — a  portion 
set  aside  and  kept  In  State  custody  for  repair 
and  reconstruction  of  the  oro,  when  needed." 

"But  how  comes  the  State  to  provide  the  home 
with  an  Income?"  I  asked  in  astonishment  at  such 
unheard  of  munificence. 

"The  State  regards  woman  as  a  worker  In  the 
subsistence-producing  co-operation  of  Industrial 
society,  and  takes  it  upon  itself  to  see  that  this  in- 


70  DOOMED 

come  is  placed  In  her  hands  as  something  her  very 
own,  due  her  as  head  of  the  household.  It  is  not 
to  be  withheld  as  a  bludgeon  through  which  to 
make  her  a  household  drudge."  ^ 

"That  makes  woman  here  the  queen  of  the 
home,"  I  suggested. 

"Even  as  man  is  lord  of  the  workshop.  The 
State  shields  him  from  the  dispossessing  tactics  of 
the  profiteering  capitalist;  and  why  not  woman 
from  the  drudgery  of  dispossession  in  the  home? 
.  .  .  Oh  no,  we  are  not  allowed  here  to  ap- 
proach the  altar,  bowed  down  with  dependence 
and  want,  and  forced  to  mate  ourselves  under  a 
yoke.  Freedom  of  the  heart  is  regarded  as  an 
indispensable  requisite  to  real  marriage.  Men 
and  women  are  not  to  be  mated  like  dogs  and 
slaves." 

"Your  oros  in  their  entirety  are  then  a  co- 
operative concern?"  I  asked. 

"Like  any  other  co-operative,  save  that  the 
private   homes   remain   private.     We   elect  our 

1  As  custodian  also  of  the  children  of  school  age,  whose 
studies  are  real  work  and  in  the  long  run  materially  promote 
the  volume  of  future  production,  woman  is  the  rightful  claimant 
to  the  pay  due  for  this  labor.  Though  its  results  are  remote,  it 
is  no  less  productive  labor  than  is  the  plan  made  by  the  archi- 
tect for  the  grand  edifice  completed  years  after.  In  any  honest 
system  of  industrial  co-operation  all  contributors  of  productive 
service  must  be  recognized  and  rewarded,  whether  directly  or 
through  their  natural  custodians. 


PROTECTED  PRIVATE  PROPERTY  71 

manager,  or  Oro  Mother,  who  appoints  her  aids 
and  engages  what  help  is  needful.  For  many- 
years  I  served  in  that  capacity;  and  it  is  for  that 
reason  I  am  still  called  Mother  Mafra.  In  the 
oroto  we  are  addressed  as  Lord  Gomar  and  Lady 
Mafra." 

"And  is  your  oro  stock  also  transferable?" 
"Just  as  stock  in  any  other  concern.  We  can 
change  residence  as  easily  as  men  can  change  their 
co-operatives.  It  occasions  little  trouble  and 
scarcely  any  loss — nothing  like  the  loss  home 
owners  in  the  Mamnist  world  suffer  by  change  of 
residence." 

The  more  I  contemplated,  the  more  convinced 
I  became  that  the  world  held  no  other  land  like 
Atlo.  In  this  land  throve  an  UNPERVERTED 
CAPITALISM  that  put  to  shame  the  Profiteer- 
ing Capitalism  of  the  Mamnist  world.  Here 
money  was  not  allowed  to  make  itself  master  of 
man.  Here  property — the  capital  needed  by  the 
toiler — was  made  INALIENABLE — a  sacred 
heritage,  of  which  the  unborn  were  not  to  be  de- 
prived. Here  man  was  truly  made  FREE,  and 
woman,  his  mate,  EQUALLY  FREE.  This  was 
the  land  for  me.  Here  would  I  stay.  I  would 
adopt  Atlo  as  my  future  home;  and  so  I  finally 
reported  to  my  hosts. 


72  DOOMED 

"Nothing,  friend  Loab,"  replied  my  host 
"would  please  me  more  than  to  have  you  re- 
main; but  before  you  make  your  resolve  final,  I 
beg  you  to  listen,  while  I  tell  you  of  the  darker 
side  of  Atlo's  outlook.  .  .  .  Having  sup- 
planted Mam's  hoardable  shekel,  and  done  away 
with  Mamnist  profiteering,  we  have  aroused  the 
ire  of  the  Evil  One,  who  is  now  designing  to  de- 
stroy our  people  through  an  invasion  by  beasts 
from  Atlora — all  so  as  to  wipe  from  the  earth 
every  vestige  of  Atlism.  .  .  .  It  is  such  a  war 
of  extermination  with  which  we  are  today  men- 
aced, and  whose  dangers  will  confront  you  if  you 
remain.  I  beseech  you,  therefore,  to  think  well 
before  making  your  decision  final." 

"The  very  peril,  friends,  that  confronts  Atlo," 
I  replied,  "Impels  me  to  remain  here,  contributing 
what  little  I  can  to  the  defense  of  Atlo  and  Atlism. 
Not  for  the  world  would  I  see  the  knowledge  of 
Perfected  Capitalism  become  lost  to  the  world. 
Count  me  henceforth  an  Atlon  to  the  core — one  of 
its  defenders  to  the  very  last." 


CHAPTER  VIII 

Atlo's  Wonderful  Push  Wing 

A  WEEK  had  passed  since  my  advent  in  Atlo, 
and  now  I  was  a  proud  citizen  of  this  wonderful 
State,  owning  a  portion  of  stock  in  the  Gloria 
Garment  House,  hired  by  its  manager,  after  dem- 
onstrating to  him  my  ability  to  be  of  service. 

Reporting  my  hire,  the  State  paid  for  my  In- 
terest in  the  establishment  on  a  par  basis.  Had 
the  stock  been  above  par,  I  would  have  had  to 
make  good  the  deficiency  by  a  series  of  drafts 
taken  from  my  regular  earnings;  and  on  the  con- 
trary, had  it  been  below  par,  the  deficiency  would 
have  been  made  good  to  me. 

I  was  now  entitled  not  only  to  my  twenty  shekels 
wage  per  week,  but  also  to  a  monthly  dividend 
drawn  from  the  surplus  earnings  of  the  Gloria, 
varying  some,  though  in  the  long  run  amount- 
ing to  fully  as  much  as  the  wages.  .  .  .  Should 
either  the  manager  or  myself  at  any  time  be  dis- 
satisfied, we  were  privileged,  on  giving  a  reason- 
able notice,  to  part.  .  .  .  The  State  would  be 
notified,  and  the  value  of  my  portion  transferred 
to  its  custody,  to  be  paid  over  to  my  next  employer, 

73 


74  DOOMED 

deviations  from  the  par  of  stock  of  the  new  con- 
cern having  to  be  made  good,  as  was  done  on 
hiring  to  the  Gloria. 

My  work  in  the  Gloria  was  to  design  patterns, 

in  doing  which  my  experience  abroad  made  up 

for  much  that,  as  a  beginner,  I  was  deficient  in. 

A  full  day  called  for   three  two-hour 

shifts,  and  a  full  week  for  five  days'  work. 

Each  of  us  was  assigned  two  days  each  week  for 
rest  and  recreation,  on  which  we  were  forbidden 
to  work.  The  days  were  so  assigned  that  we 
always  had  a  force  at  work  on  each  of  the  seven 
days.  This  practice  is  maintained  In  all  estab- 
lishments, enabling  all  persons  to  be  served  at 
all  times,  and  obviating  the  crowds  and  rushes 
and  inadequate  service  and  overwork  usually  at- 
tending popular  recreation  wherever  all  seek  rest 
and  recreation  on  the  same  day. 

Though  in  Sidon  considered  a  man  of  some  stat- 
ure, I  ranked  here  only  as  of  medium  height — 
Atlons  averaging  half  a  head  taller  than  our 
SIdonlans.  They  were  also  larger  minded,  as 
well  as  larger  In  body,  evidenced  by  their  jovial 
spirit  and  the  rarity  of  losing  their  temper,  as 
well  as  by  the  wit  apparent  in  the  high  standards 
prevailing  on  all  sides.  .  .  .  Their  great  su- 
periority, In  fact,  represented  the  latent  powers 


ATLO'S  WONDERFUL  PUSH  WING  75 

and  forces  liberated  by  Atlism  and  fettered  under 
Mamnism.  They  displayed  no  inheritance  of  mor- 
bid appetites — thirst  for  strong  drink  or  crav- 
ing for  opiates,  or  any  other  tokens  of  the  defi- 
ciencies left  by  periods  of  hunger  and  exposure 
and  abuses  indulged  from  the  feeling  of  despair 
and  abandonment  bred  under  Mamnist  conditions* 
They  were  all  free  from  these  ugly  fetters,  and 
showed  it  in  their  erect  walk  and  manly  ways. 

If  one  thing  more  than  any  other  caused  me  to 
feel  my  utter  inferiority  to  the  Atlon,  it  was  the 
sight  of  a  group  of  them — men  and  women — en- 
gaged in  one  of  their  charming  picture  dances. 

How  these  dances  displayed  the  graces  of  fig- 
ure and  form  in  the  ever-changing  attitudes  as- 
sumed, and  the  perfect  pose  by  which  they  ap- 
peared to  move  as  if  without  the  slightest  effort 
— the  entire  group  swerving  in  one  continuous 
symphony,  in  perfect  harmony  with  the  music,  as 
if  all  were  parts  of  a  single  living  organism.  .  .  . 
Words  cannot  depict  the  charm  of  these  pictures, 
in  which  every  look  and  every  muscle  were  blended 
into  one  grand  work  of  art.  It  was  a  dance  fit 
for  the  gods.  .  .  .  What  hope  then  had  I, 
with  my  unmusical  ear  and  my  unwieldly,  awk- 
ward limbs,  to  ever  succeed  in  mastering  it? 

Yet  in  spite  of  my  seemingly  overwhelming  de- 
fects, was  I  daily  urged  by  Metel,  with  wistful 


^S  DOOMED 

looks,  to  make  a  desperate  effort  at  Its  mastery. 
I  knew  she  delighted  in  the  dance,  in  which  she 
was  an  expert;  and  spurred  by  her  urging,  I 
launched  into  the  endeavor,  supported  in  it  by  her 
great  faith  in  me.  Come  the  very  worst,  I  would 
give  her  pleasure;  and  that  realization  made  me 
laugh  at  the  smiles  my  awkwardness  inevitably 
provoked. 

Sauntering  together  one  day  through  a  shady 
avenue,  we  spoke  of  conditions  at  the  Gloria,  in 
which  I  was  now  an  active  partner,  and  in  which 
she  took  a  lively  interest. 

"Orders  at  the  Gloria,"  I  informed  her,  "are 
pouring  in  faster  than  we  can  turn  them  out;  and 
we  have  already  enough  orders  on  hand  to  keep 
us  going  for  the  next  six  months.  No  one  expects 
we  will  ever  catch  up.  .  .  .  Then,  how  my  eyes 
bulge  to  see  them  come  in — all  one-half  prepaid, 
with  the  remainder  due  on  delivery.  How  dif- 
ferent all  this  is  from  the  tediously  slow  and  du- 
bious course  of  Income  in  the  Mamnist  world  I 
Ah,  that's  what  I  call  business — real  business!" 

"We  have  our  bronze  shekels  to  thank  for  all 
this,"  my  companion  responded.  "These  bronze 
shekels  are  so  many  drivers  behind  the  silver  ones 
— each  with  whip  in  hand  to  spur  them  on  at  a 
tireless  speed  and  a  ceaseless  run.     The  need  of 


ATLO'S  WONDERFUL  PUSH  WING  77 

the  bronze,  so  as  to  earn  to  our  fullest  capacity, 
keeps  us  spending — ever  spending  to  the  limit. 
.  .  .  There's  always  more  in  sight,  and  so  we 
never  hesitate  at  spending.  Spending?  Is  it  not 
all  for  our  living  in  the  fullest  sense — all  for  our 
living?  Then  the  more  we  spend  the  more  we 
live.  Why,  to  stint  seems  to  us  half  like  suicide. 
It's  a  sin — perhaps  a  crime.  .  .  .  And  besides, 
is  not  all  work — all  opportunity  to  earn — the 
product  of  spending?  Did  we  not  spend,  how 
much  work  were  there  ?  And  to  whom  should  our 
work  all  go,  if  not  to  those  who  MAKE  it  by  their 
spending?  If  men  spend  nothing,  what  need  have 
they  of  work;  and  what  work  are  they,  who  make 
none,  entitled  to?  Is  there  any  to  spare  save  for 
its  makers?" 

''Surely  not,  if  all  makers  are  each  to  secure 
their  due  portion,"  I  answered.  "That's  just 
where  your  bronze  shekels  come  in.  They're  each 
holder's  proof  of  work-making  and  his  claim  on 
a  proportionate  amount  of  the  output  of  work. 
.  .  .  They  are  really  the  DISTRIBUTING 
medium  for  all  work,  just  as  the  silver  shekels 
are  the  DISTRIBUTING  medium  for  all  pro- 
ductions—the holders  of  silver  shekels  having 
them  as  their  proof  of  having  proportionally  con- 
tributed to  the  product  output,  which  is  therefore 
exclusively  reserved  for  them." 


78  DOOMED 

"You've  put  the  thing  admirably,"  was  the 
reply.  "I'm  sure  it  could  not  have  been  stated 
better.  It's  just  because  there  are  in  reality  TWO 
outputs — one  of  work,  and  one  of  the  products 
of  labor — to  be  distributed,  and  in  the  Mamnist 
world  only  ONE  distributing  medium,  that  it  is 
so  sickly  and  filled  with  disorder  and  violence.  It 
is  just  as  if  a  human  body,  needing  heart  and 
lungs  were  furnished  with  only  one  of  these,  and 
left  to  eke  o,ut  a  painful  existence  with  it." 

"To  change  the  subject,  Metel,"  I  suggested, 
"can  you  explain  why  our  Sidon  co-operatives — 
the  few  we  had  of  them — met  with  no  better  suc- 
cess than  other  enterprises,  though  they  looked 
forward  to  achieve  wonders  through  them?" 

"They  erred  greatly  in  failing  to  see  that  the 
shop  co-operation  they  exalted  was  already  in 
force  in  all  other  shops,  and  that  they  were  as 
subject  to  Mamnist  handicaps  as  other  enterprises. 
Their  shop-wide  co-operation  escaped  none  of  the 
malign  influences  of  Mamnist  capital — accumu- 
lated in  vast  excess,  and  half  of  its  great  volume 
being  merely  capitalized  powers  of  extortion  aris- 
ing from  social  negligence  and  privilege,  and  caus- 
ing the  conduct  of  all  business  to  require  double 
and  treble  and  fivefold  the  amount  of  capital 
otherwise  needed;  also  magnifying  the  risks  in- 
volved, and  multiplying  the  difficulties  to  contend 


ATLO'S  WONDERFUL  PUSH  WING  79 

with — particularly  that  of  disposing  of  wares.  It 
did  not  exempt  them  from  the  tax  of  interest 
levied  by  all  this  capital,  nor  from  the  ruin  so 
often  inflicted  by  the  industrial  crises  it  periodi- 
cally precipitated  through  its  insupportably  ex- 
cessive accumulations." 

"Even  without  a  work-distributing  medium," 
Metel  resumed,  "the  Mamnist  co-operation  was 
far  superior,  being  STATE-WIDE  in  its  scope. 
Through  its  use  of  money  and  competition — such 
use  of  these  as  it  made — it  united  farm,  factory 
and  fireside,  producers  and  consumers,  throughout 
all  Atlo,  into  a  single  industrial  organism.  It 
gave  a  SUPERIOR  co-operation  in  a  PER- 
VERTED FORM;  and  the  petty  shop-wide  co- 
operative institutions  all  benefited  by  it,  and  were 
also  limited  in  their  capacity  by  its  want  of  a  work- 
distributing  medium." 

"Then  the  greater  success  of  your  Atlon  co- 
operatives may  be  attributed,"  said  I,  "to  the  fact 
that  your  STATE-WIDE  co-operation  is  an  UN- 
PERVERTED  one.  It  operates  with  both  a  work 
distributing  and  a  product  distributing  medium. 
In  that,  it  is  a  PERFECTED  Capitalism,  relieved 
of  all  obstructive  and  profiteering  influences.  It 
towers  over  all  Mamnist  and  substitute  forms  of 
industrial  organization  like  a  giant  among  pig- 
mies." 


8o  DOOMED 

Passing  on  from  one  avenue  to  the  next,  a 
curious  feature  drew  my  attention — the  fact  that 
the  initial  letters  of  their  respective  names  ran  in 
alphabetical  order.  Beginning  from  the  heart  of 
the  city  they  also  ran  in  series,  the  first  having 
names  of  only  one  syllable,  the  next  words  of  two 
syllables,  the  next  of  three  syllables,  and  so  on. 
.  .  .  Thus  they  started  with  Arch  avenue,  fol- 
lowing with  Bear  avenue,  Card  avenue,  Dell  ave- 
nue, and  so  on,  to  the  last  letter  of  the  alphabet; 
and  after  that  started  over  with  two  syllable 
names  and  so  on,  Metel  informed  me  that  the 
object  of  this  way  of  naming  avenues  was  to  en- 
able men  to  know  locations  from  the  mere  name 
of  the  avenues.  It  was  surely  a  great  help,  espe- 
cially to  strangers. 

"With  all  your  thoroughfares  at  right  angles 
to  each  other;  so  clean  and  broad  and  shady;  and 
so  named,  a  stranger  is  able  at  once  to  locate  any 
of  them;  you  have  model  cities,  indeed.  How 
disgusted  I  should  now  be  to  go  back  to  the 
crooked,  narrow  and  dirty  streets  of  Mamnist 
cities,  in  most  of  which  women  durst  not  venture; 
nor  well  dressed  men,  unless  bearing  arms.  I  tell 
you,  I  wouldn't  change  places  with  the  proudest 
emperor  there!" 

"An  ancient  adage  has  it,  'better  a  hovel  of 
health  than  a  palace  of  pestilence.'  " 


ATLO'S  WONDERFUL  PUSH  WING  8i 

"There  was  one  feature  of  Mamnism,"  I  re- 
marked, "our  merchants  were  never  tired  of  laud- 
ing— their  great  credit  system.  Had  you  such  a 
system  in  your  Old  Atlo?" 

"It  followed  Mamnism  everywhere,  as  heel  fol- 
lows toe.  Mercantile  pride  everywhere  made 
much  of  it.  It  was  an  aggregation  of  discrepan- 
cies, growing  and  growing  and  growing;  for 
Mamnist  leaks  of  discrepancy  were  constantly 
patched  at  a  cost  in  new  discrepancies,  larger 
than  the  old.  The  terms  on  which  credit  was 
given  always  involved  the  necessity  of  a  profit 
return;  and  the  failure  to  spend  more  than  a  frac- 
tion of  the  profits  created  fresh  discrepancies.  So 
the  volume  of  discrepancies  was  always  kept 
swelling,  save  in  the  time  of  an  industrial  crisis, 
when  its  volume  shrank,  and  the  patching  of  dis- 
crepancies ceased — in  short,  when  credits  sud- 
denly disappeared,  and  the  big  credit  system 
dwindled  into  a  shadow." 

"The  entire  credit  system,  as  I  now  see  it,"  I 
declared,  "was  a  foul  growth  springing  from  the 
unrestrained  shekel  hoarding  in  vogue.  It  was 
the  evil  symptom  of  a  vicious  practice.  What  de- 
lusions possessed  the  commercial  world,  to  praise 
it  so!" 

"They  also  called  it  the  corner  stone  of  trade," 
my  companion  added.     "Father  says  the  mercan- 


82  DOOMED 

tile  world  was  always  so  starved,  It  could  never 
have  stood  up  without  the  stone  to  lean  on." 

"Let  me  tell  you  now  about  our  great  Push 
Wing,"  she  followed,  " — the  branch  of  our  gov- 
ernment supplementing  all  our  industrial  undertak- 
ings and  our  social  organization." 

"Your  father  mentioned  it  to  me,  and  I'm  very 
anxious  to  learn  more  concerning  it." 

"I  could  hardly  tell  you  all  the  varied  things  it 
does,"  she  responded,  "but  fortunately  I  this 
morning  found  a  summary  of  its  work;  and  think- 
ing you  would  be  interested,  I  kept  It  with  me. 
Shall  I  read  it  to  you?" 

"You  can't  begin  too  soon,"  I  assured  her. 

"Then  listen,  Loab,  and  I'll  read: 

"The  Atlon  Push  Wing  is  designed  to  foster 
new  ideas,  new  Inventions,  new  discoveries.  It 
aims  to  promote  the  sciences  and  arts  in  all  their 
branches.  ...  Its  work  Is  also  to  educate  the 
people  for  the  life  they  are  to  lead,  providing  for 
all  an  elementary  training  In  the  rudiments  of 
learning  and  of  all  general  work.  It  also  offers 
a  special  education  for  each  In  such  fields  as  they 
may  desire  to  enter,  in  trades,  professions  or  In 
the  labors  of  statecraft. 

"It  promotes  needful  enterprises  whose  Inaugu- 
ration  would   involve    risks.    If  privately   under- 


ATLO'S  WONDERFUL  PUSH  WING  83 

taken;  turning  them  over  to  private  enterprise, 
after  proving  themselves  remunerative  and  estab- 
lished. It  also  promotes  and  conducts  enterprises 
of  a  useful  character  that  would  be  commercially 
unprofitable.  If  needed  to  keep  up  industrial  and 
social  progress,  they  are  not  neglected  because  of 
not  being  directly  remunerative. 

*'The  Wing  also  maintains  a  large  force  of 
salaried  physicians,  who  serve  their  patients  with- 
out direct  cost  to  them,  harassing  no  man's  mind 
with  the  ghost  of  a  large  bill  confronting  him  on 
recovery.  ...  In  every  oro,  also,  it  main- 
tains a  priest  and  a  priestess,  qualified  physicians, 
who  keep  the  inmates  informed  in  matters  relating 
to  the  preservation  of  their  health — the  body  be- 
ing regarded  as  one  of  AT'S  most  sacred  temples 
— the  structure  within  which  each  soul  meets  its 
god  and  hears  his  voice  speaking  in  conscience.  In 
emergencies  these  oro  priests  treat  patients,  pend- 
ing the  arrival  of  the  regular  physician. 

"The  Wing  also  supplies  with  regular  annuities 
all  persons  permanently  disabled  or  incapacitated. 

"We  have  one  branch  of  the  Wing  that  devotes 
itself  to  territorial  expansion  of  town,  city  and  of 
Settled  Atlo.  Of  course,  we  have  no  land  specu- 
lation to  foster  a  promiscuous  scattering  of  popu- 
lation by  raising  prices  everywhere  to  a  point 
neutralizing  local  advantages  by  the  exaction  of 


84  DOOMED 

proportionally  higher  rentals  and  land  prices;  but 
what  we  do  is  to  limit  the  radius  everywhere  with- 
in which  settlements  may  expand.  We  then  pro- 
ceed to  put  in  every  kind  of  desirable  improve- 
ment, whose  cost  falls,  not  on  a  sparse  settlement, 
but  on  one  so  well  peopled  as  to  make  the  cost  to 
each  settler  very  light.  In  expanding  the  territory 
of  Atlo,  we  clear  the  necessary  lands,  and  also 
drain  and  irrigate  so  far  as  necessary,  giving  set- 
tlers Improved  lands  and  plenty  of  near  neighbors 
from  the  very  start. 

"The  Wing  also  exercises  the  greatest  care  for 
tollers  In  all  walks,  even  providing  temporary  pen- 
sions In  case  of  a  trade  being  revolutionized  by 
the  introduction  of  new  labor-saving  machinery. 
It  supports  the  workmen  till  able  to  fit  themselves 
into  a  new  occupation.  ...  At  the  time  Atllsm 
was  Introduced,  It  even  pensioned  for  life  capi- 
talists of  advanced  years,  thus  giving  to  these  men 
a  longer  period  than  ten  years  In  which  to  spend 
their  capital.  As  capitalists,  they  were,  of  course, 
amply  able  to  pay  for  these  pensions. 

"A  special  branch  of  the  Wing  Is  constantly 
searching  to  ascertain  what  new  needs  or  wants 
the  public  may  have,  whether  material,  political 
or  social — In  fact,  of  any  kind  whatsoever.  After 
due  consideration,  these  are  all  gratified  so  far 
as  deemed  advisable. 


ATLO'S  WONDERFUL  PUSH  WING  85 

"A  branch  also  supervises  the  trades  and  pro- 
fessions, each  of  which  is  regulated  by  rules  and 
codes  of  its  own  devising,  but  subject  to  the  ap- 
proval of  the  Wing,  which  is  also  their  court  of 
final  appeal. 

"Another  branch  keeps  a  vigilant  eye  on  offi- 
cials in  every  department  of  the  government, 
prosecuting  them  vigorously  for  every  form  of 
dereliction,  from  usurpation  of  power  to  misap- 
plication of  trust  funds.  .  .  .  The  reconstruc- 
tion funds  are  particularly  watched;  though,  if 
properly  applied,  they  are  so  rapidly  absorbed  in 
reconstruction  as  to  accumulate  only  in  compara- 
tively small  amounts.  The  real  fund  is  in  the 
properties  themselves." 

"I  am  glad  to  see  Atlons  did  not  fall  into  the 
error  so  common  in  other  States,"  I  remarked, 
"that  assumes  the  industrial  system,  equipped  with 
money  and  competition,  is  self-sufficient;  and  that 
it  also  wisely  leaves  to  private  enterprise  all  those 
functions  it  is  capable  of  performing  as  well  or 
better  than  If  done  by  the  State.  This  minimizes 
the  task  of  the  State  and  helps  to  make  It  more 
effectually  accomplished." 

"It  is  impossible  to  recall  all  the  varied  works 
done  by  the  Wing,"  my  companion  resumed,  "but 
along  with  others  it  provides  us  with  a  means  of 


86  DOOMED 

saving  up  for  exceptionally  large  outlays,  such  as 
the  purchase  of  a  private  jubro  or  making  an  ex- 
tended traveling  tour.  .  .  .  All  we  have  to  do 
in  such  a  case  is  to  buy  from  the  State  a  SAV- 
INGS TICKET,  for  which  we  pay  in  instalments. 
With  each  Instalment,  we  are  given  bronze  shekels 
through  which  we  can  go  on  saving  till  the  whole 
ticket  is  paid  for.  ...  In  spending,  we  pay  with 
coupons  torn  from  the  ticket  till  the  ticket  is  used 
up.  In  spending  the  coupons  we  get  no  bronze 
shekels,  having  already  had  them  paid  us  in  buying 
the  ticket;  but  the  recipients  of  the  coupons  have  to 
give  bronze  shekels  to  the  State  in  having  them 
cashed.  .  .  .  The  savings  tickets  work  nicely. 
Even  our  farm  and  other  co-operatives  occasion- 
ally use  them." 

On  our  homeward  journey,  I  noted  some  small 
repair  shops,  and  learned  from  my  companion  that 
these  were  each  a  part  of  a  larger  co-operative — 
a  class  of  co-operatives  each  of  which  was  man- 
aged according  to  its  own  peculiar  needs. 

What  a  vast  superiority  I  could  now  see  in 
Atlism !  What  a  staggering  and  indelible  impres- 
sion it  made  upon  my  mind — the  great  immensity 
of  its  scope  and  the  marvelous  facility  of  its  opera- 
tions!    What  a   contrast  there  was  between  its 


ATLO'S  WONDERFUL  PUSH  WING  87 

protected  properties  and  the  profiteered  proper- 
ties of  the  Mamnist  world  1  What  a  contrast  be- 
tween its  orderly  Perfected  Capitalism  and  the 
disorderliness  of  the  Profiteering  Capitalism 
reigning  abroad  I 


CHAPTER  IX 

The  Gathering  Cloud 

Happy  days  were  those  of  my  first  month  In 
Atlic,  sauntering  along  its  beautifully  parked  ave- 
nues, or  flying  in  jubros  over  its  outlying  rural 
districts,  with  an  occasional  ride  over  the  Atlic 
Canal  in  one  of  its  swift-gliding  jubrets,  with 
Metel  at  my  side.  Sometimes  we  went  rowing, 
and  often  fishing,  in  the  clear  waters  of  this  canal. 
.  .  .  What  wonderful  visions  were  those,  when 
the  face  of  AT  shot  his  blood  red  shafts  across 
the  heavens,  painting  earth  and  sky  and  sea  and 
cloud  in  a  thousand  gorgeous  hues,  bespeaking  his 
divine  glory.  How  each  feathery  cloud  blushed, 
as  the  Golden  Faced  One  cast  his  glowing  eye  upon 
it  I  And  well  it  might;  for  was  not  he  ruler  over 
heaven  and  earth? 

What  delightful  evenings  we  also  spent  listen- 
ing to  brilliant  lectures  delivered  in  the  oroto,  or 
observing  the  progress  of  some  drama  in  a  play 
house.  .  .  .  How  much  more  enjoyable  they 
were  to  me,  interspersed  with  intervals  of  earnest 
work  in  the  Gloria.  It  taught  me  the  lesson  that 
all  pleasures  need  seasoning  with  intervals  of  work 


THE  GATHERING  CLOUD  89 

or  pain  of  some  sort.  Unseasoned  by  vexations 
and  disappointments,  a  very  houseful  of  toys  will 
not  impart  to  little  ones  their  pleasure-giving 
power.  In  their  very  midst,  the  child  will  burst 
into  tears  and  bawl  without  apparent  reason. 
.  And  the  poor,  neglected  child  often  de- 
rives more  pleasure  from  its  shabby  rag  doll. 
It  is  madness  in  mortals  to  think  pleasures  may 
be  expanded  with  possessions — that  pleasure 
added  to  pleasure  is  more  than  shadow  laid 
over  shadow.  .  .  .  As  If  the  pursuit  of  pleas- 
ures were  any  better  than  the  vain  practice  of  as- 
ceticism. But  mortal  mind  is  a  madhouse  of  de- 
lusions, only  by  slow  degrees  passing  into  the 
fairer  realm  of  freedom  and  sanity. 

Visiting  at  her  home  one  day,  her  mother 
joined  us.  In  the  course  of  conversation  casually  In- 
forming me  that  she  was  a  seer  of  visions,  who 
had  often  been  visited  In  her  dreams  by  the  god- 
dess Atl,  consort  of  the  Sun  God  AT.  In  such  a 
dream  my  coming  to  Atlo  had  been  announced, 
and  my  arrival  afterwards  had  been  a  verification 
of  its  prescience. 

"Last  night  had  I  another  of  these  prophetic 
dreams — "  she  confided  to  me,  "one  of  dreadful 
portent.  In  It,  our  fair  land  was  being  ravaged 
by  horrid  creatures,  of  vague  form  but  gigantic 
stature,  who  carried  on  their  depredations  in  every 


90  DOOMED 

portion  of  the  land.  I  saw  them  clambering  up 
our  oro  walls.  I  saw  them  breaking  in.  I  saw 
them  slaying  and  devouring  our  people.  Oh,  it 
was  a  terrible  dream.  It  haunts  me  every  mo- 
ment." 

"King  Mozo  is  busy  night  and  day,"  the  seer 
resumed,  "making  every  possible  preparation  for 
meeting  the  threatened  invasion.  Coming  from 
Atlora,  the  peninsula  to  our  west,  the  beasts  are 
expected  to  approach  through  the  isthmus  of  Long 
Neck.  At  that  point  we  are  already  concentrat- 
ing forces  and  constructing  bulwarks  calculated  to 
bar  their  entrance.  .  .  .  But  somehow  I  am 
overcome  with  a  premonition  that,  In  some  un- 
foreseen way,  the  beasts  will  effect  an  entrance 
and  overrun  the  land." 

"Expecting  them  to  come,"  I  suggested,  "were 
it  not  well  to  barricade  our  oro  windows  and  the 
doors  also?" 

"That  will  surely  be  done,"  she  assured  me, 
"since  King  Mozo  Is  already  aware  of  my  strange 
premonition,  and  Is  taking  steps  to  manufacture 
a  vast  number  of  steel  bars  suited  for  the  purpose. 
To  do  this  will  take  some  time;  and  the  danger  Is, 
we  may  be  invaded  before  the  preparations  are 
complete." 

Scarcely  had  she  ceased  speaking,  when  a 
strange  alteration  came  over  her;  and  leaning  back 


THE  GATHERING  CLOUD  91 

in  her  chair — her  body  rigid,  and  her  features 
livid — she  sat  staring  with  a  fixed  and  vacant  gaze. 
Metel  cautioned  me  at  once  to  remain  quiet,  it 
being  a  trance  from  which  her  mother  would  soon 
be  aroused. 

Slowly  the  lips  of  the  enthralled  woman  began 
to  part;  and  in  low,  muffled  tones,  as  if  addressing 
an  audience,  she  began  speaking: 

"Dark,  moving  figures  fill  the  face  of  the  land. 
It  is  at  Long  Neck.  They  seem  to  be,  but  are 
not  human  beings.  They  are  of  gigantic  stature, 
covered  with  thick  coats  of  hair,  all  jet  black. 
Fangs  of  the  tiger,  eyes  of  the  tiger,  heads  of 
the  tiger  have  they;  but  the  form  of  apes,  and  the 
spryness  of  apes.  They  thirst  for  human  blood, 
they  hunger  for  human  flesh.  In  ferocity,  no  beast 
is  their  equal.  ...  I  see  them  marching  in  a 
dark  passage  wa  *n  the  bowels  of  the  earth. 
They  are  heading  for  Atlo.  They  will  break  in 
upon  us  unawares — but  where  ?  I  cannot  see. 
All  is  dark,  save  where  I  see  oros  stormed  by  the 
monsters,  and  floors  red  with  the  gore  of  the 
slain.  ...  I  can  see  no  more.  No  more,  no 
more." 

While  speaking,  her  words  were  being  trans- 
mitted to  a  papyrus  sheet,  which  Metel  at  once 
handed  to  her  mother — the  trance  images  quickly 
fading  in  her  memory,  like  a  dream. 


92  DOOMED 

Reading  the  transcript,  the  seer  hastened  to 
have  its  story  bell-signalled  to  Atlo's  military 
chiefs — a  mode  of  communicating  rapidly  to  dis- 
tant places  through  a  series  of  signal  towers  each 
provided  with  a  huge  bell  and  an  operator  using 
a  code  of  notes  rung  In  varying  lengths  and  In  dif- 
ferent keys,  with  each  such  note  indicating  a  sep- 
arate sound  symbol. 

"So  you  go  to  the  front  tomorrow,  Loab;" 
Metel  regretfully  remarked  to  me  that  evening. 
"And  I  will  be  leaving  to  attend  the  wedding  of 
my  friend  Lesba,  at  Nungo,  to  young  Captain 
Kapso.  Really,  I  would  not  dare  to  leave  home 
at  such  a  time,  but  that  I  had  solemnly  promised 
Lesba  to  serve  as  a  bridesmaid.  ...  I  hope 
our  troubles  in  Atlo  will  not  begin  before  my  re- 
turn!" 

"They  hardly  will,"  I  retorted.  "Yet  our  part- 
ing may  be  for  a  long  while,  for  who  knows  how 
long  the  war  may  last!  It  may  be  many  moons 
before  we  meet  again.  .  .  .  And  for  this  very 
reason,  Metel,  I  wish  you  would  tell  me  more 
concerning  your  Atlon  attitude  toward  life — what 
in  other  lands  Is  called  religion.  If  I  do  not  err, 
you  once  told  me  you  did  not  believe  In  disembod- 
ied spirits.     Am  I  right?" 

"We  believe  body  and  spirit  are  Inseparably 


THE  GATHERING  CLOUD  93 

united  In  each  human  being.  They  together  dis- 
solve at  the  tomb,  and  reappear  in  the  cradle. 
In  the  interval  they  form  part  of  the  insensate 
body  or  mass  of  life's  substance.  Into  this  they 
merge  at  death,  and  out  of  this  they  reappear  in 
new  births." 

"Then  your  creed  is  without  a  hereafter?" 

"Why  a  hereafter,  when  we  have  AN  ETER- 
NAL HERE  in  which  each  successive  generation 
lives  the  hereafter  of  all  previous  ones,  reaping 
the  harvests,  for  good  or  ill,  such  as  in  the  past 
they've  sown?" 

"Then  Atlons  can  have  little  fear  of  death?" 
I  queried, 

"No  more  than  they  now  have  of  ghosts,"  she 
replied.  "And  yet,  the  thought  of  death  is  re- 
pelled through  blind  impulse.  For  the  great 
inertia  of  energies  driving  us  on  and  denoting  the 
degree  of  vitality  In  us  Is  constantly  resisting  death 
and  all  thought  of  death.  It  Is  not  so  much  rea- 
son, as  impulse,  that  causes  us  to  cling  to  life. 
.  .  .  When  age  arrives,  and  the  decline  of  our 
energies  begins,  the  impulse  of  resistance  to  death 
also  wanes,  and  often  makes  It  welcome." 

"So  also  do  we  resist  sleep  till  exhausted  en- 
ergies cease  their  struggle  against  it." 

"Sleep  is  Nature's  building  season,"  Metel  ex- 
plained.    "When  disturbed  and  exhausted  forces 


94  DOOMED 

and  tissues  are  ready  to  let  the  body  of  man  col- 
lapse, Nature  takes  possession  of  it  and  attends 
to  the  needed  repairs,  giving  us  back  the  body 
when  once  more  in  good  shape.  .  .  .  Begin- 
ning with  the  cradle,  and  ending  with  the  grave, 
from  sleep  to  sleep,  we  undergo  a  daily  course 
of  change,  so  that  none  can  say  at  just  what  stage 
of  growth  the  ME  is  truly  likenessed  in  the  body. 
Tell  me,  pray,  which  of  all  this  myriad  of  bodies 
had  the  prior  right  to  say  'this  is  me'?  Are  they 
not  all  me — all  figures  of  a  lifelong  ME?  Even 
so  is  mankind  an  ETERNAL  ME,  and  its  here- 
after an  ETERNAL  HERE." 

"Viewing  life  as  an  eternal  here,"  said  I,  "you 
have  an  ever-present  incentive  to  make  your  world 
a  better  one  to  live  in.  Your  minds  are  not  dis- 
tracted by  fancies  of  worlds  beyond  the  grave, 
nor  your  efforts  diverted  to  delusive  tasks  serving 
such  worlds.  ...  In  other  lands,  and  in  none 
so  much  as  in  benighted  Egypt,  the  earth  is  made 
gloomy  with  the  shadows  cast  over  It  by  the  world 
beyond  the  grave.  The  very  dreams  of  its  princes 
are  haunted  by  the  spirits  of  this  dread  world,  and 
the  commands  of  these  dream-born  spirits  domi- 
nate affairs  and  shape  events,  distorting  both  man 
and  his  development." 

"Charlatans  in  every  age  have  taken  refuge  in 
the  affairs  of  the  spirit  world,  that  can  neither  be 


THE  GATHERING  CLOUD  95 

proved  nor  disproved.  Out  of  its  voices,  whether 
heard  in  dreams  or  framed  by  bald  mendacity, 
creed  upon  creed  have  been  evolved  and  priest- 
hood upon  priesthood,  becoming  bolder  with  their 
success  and  building  up  systems  wielding  vast 
power  that  seldom  failed  to  become  grasping  and 
tyrannical." 

"Since  Atlons  believe  in  no  spirits,"  I  now 
asked,  "it  cannot  be  your  AT  is  a  material  god?" 
"The  traditional  AT  of  Old  Atlo  was  both  a 
material  and  a  personal  divinity,"  she  answered, 
"but  the  AT  of  our  day  is  neither  material  nor 
personal.  In  the  Sun  we  see  merely  a  visible 
symbol  of  our  creator — only  a  symbol.  The  real 
AT  appears  to  us  in  the  voice  of  conscience,  and 
in  all  uplifting  ideals  that  appeal  to  us.  Through 
heeding  these  and  seeking  their  fulfillment,  we 
are  constantly  raised  to  higher  being,  and  con- 
stantly joining  hands  with  the  creator  in  a  por- 
tion of  his  work  of  creation.  In  all  lower  forms 
of  life,  upward-reaching  aspirations  form  the 
pathway  to  growth,  progress,  development— crea- 
tion. It  Is  a  blind  worship  of  divinity  that  to  the 
Atlon  is  a  more  conscious  effort  in  the  pursuit  of 

lofty  ideals — in  following  the  lead  of  AT AT, 

the  ideal  in  all  his  varied  forms — AT,  the  living 
god,  reappearing  ever  in  loftier  ideals  and  broader 
concepts,  as  development  proceeds." 


96  DOOMED 

"AT  Is  then  unlike  other  gods,  being  both  Im- 
material and  impersonal?" 

"In  one  way,  as  the  Ideal,  he  images  the  poten- 
tial, the  highest  possible  development  of  man  in- 
dividual and  man  collective.  Rather,  he  is  the 
image  of  what  we  may  become,  with  proper  effort, 
in  due  time;  though  not  of  what  we  now  are.  In 
another  sense,  we  may  consider  him  the  soul  of 
humanity  and  of  the  material  universe. 
But  he  is  not  a  soul  detached  from  its  material 
base,  no  more  than  a  material  body  considered 
without  soul.  He  Is  In  truth  a  reality — an  entity 
we  cannot  deny  nor  detach  from  our  lives." 

"Your  creed,  as  I  see  it,"  I  confessed,  "connects 
the  ideal  with  the  tangible,  allowing  neither  to  be 
separated.  It  rejects  as  erroneous  all  conceptions 
of  material  without  spirit,  as  well  as  of  all  spirit 
without  a  material  connection."  ^ 

1  The  striking  disparity  between  the  theology  of  Atlo,  as 
here  expounded  by  Metel  and  that  in  which  the  narrative  is 
framed  is  difficult  to  account  for  except  by  assuming  the  chron- 
iclers to  have  indulged  in  poetic  license,  framing  the  tale  to 
suit  the  minds  of  Atlons  for  whom  it  was  originally  intended 
and  whose  traditional  theology  was  probably  still  much  in  vogue. 
Viewed  as  an  allegoric  history,  foreign  invaders  may  have  been 
given  the  form  of  beasts  and  good  and  bad  ideali7ed  into  gods 
of  good  and  evil,  and  the  reports  of  spies  concealed  in  the 
prophetic  visions  of  Mafra.  .  .  But  let  who  will  solve  the  rid- 
dle. For  us  it  is  enough  that  the  character  of  Mamnism  is 
deftly  exposed  and  in  it  we  can  see  a  duplicate  of  modern  Com- 


THE  GATHERING  CLOUD  97 

It  is  idle  to  repeat  all  we  talked  of  that  evening, 
so  many  things  pertaining  to  the  present  and  the 
past  of  the  two  worlds  we  represented;  but  over 
all  hung  the  shadow  of  our  parting  that  was  to 
come  that  night,  since  I  was  to  take  a  jubret  for 
the  war  front  in  the  early  hours  of  the  morning. 
So  it  was  not  strange  that,  as  our  later  conversa- 
tion proceeded,  a  note  of  tenderness  became  no- 
ticeable in  our  voices  that  was  also  reflected  in  our 
eyes,  as  we  were  drawn  toward  each  other — the 
positive  symptoms  of  love  which  each  in  our 
hearts  felt  and  recognized. 

Before  the  time  of  parting,  I  therefore  gained 
courage  to  speak,  stating  my  attitude  toward  her, 
in  a  halting  tongue,  but  none  the  less,  so  that  she 
could  understand.  I  closed  my  broken  utterance 
with  asking  her  if  she  would  trust  her  life  at  my 
side. 

For  answer  she  spake  not  a  word,  but  drew  her 
fair  face  close  to  mine  and  we  kissed,  pledging 
ourselves  to  one  another.  .  .  .  The  decision 
had  come  perhaps  hastily;  but  lest  it  held  in  it  an 
element  of  delusion,  and  was  but  a  momentary 
impulse,  we  decided  to  keep  the  matter  secret  till 
we  met  again.  And  so  it  came  about  that  no  rings 
were  exchanged,  though  each  gave  to  the  other  a 

mercialism,  Profiteering  Capitalism.     For  us  it  is  enough  that 
its  message  teaches  how  to  perfect  Capitalism. 


98  DOOMED 

miniature  Atprint,  which  is  a  likeness  they  take 
here  by  a  sort  of  magic,  aided  by  the  rays  of  our 
beaming  Sun  God  AT.  These  Atprints  were  con- 
fined within  lockets,  to  be  worn  around  the  neck. 
It  was  a  strange  parting  for  us,  with  the  gloom 
of  Atlo's  impending  danger  casting  a  deep  shadow; 
over  our  hearts. 


PART  II 


WORLDS  APART— AS  TOLD  BY  QUEEN 
METEL 


CHAPTER  I 

The  Throne  Awaiting  Me 

It  was  a  bright  Spring  morning,  about  two 
Kours  after  the  departure  of  my  betrothed,  that 
I  parted  from  my  parents  and  entered  my  jubro, 
bound  for  the  town  of  Nungo  located  In  the  south- 
ern part  of  Atlo.  The  town  Is  quite  a  mining 
center  in  the  midst  of  the  Copper  Mountain  re- 
gion. ...  I  had  a  long  journey  before  me, 
but  thanks  to  the  way  our  roadways  are  here  con- 
structed, sunk  two  cubits  below  the  road  level 
and  four  at  crossings  where  they  are  also  bridged 
for  pedestrians,  none  of  whom  came  In  the  path 
of  Its  vehicles,  we  made  such  excellent  time  that 
I  arrived  before  sunset. 

Delightful  rural  scenes  greeted  the  eye  upon  all 
sides,  the  verdure  and  foliage  In  their  most  bril- 
liant hues  much  Interspersed  with  the  delicately 
tinted  blossoms  of  the  season.  At  almost  regu- 
lar intervals  also  rose  towering  oros,  and  also 
many  tall  windmills  that  pumped  water  from  deep 
wells  into  great  reservoirs  from  which  the  lands 
were  moistened. 


102  DOOMED 

In  these  rural  oros  dwelt  groups  of  husband- 
men who  co-operated  In  tilling  the  surrounding 
lands — each  member  in  charge  of  some  special 
branch  of  the  work  for  which  he  was  best  fitted. 
In  their  fields  they  toiled,  observing  the  moods 
of  Nature;  and  In  the  orotos  they  turned  over  in 
their  minds  the  observations  made,  thus  giving 
their  soil  a  double  plowing.  .  .  .  These  orotos 
brought  them  together  so,  their  educational  in- 
fluence was  wonderful,  and  they  also  obviated 
the  baleful  Influences  of  solitude. 

In  each  oro  they  had  a  priest  and  priestess  of 
the  hearth,  who  were  also  physicians  teaching 
them  the  right  care  of  their  bodies  and  giving 
them  also  wise  counsels  as  to  their  conduct  to 
their  fellow  men,  since  It  was  their  belief  that  as 
they  did  to  their  fellow  men  so  did  they  to  their 
gods,  and  so  also  did  the  gods  judge  men,  listening 
to  no  vapid  prayers.  To  these  simple-minded 
Atlons  the  human  body  was  the  chosen  temple  of 
their  god — the  shrine  he  visited  In  the  form  of 
conscience  and  all  uplifting  ideals,  calling  men 
upward  and  onward. 

The  wedding  ceremony  was  to  be  performed 
at  noon  of  the  following  day.  So,  upon  arrival 
at  Silver  Arrow  oro,  late  in  the  day,  Its  oro  mother 
promptly  took  me  to  the  guest  chamber  engaged 
for  me  by  my  friend  Lesba,  who  happened  to  be 


THE  THRONE  AWAITING  ME  103 

absent  attending  to  some  pre-nuptial  matter.  Here 
I  at  once  made  myself  at  home,  had  a  refreshing 
bath,  had  my  evening  repast  served  in  my  room; 
and  then,  being  fatigued  with  the  long  ride,  I 
retired. 

Waking  early,  I  hastily  dressed  for  a  good  walk, 
resolved  to  visit  the  famous  Nungo  Park,  which 
faced  the  avenue  on  which  Silver  Arrow  oro 
fronted.  I  could  see,  in  the  distance,  the  tall 
cloud-crested  mount  known  as  Torgo  Peak,  which 
had  its  base  on  the  outskirts  of  the  park. 

There  was  not  a  soul  on  the  avenue  at  this  hour, 
and  I  skipped  merrily  on,  with  all  the  abandon  of 
a  school  girl  just  freed  from  the  confinement  of 
the  school  room.  It  was  an  up  hill  climb  all  the 
way;  for  the  land  slopes  down  from  the  base  of 
the  mountain,  reaching  its  lowest  in  the  very  heart 
of  the  town. 

The  air  was  inspiring,  and  the  trees  were  filled 
with  sweet  warbling  songsters,  while  the  sod  was 
everywhere  beaded  with  glistening  dews. 

From  within  the  park  enclosure,  I  obtained  a 
splendid  view  of  Torgo  Peak,  whose  massive  pro- 
portions and  gloomy  frown  quite  overawed  me. 

From  the  midst  of  the  park,  rose  a  tall,  thin 
column  of  smoke,  mingling,  high  up,  with  the 
mass  above  Torgo  Peak.  This  I  recognized  as 
emanating  from  a  pit  I  had  heard  of,  called  The 


I04  DOOMED 

Fiery  Pit,  supposed  to  be  bottomless,  and  on  rare 
occasions  emitting  flames. 

Seated  in  view  of  this  pit,  and  pondering  over 
numerous  matters,  among  which  was  the  great 
danger  confronting  Atlo,  my  separation  from  my 
betrothed,  and  the  approaching  nuptials  of  my 
friend  Lesba,  I  was  suddenly  startled  by  a  pair  of 
deft  hands  forcing  a  strip  of  cloth  into  my  mouth 
and  swiftly  drawing  it  so  taut  I  could  give  vent 
to  no  utterance.  And  immediately  following  this, 
a  hood  was  thrown  over  my  head,  and  I  saw  no 
more. 

Like  a  flash,  I  realized  I  had  been  gagged  and 
blindfolded.  But  wherefore?  What  could  it  pos- 
sibly mean?  Such  treatment  was  the  rarest  of 
occurrences  in  Atlo;  it  was  a  thing  really  unac- 
countable. It  was  vain,  thus  handicapped,  to 
struggle  against  my  captors,  who  soon  had  me; 
placed  upon  a  litter,  to  be  borne  away. 

Whither  I  was  being  borne,  I  had  no  idea,  save 
that  after  a  few  steps  on  level  ground  I  was 
dropped  downward  in  the  midst  of  a  hot  and 
smoky  atmosphere.  Almost  stifled,  I  felt  myself 
sinking  lower  and  lower,  till  I  could  hear  a  heavy- 
door  creak  on  its  hinges  and  open  at  the  level  I 
had  reached.  Then  It  seemed  as  If  the  litter  was 
raised  some  and  I  was  being  borne  along  for  quite 
a  distance,  when  the  litter  seemed  to  be  set  down, 


THE  THRONE  AWAITING  ME  105 

and  in  another  moment  the  hood  was  lifted  from 
my  head  and  the  gag  removed  from  my  mouth. 

I  now  found  myself  in  the  midst  of  a  deep 
gloom,  and  only  after  accustoming  my  eyes  to  my 
surroundings,  did  I  discern  a  lengthy  passageway 
— a  sort  of  tunnel,  as  mysterious  as  it  was  gloomy. 

Near  me  stood  two  stalwart  men  garbed  in 
long,  coarse  robes  reaching  nearly  to  their  feet. 
They  seemed  to  be  darker  than  our  Atlons,  and 
also  distinctly  featured,  assuring  me  they  belonged 
to  some  other  race. 

Presently  they  again  placed  the  litter  on  their 
shoulders  and  bore  me  on  through  the  dark  pas- 
sageway, till  they  came  to  what  seemed  to  be  a 
spacious  chamber  carved  out  of  the  rock — a  sort 
of  grotto.  .  .  .  Here  they  set  me  down;  and 
one  of  them  brought  me  a  chair  to  sit  on,  taken 
from  a  niche  in  the  grotto. 

The  other  fellow  had  meanwhile  procured  a 
pot  of  paint,  with  which  he  proceeded  to  cover  the 
grotto  walls  with  great  splotches  that  became 
luminous  and  served  the  part  of  lights. 

Soon  they  had  a  fire  blazing,  and  I  saw  they 
were  preparing  a  meal.  I  could  now  realize  that 
the  grotto  was  a  sort  of  storehouse  and  stopping 
place  for  those  traveling  through  the  tunnel. 

While  resting,  I  reflected  upon  the  manifest 
harmlessness  of  my  guards,  who  in  no  way  be- 


io6  DOOMED 

trayed  the  slightest  rudeness — appearing  rather 
sohcitous  for  my  comfort  and  security.  But  what 
was  the  meaning  of  my  captivity?  Surely  I  could 
not  be  held  for  the  sake  of  a  ransom? 

At  length,  restless  from  speculating  on  the 
meaning  of  my  captivity,  I  walked  across  the 
grotto  to  examine  some  queer  figures  I  thought  I 
had  detected  upon  its  walls.  Coming  near  to 
them,  I  saw  what  were  evidently  strange  messages, 
carved  in  hieroglyphics,  over  whose  meaning  I 
pondered  in  vain. 

But  following  along  the  wall,  what  was  my  sur- 
prise upon  observing  a  pair  of  eyes  staring  at  me 
from  the  dark — the  eyes  of  a  beast  of  burden,  a 
number  of  whom  I  soon  after  beheld  stalled  in  a 
row  further  on,  evidently  kept  there  for  a  pur- 
pose. Upon  closer  scrutiny,  I  found  they  stood  no 
more  than  three  cubits  high,  and  had  long,  straight 
and  finely  pointed  horns  upon  their  heads.  They 
were  undoubtedly  a  species  of  domesticated  ante- 
lope— a  creature  entirely  new  to  me. 

Returning  to  my  former  station,  I  now  found  a 
table  beside  the  chair;  and  besides  being  covered 
with  a  neat  cloth.  It  had  a  number  of  golden 
platters  laid  upon  It,  heaped  with  steaming  viands, 
which,  being  quite  hungry,  I  partook  of  with  no 
small  relish. 

I  had  hardly  finished  my  repast,  when  my  ears 


THE  THRONE  AWAITING  ME  107 

were  greeted  with  the  sound  of  distant  halloos 
from  the  direction  whence  I  had  been  borne ;  and 
these  my  guards  now  answered  in  a  similar  man- 
ner. 

Presently  a  group  of  men,  perhaps  a  dozen  or 
so,  became  distinguishable;  and  as  they  came 
nearer,  I  could  see  in  their  mien  a  spirit  of  dejec- 
tion, as  if  depressed  by  some  sore  disappointment. 
These  were  also  stalwart  men,  but  not  as  dark 
as  my  guards,  and  of  a  different  cast  of  counte- 
nance— albeit  they  were  as  much  unlike  Atlons  as 
were  the  guards.  They  were  garbed  fantastically 
in  short,  belted  tunics  and  tight-fitting  pantaloons 
of  soft  leather,  covered  with  checkered  and  striped 
designs  and  also  serpentine  figures.  Each  had  a 
dagger  in  his  belt  and  a  wide-rimmed  peaked  hat 
upon  his  head.  An  air  of  great  importance  also 
distinguished  them  from  the  two  men  in  whose 
charge  I  had  been  brought  hither. 

I  kept  my  seat  at  the  table,  to  which  their 
leader  now  approached,  swinging  off  his  hat  with 
an  air  of  condescension,  as  he  made  a  low  bow. 

I  was  unable  at  first  to  understand  his  words, 
though  there  was  a  strange  familiarity  in  their 
sound.  But  after  many  gestures  and  much  repe- 
tition of  his  words,  I  began  to  catch  their  meaning 
— being  couched  in  an  Aramaic  more  ancient  than 
that  from   which   our  Atlon   had   been   derived. 


io8  DOOMED 

.  .  Once  realizing  this  fact,  and  accustom- 
ing my  ears  to  his  pecuHar  intonations,  the  under- 
standing of  his  words  became  easier;  and  after 
he  had  undergone  a  similar  experience  in  endeav- 
oring to  interpret  my  answers,  our  ability  to  con- 
verse with  one  another  by  degrees  developed. 

From  his  lips,  I  soon  divined  the  object  of  the 
expedition  of  thi'i^and  by  whom  I  had  been  ab- 
ducted. They  had  come  from  an  underground 
world  far,  very  far  away,  in  a  land  called  Om- 
shola,  aiming  to  abduct  from  the  upper  world  an 
Atlon  male,  whom  they  designed  to  set  upon  the 
throne  as  their  ruler.  From  time  immemorial,  it 
had  been  their  custom  to  secure  rulers  in  this 
manner — men  supposed  to  be  superior  beings — 
the  world  above  being  regarded  as  a  realm  of 
spirits.  The  Kingdom  of  Omshola  was  at  the 
present  time  in  the  hands  of  a  regent,  awaiting  a 
successor  to  the  throne;  and  none  was  now  avail- 
able, since  the  expedition  had  met  with  failure,  ow- 
ing to  the  arrival,  in  the  territory  surrounding  the 
town  of  Nungo,  of  myriads  of  monstrous  beasts, 
who  were  ravaging  the  district  and  had  driven  its 
people  into  seclusion. 

My  own  capture  had  been  made  necessary,  to 
prevent  my  giving  an  alarm  that  might  have  been 
fatal  to  the  expedition,  or  else  betraying  their 
secret  door  to  Atlo. 


THE  THRONE  AWAITING  ME  109 

So  I  learned  how  my  mother's  prophetic  vision 
had  come  true,  and  the  beasts  had  succeeded  in 
effecting  an  entrance  into  Atlo.  I  shuddered  at 
the  thought  of  what  this  news  signified.  What 
would  become  of  Atlo ;  and  how,  also,  could  I  ever 
return?  I  was  now  practically  an  exile,  and  an 
alien  in  a  strange  world.  Would  I  ever  be  able 
to  return?  Would  I  ever  again  meet  my  parents, 
or  ever  again  see  my  betrothed?  I  was  indeed 
alone.  But  I  resolved  not  to  give  way  to  despond- 
ency. Had  not  my  betrothed,  Loab,  also  been  left 
alone  in  a  strange  world;  and  did  not  he  of  his 
own  free  will  remain,  when  he  might  have  re- 
turned to  rejoin  family  and  fortune  and  native 
land?    I  would  take  heart  from  his  noble  example. 

Kosoki  Samba,  the  leader  of  the  expedition  and 
the  crown  counselor  of  Omshola,  was  in  despair. 
He  saw  a  gloomy  outlook  facing  his  country,  left 
without  a  ruler — its  ambitious  nobles  all  at  log- 
gerheads In  their  selfish  desire  to  attain  the  crown 
— a  sure  herald  of  approaching  anarchy.  In  his 
intense  agitation  over  the  dangerous  position  of 
Omshola,  he  nervously  paced  the  floor  of  the 
grotto,  ran  his  long  fingers  through  his  raven 
locks,  and  then  suddenly  came  to  a  pause. 

"I  have  it!  I  have  It  at  last!"  he  joyfully  ex- 
claimed, a  new  light  beaming  in  his  eyes.     "Why 


no  DOOMED 

not?  If  no  king,  why  not  a  queen?'-'  His  last 
words  sank  into  a  whisper  and  remained  inaudible. 

Then,  passing  to  the  table  at  which  I  was  seated, 
he  stopped,  as  if  to  peer  into  my  very  soul.  I 
faced  him  calmly,  smiling  even;  for  I  had  divined 
his  object. 

Again  he  began  pacing  the  grotto  length,  back 
and  forth,  deeply  absorbed  in  the  problem  before 
him.  Finally  he  seemed  resolved  upon  the  course 
to  pursue;  and  presenting  himself  with  a  low 
obeisance,  he  addressed  me : 

"Your  ladyship:  as  you  are  already  aware,  the 
throne  of  Omshola  is  vacant  and  needs  an  occu- 
pant— needs  one  sorely,  if  the  land  is  to  escape  a 
reign  of  anarchy.  It  is  now  impossible  to  fill  the 
vacancy  with  a  king,  as  has  ever  been  the  custom; 
but  after  serious  contemplation,  I  have  come  to 
the  conclusion  that  if  we  can  have  no  king  to  oc- 
cupy the  throne,  there  is  no  reason  why  we  can- 
not have  a  queen.  There  is  nothing  in  the  way, 
I  assure  you,  but  your  own  decision  to  save  our 
realm  by  filling  the  exalted  post.  ...  I  ask 
not  that  you  reply  without  giving  the  matter  due 
deliberation.  It  is  a  very  serious  step,  which  I 
beg  that  you  will  carefully  consider.  In  doing  so, 
I  shall  endeavor  to  be  of  aid  to  you,  as  far  as  is 
possible — particularly  in  informing  you  concern- 
ing the  realm  and  its  affairs." 


THE  THRONE  AWAITING  ME  iii 

As  practically  the  only  course  for  me  to  pursue, 
I  naturally  agreed  to  take  into  consideration  the 
assumption  of  queenship.  Think,  of  it — a  crown 
begging  me  for  acceptance  !  Was  it  not  more  like 
a  dream  than  possible  reality?  And  yet  I  knew 
it  was  reality,  though  stranger  than  anything  told 
in  fairy  tales ! 

Of  course  I  had  many  long  conversations  with 
the  crown  counselor,  a  fine  looking  specimen  of 
his  people,  dressed  less  showily  than  his  com- 
panions, but  better  caparisoned  inwardly — if  his 
keen  eyes  and  sensitive  facial  expression  stood  for 
aught. 

From  him  I  gleaned  what  information  concern- 
ing the  land  was  necessary;  and  after  discussing 
with  him  all  phases  of  the  subject,  I  reached  the 
Inevitable  conclusion  that  both  for  my  own  safety 
and  that  of  the  land  of  Omshola,  I  had  no  other 
course  open  than  to  accept  the  throne,  together 
with  the  obligations  Inseparable,  In  my  mind,  from 
the  possession  of  power,  great  or  little. 

It  was  the  second  day  of  our  sojourn  in  the 
grotto,  when  I  made  my  decision  known  to 
Kosokl  Samba;  and  now  we  prepared  for  a  long 
journey  to  Omshola,  which  would  take  us  a  w^hole 
month,  riding  upon  the  backs  of  the  swift  footed 
tofos — the  long-horned  beasts  I  had  seen  In  the 
grotto. 


112  DOOMED 

It  was  a  tedious  journey,  owing  to  its  great 
length;  and  we  daily  stopped  at  grottos  that  were 
distributed  on  the  route  so  thickly  that  we  had 
to  pass  one  every  other  hour.  The  grottos  were 
each  equipped  with  supplies  and  provisions  kept 
stored  in  them  for  the  benefit  of  travelers. 

I  was  very  much  interested  in  them,  and  in  the 
strange  hieroglyphics  carved  on  their  sides.  So  I 
enquired  of  Kosoki  Samba  as  to  their  origin,  as 
well  as  of  the  lengthy  passage  connecting  them 
with  each  other.  The  hewing  of  all  these  out  of 
the  hard  flinty  rock  must  have  been  a  prodigious 
work.     Had  it  been  done  by  the  Omsholans? 

To  my  query  the  crown  counselor  replied,  say- 
ing that  no  one  knew  by  whom  the  vast  under- 
taking had  been  accomplished.  It  had  not  been 
done  by  the  Omsholans,  or  by  any  people  within 
their  knowledge.  The  passage  and  the  grottos 
had  been  there  as  long  as  tradition's  earliest  rec- 
ollections and  hints;  and  who  had  performed  the 
superhuman  task,  or  carved  the  inscriptions,  would 
remain  a  mystery,  perhaps  to  the  end  of  time. 

Arriving  at  the  last  grotto  before  reaching 
Omsh,  the  capital  city  and  gateway  to  Omshola, 
we  halted — there  to  remain,  while  the  crown 
counselor  and  a  part  of  his  retinue  hastened  in  ad- 
vance to  make  the  necessary  arrangements  for  the 
great  event,  while  also  dispatching  a  suite  of  at- 


THE  THRONE  AWAITING  ME  113 

tendants  to  the  grotto  equipped  with  all  the  neces- 
saries for  conveying  me  in  a  closed  carriage  to 
the  royal  palace  at  Omsh. 

And  as  I  waited  here,  I  dreamed,  with  many  a 
sigh,  of  what  might  at  this  very  time  be  happen- 
ing in  Atlo,  and  of  the  amazing  possibilities  open- 
ing up  to  me  in  the  new  world  I  was  to  enter. 


CHAPTER  II 
On  Atlo's  Fighting  Front 

Enrolled  as  a  member  of  Atlo's  army  of  de- 
fense, Loab  Ben  Phra  was  immediately  dispatched 
to  the  border  town  of  Gegra,  near  Long  Neck 
isthmus,  where  he  was  assigned  a  post  on  one  of 
its  armored  war  jubros  which  was  hurried  for- 
ward, to  take  its  place  in  the  great  line  stationed 
across  the  Neck  to  debar  the  entrance  of  the  in- 
vading beast  horde. 

The  goro  goros,  named  thus  after  the  guttural 
sound  they  thundered  like  a  battle  cry  when  ad- 
vancing upon  their  foe,  were  colossal  apes,  black 
as  pitch,  whose  stature  was  rarely  less  than  five 
or  six  cubits  and  whose  shoulder  breadth  was  pro- 
portional, with  arms  hanging  to  the  ground 
framed  in  muscles  of  iron.  Their  heads  had  the 
shape  and  expression  of  the  tiger,  whose  ferocity 
they  more  than  equalled.  In  spite  of  their  short 
legs,  they  were  as  fleet  as  an  antelope,  and  were 
capable  of  taking  mighty  leaps,  and  climbing  like 
cats.  .  .  .  More  than  all  this,  they  could  hurl 
stones,  or  other  missiles,  as  if  thrown  from  a  cata- 

114 


ON  ATLO'S  FIGHTING  FRONT  115 

pult;  and  they  wielded  huge  clubs,  far-reaching, 
falling  with  crushing  force  wherever  they  de- 
scended. In  low  cunning  they  rivalled  the  fox; 
and  they  communicated  to  each  other  in  a  jargon 
such  thoughts  as  their  minds  were  capable  of. 
They  were  neither  man  nor  ordinary  ape.  If  I 
were  to  class  them,  I  should  hold  them  as  super- 
apes — a  name  by  which  they  were  not  infrequently 
designated. 

Opposed  to  these  formidable  beasts,  Atlo  had 
rigged  up  a  squadron  comprising  hundreds  upon 
hundreds  of  armored  jubros  fitted  to  travel  over 
the  roughest  ground,  fronted  with  an  elognated 
snout — a  V  shaped  projection  with  sharp  edges 
that  helped  to  cut  its  way  through  brush  or  jungle, 
or  through  the  massed  ranks  of  the  invading 
beasts.  These  jubros  were  completely  covered 
with  iron  plates,  all  perforated,  so  as  to  enable 
the  men  within  to  fire,  by  means  of  blow  guns,  tiny 
arrows  or  shafts  tipped  in  a  liquid  poison  paste. 

Behind  their  iron  ramparts,  the  jubro  warriors 
were  obliged  to  keep  perfectly  cool,  using  the  ut- 
most care  in  dipping  their  tiny  shafts  in  the  liquid 
poison  paste,  lest  they  themselves  be  bruised  and 
made  its  victims.  Nor  was  this  an  easy  matter, 
with  the  sides  of  the  jubro  ever  clattering  and 
thundering  from  the  mighty  blows  of  missiles 
hurled  against  them. 


ii6  DOOMED 

There  were  special  jubros  also  constructed  to 
make  dashes  into  the  ranks  of  the  foe;  and  these 
had,  in  addition  to  the  long  sharp  snout,  horizon- 
tal knives  projecting,  designed  to  mow  down  the 
foe  as  with  mammoth  scythes. 

Into  one  of  these  dash  jubros  Loab  was  soon 
transferred,  carrying  with  him  his  Sidon  sword 
and  a  huge  quiver  filled  with  the  little  death  shafts 
to  be  fired  through  his  blow  gun. 

Across  the  entire  breadth  of  Long  Neck,  a  dis- 
tance one  could  scarcely  travel  afoot  from  the 
rising  to  the  setting  of  the  sun,  stretched  our  line 
of  defense  jubros,  less  than  twenty  paces  apart, 
and  with  a  line  of  dash  jubros  behind,  ready  to 
mow  down  such  of  the  beasts  as  managed  to  pene- 
trate the  first  line. 

Here  and  there,  wherever  a  deep  ravine  Inter- 
vened, strong  walls  of  stone  had  been  erected  to 
bar  the  foe's  advance;  and  in  a  ditch  dug 
upon  each  wall  was  kept  a  body  of  Atlene  ready 
to  be  ignited  the  moment  the  brutes  succeeded  in 
clambering  to  the  top.  An  extinguishing  device 
was  also  in  readiness  for  quenching  the  flame  when 
its  work  was  done,  and  thereby  sparing  the  Atlene 
for  resisting  repeated  attempts. 

Already  scouts  were  reporting  the  approach  of 
the  superapes,  reaching  the  Neck  in  squads  from 


ON  ATLO'S  FIGHTING  FRONT  117 

all  directions,  and  rapidly  concentrating  into  a 
mighty  host.  But  although  the  squads  had  each 
its  quasi  leader,  this  limited  leadership  counted  for 
little  when  massed  together  in  the  unorganized 
horde.  It  made  an  unwieldy  mass  of  blind  brute 
force,  moving  on  instinctively  by  its  latent  thirst 
for  human  gore  and  its  hunger  for  human  flesh, 
with  which  the  demon  goddess  Mammon  had  im- 
bued them. 

The  vast  horde  was  in  reality  a  greater  beast, 
without  a  head — a  roaring  ocean  of  madness,  let 
loose  to  destroy  whatever  interposed.  In  short, 
it  was  a  horde  and  not  an  army.  This  horde  was 
also  much  the  smaller  portion  of  the  goro  goros 
moving  toward  Atlo,  the  larger  portion  of  them 
having  been  diverted  into  an  underground  passage 
some  of  their  leaders  had  accidentally  discovered 
and  followed,  when  nearing  Long  Neck.  The 
passage,  as  it  happened,  led  to  an  opening  in  the 
Copper  Mountain  region,  in  Atlo;  and  into  this 
region  the  greater  body  of  the  goro  goros  now 
poured,  working  terrible  havoc  upon  all  sides, 
of  which  I  shall  have  more  to  tell  in  its  due  place. 

Of  this  diversion.  King  Mozo  had  not  yet 
learned;  but  as  soon  as  the  report  reached  him 
by  bell-signal  dispatches,  he  at  once  saw  the  neces- 
sity to  readapt  his  plans,  so  as  to  deal  with  the 
new  situation  confronting  him. 


ii8  DOOMED 

He  could  not  afford  to  divide  his  forces,  and 
fight  both  hordes  simultaneously.  But  In  order 
to  be  of  help  in  the  Interior  of  Atlo,  he  must 
adopt  more  aggressive  tactics  against  the  goro 
goros  now  approaching  along  the  Isthmus.  He 
must  crush  and  destroy  these,  so  as  to  be  able, 
afterwards,  to  pursue  the  remaining  superapes 
with  a  sufficient  force  to  be  effective. 

The  dash  jubros  were  now  placed  in  the  fore- 
front, with  their  rear  covered  by  the  guard  jubros 
that  were  to  slay  all  the  beasts  that  were  left  be- 
hind in  the  dashes  contemplated.  A  large  body 
of  guard  jubros  were  also  stationed  so  as  to  pre- 
clude entrance  from  the  sides  of  ravines. 

Orders  had  already  been  signalled  to  all  the 
officers  stationed  along  the  jubro  lines,  so  as  to 
act  In  concert.  Dusk  had  begun  to  cast  Its  haze 
over  the  scene;  and  as  the  darkness  gradually 
deepened,  artificial  lights,  generated  by  the  jubros, 
began  to  flash  In  blinding  rays,  so  intense  as  to 
infuse  the  beasts  with  a  superstitious  dread,  hold- 
ing them  for  the  while  in  check. 

Silently  the  jubros  thus  glared  at  the  foe  with- 
out sound  or  movement,  giving  our  forces  a  chance 
to  snatch  a  few  brief  hours  of  slumber,  and  accus- 
toming the  beasts  to  the  seeming  harmlessness  of 
these  mysterious  creatures. 

After  some  time,  the  goro  goros  huddled  them- 


ON  ATLO'S  FIGHTING  FRONT 


119 


<2» 


\ 


./> 


0/ 


M 


fi':i 


OOD 
u  2    #% 


^^y\o^'^.s^.. 


">:, 


^ 


V. 


•     / 

2:0 


Q* 


if 


60 


8  ^ 


sO    u 


4 
^ 


•2.  V', 


r*r-^ 


^.ov„ 


:-i:^ 


o   ^ 

Eg 


A-' 


^^km^^:^ 


I20  DOOMED 

selves  up  in  curled  lumps,  or  stretched  their  bodies 
on  the  ground — their  combined  snoring  filling  the 
night  with  a  weird  and  uncanny  sound. 

But  when  midnight  came,  a  series  of  trumpet 
blasts  rang  across  the  isthmus;  and,  with  one  ac- 
cord, thousands  of  dash  jubros  gave  vent  to  sud- 
den shrieks,  as  they  dashed  onward  and  into  the 
ranks  of  the  newly  awakened  and  much  befuddled 
foe.  Through  their  ranks,  and  back  again,  the 
iron  monsters  whirred,  mowing  them  down  in  hun- 
dreds with  each  sweep.  Bewildered,  the  beasts 
rushed  about,  many  aimlessly,  only  to  be  stricken 
with  the  envenomed  darts  or  else  to  rush  into  the 
very  path  of  some  advancing  jubro  and  be  laid 
low.  .  .  But  the  fight  was  not  all  one-sided,  for 
there  were  not  a  few  of  the  beasts  whose  pres- 
ence of  mind  prompted  them  to  hurl  large  stones 
against  the  jubro  sides,  denting  and  often  tearing 
apart  strips  of  plate  through  which  later  missiles 
found  entrance  and  wrought  sore  havoc.  Now 
and  then  some  wily  fiend  would  dart  from  behind 
a  jubro  and  leap  upon  it,  with  his  massive  club 
battering  in  its  roof,  and  then  engaging  in  a 
deadly  conflict  with  its  inmates. 

Swift  of  foot  as  were  the  beasts,  there  was  no 
escape  from  the  swifter  iron  monsters  that  kept 
on  decimating  their  ranks. 

One  gigantic  superape  had  succeeded  in  mount- 


'Loab  was  the  first  to  get  out;  but  only  to  be  confronted 
by  the  giant  beast,  with  its  huge  club  upraised  to  dash 
out  his  brains." 


ON  ATLO'S  FIGHTING  FRONT  121 

ing  the  jubro  in  which  Loab  Ben  Phara  was  serv- 
ing; and  battering  in  the  top  at  its  very  forefront, 
it  struck  the  driver  dead  with  its  first  blow,  and 
then  effected  an  entrance,  club  in  hand,  ready  to 
break  more  heads.  But  in  the  midst  of  this  con- 
fusion, while  the  Atlons  were  pressing  to  the  rear 
to  get  out  of  its  long  reach,  the  driverless  vehicle 
dashed  into  a  huge  rock  by  the  wayside,  and  was 
upset. 

Most  of  the  inmates  were  disabled  by  the  shock 
of  the  collision;  but  the  beast  extricated  itself, 
without  having  let  go  of  its  terrible  weapon.  Of 
the  rest,  Loab  was  the  first  to  get  out;  but  only 
to  be  confronted  by  the  giant  beast,  with  its  huge 
club  upraised  to  dash  out  his  brains. 

But  not  In  vain  had  Loab  received  instructions 
In  swordsmanship  from  the  greatest  master  In 
Athens.  With  lightning  speed,  he  sprang  from 
under  the  sweep  of  the  mighty  bludgeon.  Coping 
with  a  beast  so  colossal,  he  well  knew  flight  was 
vain.  It  was  a  struggle  in  which  he  had  either  to 
slay  or  be  slain.  His  sword  was  fortunately  still 
In  Its  scabbard;  and  drawing  it  forth,  he  held  it 
upraised  and  stood  motionless  as  a  statue,  keenly 
watching  his  dire  antagonist,  and  ready  to  adapt 
his  action  to  whatever  threatened.  With  a  mad 
roar  the  goro  goro  made  another  onrush;  but  this 
time,  not  only  was  the  bludgeon  evaded,  but  with 


122  DOOMED 

a  lightning  forward  rush,  the  Atlon  had  his  enemy 
disemboweled;  and  before  the  beast  could  recover 
self-possession,  gave  it  another  thrust,  and  left  it 
in  its  death  agonies. 

The  struggle  had  been  a  terrible  strain  upon 
the  nerves  of  Loab  Ben  Phra;  and  now  that  the 
immediate  danger  was  over,  he  was  ready  to  col- 
lapse. For  a  moment  he  stood  with  every  muscle 
quivering,  and  his  mind  in  a  daze.  He  gazed  con- 
fusedly upon  the  field,  and  then  suddenly  recalled 
the  disaster  that  had  befallen  his  jubro.  There  it 
still  lay,  but  not  a  soul  was  within,  or  In  sight. 
The  field  of  conflict  had  shifted  a  long  way  to  the 
right,  where  a  tightening  cordon  was  holding  con- 
fined the  remaining  brutes,  pending  their  gradual 
annihilation. 

Hastening  to  rejoin  his  comrades  In  the  jubro 
cordon,  he  had  just  managed  to  draw  a  driver's 
attention,  when  towering  over  him  he  suddenly 
faced  the  tiger  eyes  of  another  of  the  gigantic 
beasts.  He  had  not  a  moment  to  lose;  and  quick 
as  a  flash,  he  threw  himself  down  at  the  very  feet 
of  the  monster,  and  serpent-like  wriggled  through 
the  grass.  Then,  rising  suddenly,  before  the  brute 
had  time  to  sense  his  whereabouts,  he  plunged  his 
sharp  blade  deep  Into  the  side  of  the  great  super- 
ape.  .  .  There    was   no    time    to    extricate    the 


ON  ATLO'S  FIGHTING  FRONT  123 

weapon;  so  he  left  it  there,  while  dashing  swiftly 
beyond  reach  of  the  dying  beast. 

In  another  moment,  the  jubro  he  had  signalled 
was  at  his  side.  The  battle  with  the  brutes  was 
practically  over  by  this  time,  very  few  of  the  super- 
apes  being  left  within  the  cordon  for  final  ex- 
termination. The  men  within  now  stepped  out, 
and  all  stopped  to  inspect  the  dead  monster  who 
lay  stretched  out,  a  great  ferocity  still  marking 
his  features.  Loab  now  recovered  his  sword,  and 
received  the  highest  encomiums  for  the  prowess  he 
had  displayed. 

He  now  learned  that  while  he  was  battling  with 
the  first  goro  goro,  two  jubros  had  arrived  to  res- 
cue the  men  pinned  down  in  the  overturned  vehi- 
cle, several  of  whom  had  been  quite  seriously 
maimed. 

With  the  goro  goros  on  this  front  annihilated, 
King  Mozo  was  now  free  to  concentrate  his  forces 
and  his  mind  upon  the  larger  hordes  that  had  suc- 
ceeded in  effecting  an  entrance  into  Atlo.  Fore- 
seeing a  protracted  war  before  him,  he  now  re- 
solved on  making  ample  preparation.  The  cordon 
across  Long  Neck  was  to  be  lengthened  as  fast  as 
the  construction  of  more  war  jubros  permitted; 
and  it  was  to  keep  on  stretching  and  strengthening 


124  DOOMED 

its  line,  ever  moving  eastward  and  confining  the 
foe  within  smaller  territory,  while  recovering 
control  of  a  wider  and  wider  area  In  the  west  for 
cultivation  of  the  soil  and  insuring  the  future  food 
supply  of  the  nation. 


CHAPTER  III 

Under  Siege  In  Their  Oros 

Great  was  the  consternation  felt  throughout  all 
Atlo  when  news  of  the  interior  invasion  came 
ringing  by  bell-signal  alphabet  from  station  to  sta- 
tion to  every  corner  of  the  land.  In  the  home  of 
my  parents,  knowing  I  was  at  the  time  in  the  very 
heart  of  the  infested  region,  it  was  doubly  alarm- 
ing. 

To  Nungo  they  therefore  at  once  dispatched, 
enquiring  as  to  my  safety.  But  owing  to  the  great 
number  of  similar  calls  upon  Nungo,  it  was  several 
days  before  word  came  to  them;  and  that  not 
very  assuring,  at  best.  Nothing  had  been  seen  of 
me  since  the  day  of  my  arrival  at  Flying  Arrow 
oro;  but  it  was  thought  I  had  left  it  to  pay  a  short 
visit  to  a  friend  there,  in  another  oro,  with  which 
they  were  as  yet  unable  to  communicate.  So  the 
suspense  and  anxiety  of  my  parents  were  only  pro- 
longed. 

A  whole  week  had  passed,  and  no  definite  in- 
formation had  been  forthcoming.  To  all  appear- 
ances, I  had  mysteriously  disappeared,   and  not 

125 


126  DOOMED 

the  slightest  trace  of  me  had  been  discovered — ' 
not  as  much  as  a  shred  of  my  garments,  or  even 
a  button. 

Had  I  become  a  victim  of  the  beasts,  some  trace 
of  my  garments  would  surely  have  been  left;  but 
in  the  confused  state  of  affairs  it  was  not  to  be 
inferred  that  failure  to  find  such  traces  implied 
escape  from  such  a  fate.  True,  a  mystery  hung 
around  my  disappearance;  but  it  was  not  enough 
to  assure  my  parents  who,  in  their  heart  of  hearts, 
were  already  mourning  me  as  one  who  would 
nevermore  return. 

In  the  meantime,  the  news  reported  in  every 
Atlon  oro  reelced  with  tales  of  atrocities  too  hor- 
rible to  depict;  and  dark  terror  lurked  behind  the 
resolute  attitude  taken  by  its  people.  The  making 
of  strong  steel  bars  for  doors  and  windows  was 
pushed  to  the  extreme  in  every  separate  iron 
works,  and  the  supply  was  daily  being  forwarded 
in  armored  jubros  to  the  oros — especially  those  of 
the  region  surrounding  Nungo. 

Taken  completely  by  surprise,  the  town  of 
Nungo — unprepared — became  the  first  center  of 
assault  by  the  ferocious  brutes.  Here  the  flying 
missiles,  mainly  rocks  and  bricks,  battered  their 
way  through  many  a  door  and  window,  permitting 
the  monsters  to  force  an  entrance  and  engage  the 


UNDER  SIEGE  IN  THEIR  ORGS  127 

inmates  in  deadly  conflict.  The  inmates  were  not 
equipped  with  blowguns  and  poison  darts,  and  had 
to  rely  on  the  use  of  spears  and  swords,  which,  in 
close  conflict,  were  of  small  avail — the  beasts  snap- 
ping spears  into  splinters  and  swords  into  broken 
fragments.  But  neither  could  the  beasts  in  the 
crowded  rooms  use  their  clubs  effectually.  What 
told  most  against  them  were  crackshot  bow- 
men, who,  at  close  range,  pierced  many  a  super- 
ape  heart  with  their  long  arrows. 

Among  the  first  steps  taken,  when  the  missiles 
hurled  against  the  oros  began  to  clatter  against 
doors  and  shatter  windows,  was  the  hurrying  of 
all  women  and  children  down  into  the  lowest  sub- 
basements,  whose  approach  was  kept  safely  barred 
against  intrusion.  Safely  ensconced  in  these  re- 
treats, many  of  the  women  seized  spades  and  be- 
gan to  dig  tunnels,  designed  to  penetrate  from  oro 
to  oro  as  a  means  for  uniting  the  forces  and  re- 
sources of  the  town. 

There  had  been  hardly  an  oro  into  which  more 
or  less  of  the  beasts  had  not  effected  an  entrance, 
and  in  which  numbers  of  human  lives  had  not  been 
lost  in  the  fierce  combats  that  ensued.  .  .  .  For- 
tunately, upon  the  third  day  of  the  siege,  a  train  of 
armored  jubros  arrived  laden  with  a  supply  of 
blow  guns  and  shafts,  and  the  poison  paste  in 
which  to  tip  them.     With  this  additional  equip- 


128  DOOMED 

merit.  It  was  not  long  before  they  had  the  super- 
apes  within  the  oros  slain,  and  were  able  to  repel 
further  Intrusion. 

But  Nungo  was  far  from  the  only  town  to 
suffer  by  the  ravages  of  the  Infuriated  monsters. 
Hundreds  of  other  towns,  and  countless  isolated 
oros,  occupied  by  co-operative  husbandmen,  suf- 
fered similar  losses.  In  a  few  oros  not  a  male 
Atlon  survived,  and  the  victims  had  been  raven- 
ously devoured. 

As  the  fighting  progressed  in  the  towns  and 
cities,  and  the  Atlons  began  to  gain  a  better  con- 
trol of  the  defence,  the  beasts  were  daily  suffer- 
ing greater  hunger;  and  after  having  devoured 
such  domestic  animals  as  came  within  their  reach, 
and  consumed  what  vegetation  offered  the  small- 
est particle  of  nourishment,  even  to  chewing  up 
the  leaves  and  bark  of  plants  and  trees,  they 
finally  began  to  scatter  into  the  rural  regions  for 
subsistence.  There  they  would  relieve  their  des- 
perate hunger;  but  only  soon  again  to  return. 
Thus  while  never  entirely  deserting  the  towns, 
they  were  never  again  there  In  full  force. 

In  many  towns,  the  rancor  felt  against  the 
superapes  was  bitter,  and  plans  for  destroying  the 
foe  with  flames  of  Atlene  were  freely  discussed, 
but    were    promptly    discountenanced    by    King 


UNDER  SIEGE  IN  THEIR  ORGS  129 

Mozo,  upon  learning  of  them.  The  beasts,  he 
assured  them,  could  be  annihilated  without  re- 
course to  this  barbarous  mode  of  warfare.  To 
resort  to  it  would  be  to  needlessly  brutalize  them- 
selves. And  besides,  it  would  be  accompanied 
with  dangers  of  conflagration,  and  the  still  greater 
danger  of  teaching  the  cunning  beasts  the  use  of 
fire,  to  the  undoing  of  Atlo. 

All  this  while  King  Mozo  was  steadily  adding 
to  the  length  of  the  cordon  separating  east  from 
west — reducing  the  area  of  territory  under  siege, 
and  enlarging  that  subject  to  cultivation.  When- 
ever he  learned  of  the  beasts  being  concentrated 
anywhere  In  menacing  numbers,  he  would  expedite 
a  train  of  jubros  to  decimate  and  scatter  them, 
thus  relieving  the  extreme  tension  suffered  by  the 
residents  of  the  locality. 

As  an  auxiliary  movement.  King  Mozo  also 
ordered  the  tunneling  of  paths  from  oro  to  oro, 
and  also  to  the  factories.  In  every  town  and  city, 
uniting  all  the  productive  resources  and  all  the 
supplies  so  that  they  could  readily  at  any  time  be 
transferred  where  safest  or  most  needed.  .  .  . 
With  the  avenues  and  streets  Impassable  for  the 
Atlons,  they.  In  this  manner,  were  to  do  all  the 
transporting  and  Intercommunication  by  tunnel, 
and  thus  to  prevent  Industry  from  coming  to  a 


I30  DOOMED 

complete  standstill.  Through  this  foresight,  life 
in  Atlo  gradually  began  again  to  assume  a  sem- 
blance of  its  former  state — its  industrial  and  so- 
cial activities  in  progress  in  spite  of  the  siege. 
Only  the  rural  oros  still  remained  isolated. 

The  beasts  were  still  too  preponderant  in  num- 
bers for  daring  an  aggressive  campaign  against 
them.  Years  would  have  to  elapse  before  they 
could  be  sufficiently  decimated,  or  reduced  by 
hunger,  to  undertake  a  final  dash  to  complete  their 
annihilation. 

Long  already  had  the  people  of  Atlo  become 
accustomed  to  the  thunderous  howling  of  the 
beasts,  who  seemed  to  exult  in  the  dread  noises 
their  combined  uproar  produced.  All  day  long 
and  far  into  the  night  went  up  the  interminable 
repetition  of  their  dread  cries  of  "goro  goro," 
from  which  that  name  had  been  given  them,  but 
to  which  Atlons  had  become  accustomed.  Silence 
would,  in  fact,  have  sounded  stranger  now  to  At- 
lon  ears,  than  did  all  their  ear-splitting  hubbub. 

During  all  these  stirring  times,  my  betrothed 
had  been  unable  to  ascertain  more  concerning  my 
fate  than  contained  in  the  columns  of  the  news 
sheets  passing  from  hand  to  hand — information 
positive  enough  as  to  my  total  disappearance,  but 
lacking  in  any  definite  facts.  The  transmission  of 
messages  was  at  the  time  difficult,  and  communica- 


UNDER  SIEGE  IN  THEIR  OROS  131 

tion  both  irregular  and  unreliable.  Only  a  single 
note  reached  him  from  my  parents,  and  that  left 
him  as  much  in  the  dark  as  before.  Some  hope, 
however,  lingered  in  his  breast — the  vague 
thought  that  I  might  be  ill,  in  some  isolated  oro, 
unable  to  effect  any  communication  with  the  au- 
thorities. 

Despair  might  perhaps  have  oppressed  him,  but 
for  the  manifold  duties  that  kept  his  mind  ab- 
sorbed, and  thus  lightened  his  burden. 


CHAPTER  IV 

Made  Queen  of  Omshola 

True  to  Kosoki  Samba's  promise,  a  party  of 
Omsholans  in  due  time  arrived  from  the  city  to 
bear  me  in  a  closed  carriage,  screened  from  the 
eyes  of  curious  spectators,  within  the  precincts  of 
the  royal  palace. 

Ensconced  within  its  spacious  chambers,  skill- 
ful attendants  at  once  took  me  in  charge  to  make 
that  outward  transformation  by  which  I  was  to 
look,  as  well  as  be  a  queen.  After  being  bathed 
in  scented  waters  and  rubbed  down  with  perfumed 
ointments,  I  was  handled  like  a  precious  doll,  upon 
which  one  garb  after  the  next  was  placed,  and 
each  carefully  regarded  before  final  acceptance. 
.  .  .  When  I  finally  came  out  of  their  hands,  I 
declare  I  was  so  elaborately  decked  out,  I  could 
scarcely  recognize  myself.  I  was  in  fact  almost 
completely  lost  in  the  blaze  of  jewels  and  decora- 
tions with  which  I  was  covered.  What  more, 
with  fine  laces,  stiff  rufHes  and  rustling  silks,  it  be- 
came a  question  In  my  mind  whether  I  would  ever 
be  able  to  act  up  the  part  these  garments  and 
fittings  made  of  me. 

132 


MADE  QUEEN  OF  OMSHOLA  133 

With  one  attendant  bearing  my  long  train,  an- 
other holding  over  my  head  a  bejewelled  parasol, 
and  still  another  at  my  side  with  a  huge  whizzing 
fan  of  many  colors,  I  could  not  march  across  the 
room  but  as  the  central  figure  in  a  parade.  I 
must  have  been  a  spectacle  for  the  gods. 

I  had  barely  time  to  have  a  good  rest,  before 
Kosoki  Samba  appeared,  accompanied  with  the 
regent  Kone  Sobrati,  whom  he  officially  presented, 
and  who  thereupon  offered  his  arm  to  lean  upon 
while  being  taken  by  him  to  the  great  throne 
room  where  the  chief  nobles  of  the  land  were  al- 
ready assembled,  awaiting  me. 

Borne  upon  his  arm,  and  followed  by  a  bevy 
of  attendants,  we  now  marched  in  stately  pomp 
into  the  assembly  room,  in  which  were  already 
gathered  a  vast  concourse  of  nobles,  all  bejewelled, 
befrilled  and  befeathered  in  their  finest. 

Upon  my  entrance,  all  bowed  to  the  marble 
floor,  beating  their  faces  against  it,  in  token  of 
their  submission  to  the  person  destined  to  occupy 
the  throne. 

The  regent  now  led  me  to  the  throne,  and, 
with  a  significant  gesture,  bade  me  be  seated; 
which  I  did,  holding  my  head  erect,  while  two 
Kones  brought  the  dazzling  crown  and  placed  it 
upon  my  brow,  and  a  third  Kone  placed  in  my 


134  DOOMED 

hand  the  royal  scepter — all  raising  the  cry,  "Hail, 
hail  the  Queen!" 

Equipped  with  these  tokens  of  royalty,  and  thus 
announced,  the  nobles  rose  to  their  feet,  shout- 
ing in  unison  "Melka  Ungri;  Erugo  Turn,"  mean- 
ing "Rule  the  Queen;  Her  Word  is  Law."  This 
cry  they  thrice  repeated  with  a  hearty  vigor;  sig- 
nifying their  acquiescence  to  my  future  mandates, 
be  they  what  they  would. 

I  was  from  this  hour  their  absolute  monarch; 
and  all  these  sub-rulers  were  my  subject  vassals. 

Before  dismissing  them,  I  made  a  brief  address, 
in  which  I  thanked  them  cordially  Tor  the  high 
trust  placed  in  me,  in  conferring  upon  me  the 
Crown  of  Omshola.  "You  have  acknowledged 
my  word  to  be  the  law  of  the  land;  and  so  let  it 
be;  for  I  shall  look  for  the  light  governing  it,  in 
the  fountains  of  truth  and  justice.  In  the  use  of 
my  authority  and  power,  I  shall  endeavor  to  keep 
in  mind  the  obligations  attending  all  authority 
and  all  power." 

I  was  now  mistress  of  a  vast  empire,  endowed 
with  powers  unlimited;  and  as  I  retired  into  my 
private  quarters,  I  seemed  to  feel  the  weight  of 
a  mighty  responsibility  resting  upon  me.  Yet 
was  I  also  buoyed  up  with  the  realization  that 
there  was  honor  in  the  burden;  and  I  felt  a  new 


MADE  QUEEN  OF  OMSHOLA  13S 

joy  in  the  thought  of  the  mighty  influence  I  might 
wield  for  the  advancement  of  the  people  of  this 
land. 

For  a  few  weeks  I  allowed  Kosoki  Samba,  in 
whom  I  felt  the  utmost  confidence,  and  who  to 
the  very  end  was  ever  faithful  to  the  trust  I 
placed  in  him,  to  represent  me  in  conducting  the 
affairs  of  the  realrn.  In  the  meantime,  I  busied 
myself  with  learning  as  much  as  possible  con- 
cerning Omshola  and  its  people. 

Among  the  large  body  of  entertainers  with 
whom  my  court  was  then  filled,  was  one  who 
aroused  my  interest — a  dwarf  minstrel,  Borok, 
whose  weird  tales,  comical  manners  and  ready 
wit  were  astonishing.  He  could  sing  and  also 
play  the  harp  with  admirable  skill,  so  that  we 
often  joined  in  the  singing  of  duets. 

But  what  I  most  prized  in  the  fellow  was  a 
sort  of  genius  of  insight  be  seemed  to  possess, 
by  which  he  could  judge  Omsholan  affairs  so  well, 
one  would  have  thought  he  had  a  perfect  knowl- 
edge of  Atlism. 

From  this  dwarf,  I  soon  learned  how  Omshola 
was  governed.  While  a  monarchy,  it  was  to  no 
small  extent  under  the  sway  of  a  hierarchical 
priesthood,  the  Kones,  and  also  a  hereditary  aris- 
tocracy, the  Koms — both  Koms  and  Kones,  and 
their  offspring,  being  known  as  the  Komyim. 


136  DOOMED 

The  Komylm  were  all  either  Koms,  first  sons  of 
Koms;  or  else,  if  not  Kones,  occupying  posts  of 
honor  within  the  gift  of  the  Crown.  They  were 
either  Kosokis,  who  are  Crown  Counselors,  or 
else  Kosokoms,  who  are  Warrior  Chiefs.  They 
were  all  members  of  the  nobles  or  Komyim. 

About  half  of  the  land  in  the  realm  was  in  the 
hands  of  the  Koms,  and  was  worked  by  slaves. 
Of  the  remainder,  the  Crown  held  a  half,  also 
worked  by  slaves;  and  the  income  derived  from 
them  was  what  supported  the  Crown.  It  drew  no 
revenue  from  either  the  Koms  or  the  Kones.  .  .  . 
The  remaining  quarter  of  the  lands  was  held  by 
the  Kones  and  was  worked  by  what  were  desig- 
nated as  free  slaves — renters  of  the  lands,  the 
buildings  on  them  and  all  the  varied  equipments, 
for  the  use  of  which  the  Kones  exacted  from  them 
such  rents  as  kept  them  in  as  hard  a  grind  as  any 
of  the  slaves. 

While  the  Koms  lived  as  droning  dandies,  the 
Kones  devoted  themselves  to  the  spiritual  welfare 
of  both  nobles  and  slaves.  They  were  known  as 
Lords  of  the  Spirit  World;  the  Koms  as  Lords 
of  the  Earth.  The  Spirit  World  was  the  realm 
lying  above  the  crystal  roof  of  Omshola,  the  mys- 
terious region  whence  were  heard  the  thunders  of 
the  Spirit  Lord  and  were  seen  his  forked  anger 
flashing  against  Omshola's  brilliant  roof — anger 


MADE  QUEEN  OF  OMSHOLA  137 

that  often  had  melted  great  holes  and  rents  In 
the  crystal  barrier  between  the  two  worlds. 

To  the  benighted  people  of  this  realm,  Includ- 
ing^ the  Kones,  the  Spirits  were  held  In  super- 
stitious dread;  and  hence  the  awe  and  fear  with 
which  they  viewed  their  rulers,  who  had  come  to 
them  from  the  Spirit  World. 

In  each  city  and  town  were  also  many  free 
slaves  who  labored  as  artisans  In  shops  and  small 
factories  belonging  to  the  Kones,  and  who  had 
high  rents  to  pay  for  their  use— that  of  the  shops, 
the  land  they  stood  on  and  the  equipments  they 
contained.  With  all  their  freedom,  they  fared 
little,  If  any,  better  than  other  artisan  slaves. 

In  the  heart  of  each  settlement  was  a  district 
surrounded  with  high  walls,  joining  a  series  of 
temples  devoted  to  the  worship  of  Spirits   and 
presided  over  by  Kones.     These   sections  were 
known  as  komyimsas;  and  within  them  resided 
only  members  of  the  Komylm.    Most  of  the  Koms 
resided  In  komyimsas,  rarely  remaining  on  their 
Kom  lands,   which   they  trusted   entirely  in   the 
hands  of  their  respective  stewards,  satisfied  with 
receiving  regularly  from  them  a  customary  stipend 
representing  the  net  produce  of  their  lands.   They 
were  all  proud  dandles,  as  vain  as  peacocks,  and 
despismg  all  worldly  cares  apart  from  those  In- 
yolved  In  the  sports  they  indulged  in. 


138  DOOMED 

In  each  settlement  there  was  also  a  market 
house,  to  which  plantation  stewards  and  town 
artisans  brought  their  surplus  productions  for  ex- 
change, each  aiming  to  obtain  for  his  surplus  a 
supply  of  articles  more  suitable  to  his  needs.  .  .  . 
While  no  money  was  yet  in  use,  they  carried 
about  them  a  store  of  kibos,  buttons  of  gold 
strung  upon  cords  from  which  they  could  readily 
be  removed  for  transfer. 

The  kibos  were  used  as  a  convenience  in  mak- 
ing good  discrepancies  in  what  were  otherwise  un- 
equal exchanges — being  thus  a  sort  of  equalizing 
medium.  Apart  from  the  labor  involved  in  their 
making,  they  had  not  a  particle  of  value,  since 
the  sands  of  Omshola  were  shiny  with  granules  of 
gold  and  the  very  earth  In  this  land  was  literally 
ribbed  with  solid  masses  of  the  ore.  The  more 
valuable  kibos  had  engravings  on  their  faces, 
some  of  which  were  miniature  portraits. 

From  my  first  glimpse  of  this  strange  land,  I 
obtained  but  a  faint  impression,  my  mind  being 
absorbed  in  the  clamorous  attentions  given  me  by 
the  vast  throng  of  my  people,  for  the  first  time 
beholding  my  person  in  my  inaugural  procession. 
The  assembled  multitude  kept  the  air  filled  with 
their  joyful  greetings,  and  the  shrill  music  of 
cymbals  and  strange  instruments  I  had  never  be- 


MADE  QUEEN  OF  OMSHOLA  139 

fore  listened  to.  It  was,  of  course,  a  pompous 
parade,  in  which  I  figured  as  a  deity — a  superior 
being,  condescending  to  serve  as  their  ruler.  I 
could  at  times  hardly  suppress  my  disposition  to 
laugh  outright  at  their  manner  of  adoration,  and 
the  frequency  in  which  they  threw  themselves 
down  on  their  faces  and  beat  the  earth  with  their 
brows. 

But  from  later  tours  through  the  city  and  Its 
surroundings — made  incognito,  though  attended 
with  a  guard  of  officials  kept  in  disguise — I  was 
astonished  at  the  quaint  splendor  of  this  world, 
stranger  even  than  Atlo  must  have  seemed  to  my 
betrothed.  Here  was  an  underground  world, 
whose  roof  was  one  vast  sheet  of  crystal,  in  many 
colors  and  hues,  through  which  the  sunlight  from 
the  upper  realm  came  down  mellowed  or  radiant, 
according  to  the  thickness  of  the  portion  of  the 
roof  it  penetrated. 

Thus  over  the  heads  of  these  people  was  ever 
spread  a  vast  canopy  of  jasper  and  emerald  and 
ruby,  of  sapphire  and  of  topaz,  while  its  vege- 
tation and  foliage  were  as  if  their  original  bril- 
liance had  faded. 

In  my  eyes  the  whole  land  seemed  immersed 
in  a  dreamy  twilight — a  weird  world  whose  pal- 
aces and  temples  were  walls  of  cemented  gems, 
each  single  one  of  which  might  have  bought  an 


I40  DOOMED 

empire  In  the  world  beyond  the  shores  of  Atlantis. 
Even  the  mud  hovels  of  the  slaves  and  the  poor 
freedmen,  sparkled  with  the  glimmer  of  gold  with 
which  the  mud  was  filled.  From  crevices  closed 
by  transparent  gems,  they  drew  light,  and  from 
golden  bowls  they  drank. 

At  its  north  and  south,  the  land  extended  to  the 
open  sea  of  Atlantica,  allowing  breezes  to  freshen 
the  atmosphere  of  the  land;  and  their  service  was 
the  more  effectual  for  the  numerous  gaps  in  the 
roof  of  the  land,  and  the  porous  rock  at  its  east- 
ern and  western  extremes. 

At  its  southern  extremity,  Omshola  was  cut  off 
from  the  sea  by  a  vast  desert  occupied  by  the  Fol- 
fins,  whose  savage  tribes  barred  access  to  it;  and 
on  the  northern  extremity  it  stood  more  than  a 
hundred  cubits  above  the  sea  level,  from  which 
staggering  height  it  was  effectually  separated  from 
the  outer  world. 

So  here  Omshola  lay,  a  vast  hollowed  tortoise 
shell,  crossing  the  continent  of  Atlantis,  with  open 
ends — a  land  of  gold  and  gems,  of  small  value 
here,  but  the  like  of  which  the  outer  world  did 
not  so  much  as  dream. 

I  asked  Borok  what  he  knew  of  the  condition 
and  fare  of  the  slaves.  Impressing  him  with  the 
fact  that  I  wished  nothing  glossed  over  to  please 
me.    The  naked  truth  was  what  I  desired  of  him. 


MADE  QUEEN  OF  OMSHOLA  141 

"There  are  large  numbers  of  them,"  he 
thoughtfully  replied,  "who  are  perfectly  contented 
with  their  lot,  who  lack  imagination  or  spirit. 
These  would  jog  on  all  their  lives  on  the  pittance 
to  which  they  have  been  accustomed,  and  content 
to  accept  their  lot  in  the  face  of  the  luxurious  ease 
indulged  in  by  their  masters,  of  which  they  for- 
tunately see  very  little,  since  their  masters  spend 
most  of  their  time  in  their  komyimsas  or  else  in 
the  Royal  Palace.  ...  But  to  the  few  imbued 
with  spirit  and  intelligence,  their  lives  are  a  har- 
rowing torture.  If  they  could  be  detached  in  some 
way  from  the  rest  and  given  a  chance4o  buy  their 
freedom,  they  would  toil  with  redoubled  zeal  to 
accomplish  their  redemption." 

The  difficulty,  in  this  manner,  to  open  for  them 
a  way  to  liberty  I  could  see  lay  in  distinguish- 
ing them  from  the  rest;  since,  as  soon  as  such  a 
plan  was  inaugurated,  there  would  be  few  left  who 
would  not  wish  to  embrace  the  opportunity.  It 
might  as  well  be  all  as  only  a  trifling  few;  only 
that  to  free  them  all  would  not  win  the  consent  of 
their  masters.  They  might  possibly  even  object 
to  giving  the  opportunity  to  a  few.  Upon  the 
Crown  lands,  something  might  possibly  be  done 
for  its  slaves;  but  just  what,  I  was  not  at  the  time 
prepared  to  say. 

From  Magya,  the  court  historian,  a  shriveled 


142  DOOMED 

gray  beard,  with  bent  figure  and  pointed,  dark 
features,  I  learned  thai  the  Omsholans  had  long 
ceased  to  be  a  warlike  people,  and  that  for  cen- 
turies their  accessions  of  slaves  had  been  made  by 
the  surrender  of  Folfins  in  time  of  dearth — whole 
families  of  them  in  this  manner  evading  starva- 
tion by  freely  entering  into  bondage.  The  first 
slaves  had,  of  course,  been  the  fruit  of  conquest. 

In  their  temples,  the  Kones  presided,  often  ad- 
dressing the  worshippers  assembled  from  elevated 
posts  stationed  for  this  purpose.  But  what  was 
most  impressive,  were  the  mammoth  figures  carved 
in  stone,  whose  lips  mov^ed  and  whose  eyes  flashed, 
when  admonishing  evil  doers.  They  were  all 
deified  Kones,  of  previous  generations.  That  the 
voices  heard  were  merely  the  ventriloquism  of 
Kones  cunningly  concealed  did  not  affect  the  simple 
faith  of  the  Kones,  who  believed  themselves  quali- 
fied representatives  of  the  spirits  in  the  realm 
above  and  dictators  of  the  standards  by  which  men 
were  to  conduct  themselves.  But  alas,  how  often 
they  humanly  mistook  thoughts  prompted  by  their 
individual  interests  for  the  voice  of  the  spirits.  In 
other  worlds,  men  allowed  the  same  trick  to  delude 
them  in  their  interpretations  of  standards  of  hu- 
man conduct — a  grievous  error,  to  which  both 
priest  and  layman  were  equally  liable.  .  .  Often 
they  decreed,  in  some  way,  the  infallibllty  of  their 


MADE  QUEEN  OF  OMSHOLA  143 

standards;  but  this  was  only  done  In  cases  where 
the  standards  could  not  abide  criticism  and  stand, 
as  it  were,  on  their  own  legs. 

One  of  these  infallibility  decrees  had  it  that  a 
Melk  or  King  could  do  no  wrong.  Possessed  of 
absolute  power,  how  could  he  commit  a  wrong? 
It  was  a  handy  decree;  for  by  virtue  of  it,  the 
Komyims  also  were  incapable  of  doing  any  wrong 
to  those  beneath  them.  Oh,  the  world  was  to 
these  children  a  sweet  pudding,  that  made  itself 
for  them  and  never  grew  smaller.  What  a  fairy 
tale  was  their  life!  And  well  for  them  also  was 
their  childlike  innocence,  incapable  of  realizing 
what  suffering  was  endured  to  keep  up  the  glamor 
of  their  world. 

From  Borok  I  also  learned  that  the  moral 
standards  imposed  by  the  Kones  related  only  to 
conduct  within  each  class.  It  was  all  meaningless 
from  a  member  of  one  class  to  one  of  another 
class.  So  it  was  made  easy  for  Komyim  to  be 
affable  and  polite  to  one  another;  to  dress  well 
for  each  other's  sake;  to  garb  their  very  thoughts 
also  in  fine  dress,  and  their  manners  as  well;  dis- 
playing in  all  these  matters  a  superior  culture. 
They  piqued  themselves  on  this  superiority,  and 
always  managed  to  use  special  words  and  gar- 
ments and  ways  requiring  means  and  leisure, 
thereby  placing  them  out  of  the  reach  of  the  "vul- 


144  DOOMED 

gar."  They  also  did  this  in  learning,  where  the 
most  absurd  titles  and  dignities  were  distributed, 
so  as  to  give  value  to  all  they  said,  and  to  dispar- 
age what  came  from  the  "vulgar"  many. 

Yet  with  all  the  pomp  of  their  artificial  digni- 
ties and  distinctions,  the  bulk  of  wisdom  had  to 
come  from  the  "vulgar"  masses,  and  also  the 
truest  character — though  by  the  deft  manipula- 
tions of  the  idle  lords  much  of  the  credit  was 
diverted  from  those  to  whom  It  was  due,  and  ab- 
sorbed by  the  rulers.  For  did  not  the  world  be- 
long to  them;  and  even  what  emanated  from  the 
poor  man's  brain,  did  not  that  also  belong  to 
them?  They  stole  naught,  and  could  not  steal; 
since  all  belonged  to  them.  That,  in  promulgat- 
ing such  a  doctrine,  they  made  themselves  thieves, 
they  saw  not. 


CHAPTER  y 

The  Dawn  of  Liberty 

Months  had  already  passed  since  my  entrance 
into  this  new  world,  with  which  I  was  gradually 
familiarizing  myself.  Already  was  my  past  as  if 
hidden  in  a  mist — a  vague  image  that  was  fading 
more  and  more.  It  is  true  that  in  idle  moments, 
of  which  I  had  but  few,  my  mind  would  often 
dwell  on  my  sudden  parting  from  all  who  were 
dear  to  me ;  but  since  all  speculation  in  that  direc- 
tion was  vain,  I  resolved  to  forget,  and  throw  all 
my  energies  into  the  needs  of  Omshola. 

My  palace  was  a  vast  structure,  spread  over  a 
large  area,  and  holding,  besides  my  private  quar- 
ters and  the  great  throne  room  or  audience  cham- 
ber, a  large  number  of  halls  and  chambers  in 
which  open  house  was  at  all  hours  kept  for  visiting 
members  of  the  Komyim ;  there  were  also  the  quar- 
ters occupied  by  the  harem  left  by  my  predecessor, 
with  its  numerous  women  and  children,  and  the 
slaves  attending  them.  Then  there  were  also  the 
quarters  occupied  by  the  corps  of  entertainers,  the 
jugglers,   dancers,   story  tellers,  minstrels,   acro- 

I4S 


146  DOOMED 

bats  and  mimics,  who  busied  themselves  entertain- 
ing either  the  Komyim  or  the  harem,  when  not 
wanted  to  amuse  me. 

You  may  imagine,  from  this,  what  a  costly  es- 
tablishment was  the  Royal  Palace — an  extrava- 
gance adding  no  little  to  the  burden  imposed  on 
the  Crown  land  slaves  for  its  maintenance.  De- 
siring to  reduce  this  wanton  extravagance,  I  con- 
sulted my  chamberlain,  to  learn  from  him  how 
odious  a  task  it  would  be.  It  was  impossible  to 
discard  these  useless  supernumeraries  without  oc- 
casioning much  bitterness  of  feeling  and  dangerous 
discontent. 

As  an  instance  of  the  light-headed  extravagance 
of  the  Komyim,  one  of  their  number,  one  day 
while  I  was  giving  an  audience,  fell  upon  his  knees 
and  prayed  for  a  hearing. 

Granting  his  plea,  I  learned  that  my  Crown 
Officers  were  about  to  seize  his  lands  for  a  delin- 
quent personal  debt. 

"How  come  you,"  I  asked,  "to  be  remiss?" 

"Through  a  crop  shortage.  Gracious  Melka," 
he  hesitatingly  replied. 

"A  crop  shortage,  true  enough,  my  good  fel- 
low;" I  retorted,  "but  a  mere  shortage  in  your 
crop  of  gambling  profits,  was  it  not?  Were  you 
not  yesterday  gaming  heavily  in  the  Palace?" 


THE  DAWN  OF  LIBERTY  147 

"The  Spirits  crossed  my  play,  Noble  Melka,  so 
that  I  lost — lost  the  very  kibos  left  by  my  steward 
for  payment  of  the  debt,  just  when  I  looked  to 
double  their  sum!" 

"So  you  gambled  with  your  creditor's  kibos, 
wretched  man,  and  you  lost  them.  You  played 
your  property  on  the  gambling  table,  and  now  you 
ask  that  you  may  retain  it,  after  its  loss — know- 
ing well  what  you  staked.    A  poor  gambler,  you !" 

Under  the  frown  of  my  disapproval,  the  poor 
fellow  began  to  grovel  at  my  feet,  weeping  and 
groaning. 

"Rise,  my  young  fellow,"  I  commanded,  "and 
cease  your  weeping.  The  law  claims  your  prop- 
erty; and  were  it  a  perfectly  just  law,  I  should  let 
it  take  its  course.  But  it  will  have  all  it  is  en- 
titled to,  if  the  debt  is  repaid  in  full  and  with  a, 
small  addition  to  cover  the  extra  delay  you  have 
occasioned.  See  you,  therefore,  that  within  one 
year,  the  creditor  is  satisfied;  and  meanwhile  con- 
sider yourself  banished  from  the  Palace  for  that 
year,  or  until  the  debt  is  paid." 

As  was  this  youth,  so  were  all  the  Komyim — 
mere  sucldings  on  the  social  breast. 

In  my  inmost  thoughts,  I  had  determined  that 
Omshola  should  some  day  be  released  from  the 
life-sapping  d-aft  of  these  sucklings.     I  would  lib- 


148  DOOMED 

erate  the  slaves  on  my  Crown  lands,  thereby  set- 
ting an  example  for  the  Komyim. 

At  a  gathering  of  Komyim,  invited  soon  after 
to  my  audience  chamber,  I  announced  to  them  a 
decree  liberating  all  the  Crown  land  slaves.  It 
was  a  startling  announcement;  and  I  therefore 
closely  scrutinized  the  faces  of  my  auditors,  to 
note  the  impression  made  on  their  minds  by  the 
announcement. 

"In  emancipating  my  slaves,"  I  informed  them, 
"I  stand  entirely  within  my  rights  to  do  with  my 
slaves  as  pleases  me,  even  as  you  all  do.  I  have 
decided  the  Crown  shall  no  longer  occupy  a  sec- 
ond place  in  liberality  to  Its  dependents.  What 
the  Kones  have  for  generations  done,  the  Crown 
shall  now  also  undertake;  for  It  is  my  Intention 
to  spur  my  newly  made  free  slaves  to  greater 
effort  and  productive  efficiency  than  they  have  ever 
hitherto  displayed.  If  they  prosper  more,  the 
Crown  will  not  suffer  by  It;  and  if  they  are  made 
the  happier  by  It,  so  much  the  happier  will  I  be." 

"As  a  great  branch  of  the  ruling  class,"  I  re- 
sumed, "it  would  please  me  to  listen  to  your  views, 
O  members  of  the  Komyim,  before  I  make  public 
the  decree.  On  the  morrow,  at  this  hour,  I  will 
therefore  look  for  your  presence,  and  listen  to 
what  you  have  to  say." 

From  the  time  of  their  dismissal,  this  decree  of 


THE  DAWN  OF  LIBERTY  149 

t.heir  Melka  became  their  constant  topic  of  dis- 
cussion. To  the  Koms  its  outcome  appeared  to  be 
problematical,  though  not  necessarily  detrimental. 
In  fact,  to  many  it  even  suggested  a  prospect  of 
larger  income.  For  if  this  freedom  should  stimu- 
late larger  production,  what  was  to  hinder  the 
Koms  from  also  liberating  their  slaves  and  then 
exacting  from  them  at  least  a  half  of  the  increased 
production?  This  would  place  them  in  the  atti- 
tude of  benefactors,  while  adding  to  the  revenues 
derived  from  their  slaves.  What  difference  would 
it  make,  whether  they  remained  chattel  or  free 
slaves  ?  If  it  put  more  butter  on  the  bread  of  the 
Koms,  why  care  if  it  did  the  same  on  the  bread 
of  the  slaves? 

But  the  Kones  looked  not  so  favorably  upon 
the  measure,  though  they  dared  not  state  the 
reason  wh.y.  They  well  realized  the  extent  of 
their  extortionate  exactions.  These  had,  in  fact, 
gone  far  toward  nullifying  the  incentives  to 
great&r  effort  on  the  part  of  their  slaves,  so  that 
their  free  slaves  fared  little  better,  if  any,  than 
the  chattel  slaves.  What  they  now  dreaded  was, 
lest  in  the  end  it  should  oblige  them  to  be  less 
exacting  in  their  terms  to  their  free  slaves. 

The  Kones  were  unable  to  offer  open  objec- 
tions to  the  proposal;  though,  between  themselves, 
they  bitterly  denounced  it.    They  were  too  shrewd 


I50  DOOMED 

as  politicians,  to  attempt  any  present  movenient, 
in  which  they  would  be  without  the  united  support 
of.the  Koms,  and  when  the  body  of  free  slaves  was 
about  to  be  doubled  and  inclined  to  the  support  of 
the  Crown.  So  their  whispers  were  confined  to 
hints  at  waiting  a  suitable  occasion  for  precipitat- 
ing a  revolution  by  which  to  return  to  the  ancient 
status  under  which  all  the  toilers  would  become 
chattel  slaves. 

When  the  Komylm  again  stood  before  the 
Melka,  it  was  to  announce  their  approval  of  the 
project,  and  to  assure  her  that  if  it  turned  out  as 
was  expected,  they  would  also  adopt  the  same 
course  toward  their  chattel  slaves,  and  let  them 
all  alike  enjoy  the  blessings  of  liberty. 

So  the  matter  ended;  and  the  next  day  I  made 
the  decree  public,  appointing  the  third  day  after 
as  a  holiday  for  my  slaves,  and  in  the  interim  in- 
structing my  stewards  what  steps  to  take.  Through 
the  stewards  the  overseers  were  to  be  informed, 
and  the  word  was  to  pass  from  them  to  the  newly 
emancipated  slaves  on  the  day  set  aside  as  their 
holiday. 

The  stewards  and  overseers  were  to  remain  in 
charge  of  the  lands  and  the  buildings  on  them,  and 
also  the  work  outfits  both  on  the  lands  and  in  the 
various  shops  in  which  production  was  carried  on. 
They  were  also  to  control  the  course  of  operations 


THE  DAWN  OF  LIBERTY  151 

and  take  charge  of  the  general  output.  Out  of 
this  output  they  were  to  first  set  aside  the  portion 
previously  taken  by  the  Crown,  leaving  all  the  re- 
mainder to  be  divided  between  the  toilers,  accord- 
ing to  the  manner  of  their  toil.  If  in  charge  of 
overseers,  their  portion  was  to  be  gauged  by  the 
number  of  hours  they  had  labored;  but  if  they 
cultivated  a  tract  on  their  own  responsibility,  they 
were  to  receive  that  portion  of  the  produce  re- 
maining, after  the  Crown  portion  had  been  set 
aside.  .  .  The  Crown  portion  would  not  increase 
if  they  toiled  harder,  or  more  diligently,  or  with 
more  intelligence — the  full  surplus  remaining  for 
their  benefit. 

The  overseers  were  also  to  inform  them  that 
habitual  idleness  would  not  be  tolerated.  If  they 
toiled  not,  neither  should  they  share  in  the  fruit 
of  the  toil.  Freedom  did  not  mean  a  privilege  to 
idle  away  their  time  and  let  their  families  starve 
or  shift  for  themselves.  They  were  warned  that 
persons  who  acted  in  this  manner  would  be  seg- 
regated and  made  wards  of  the  Crown,  obliged 
to  submit  to  being  trained  into  habits  of  industry, 
and  meanwhile  suffering  much  loss  of  liberty  they 
might  otherwise  have  enjoyed. 

On  this  holiday,  to  make  the  fact  of  their  free- 
dom more  clearly  impressed  upon  their  minds,  a 
great  ceremonial  was  repeated  in  all  sections,  in 


152  DOOMED 

the  course  of  which  the  lash  of  the  overseer  was 
burned  in  a  great  bonfire  and  the  announcement 
made  that  neither  the  material  lash  nor  that  of 
hunger  should  ever  again  be  used  to  coerce  them 
into  a  surrender  of  more  of  their  produce  than  was 
necessary  for  the  support  of  the  Crown;  and  that 
the  higher  and  nobler  incentive  of  retaining  for 
themselves  the  surplus  product  of  their  toil  was 
hereafter  to  take  the  place  of  the  lash. 

Looking  far  ahead,  I  could  now  clearly  discern 
the  approach  of  Atlism.  I  had  started  an  influ- 
ence that  was  soon  to  add  mightily  to  the  popu- 
larity and  power  of  the  Crown;  through  which, 
coupled  with  the  enlightenment  following  upon  the 
step  I  had  taken,  destiny  was  bound  to  shape  fu- 
ture events  so  as  to  culminate  in  Atlism. 


CHAPTER  VI 

From  Free  Slave  to  Free  Man 

.The  ferment  of  a  great  and  wholesome  revolu- 
tion in  Omshola  became  visible  with  the  reaping 
of  the  first  harvest  on  the  Crown  lands,  now  that 
its  free  slaves  were  to  have  for  themselves  all  the 
produce  in  excess  of  previous  standards. 

Its  toilers  had  never  sweated  so  joyfully  nor 
plodded  so  diligently,  nor  watched  so  keenly  to 
forestall  every  difficulty  and  prevent  everything 
threatening  loss  and  disaster.  They  felt  that  the 
labor  and  care  they  bestowed  upon  the  crops  were 
being  given  to  that  which  was  to  become  their 
own.  Instead  of  groaning,  they  began  to  sing  at 
their  work;  and  though  the  work  had  almost 
doubled,  they  seemed  to  feel  it  less. 

And  when  the  crops  had  been  marketed  and 
the  portion  of  each  was  allotted  to  him,  their  eyes 
were  delighted  with  the  prodigious  abundance. 
They  found  they  all  had  much  to  spare;  and 
the  surplus  they  took  to  the  market  houses  and 
traded  for  the  produce  of  artisans,  who  also  were 
blessed  with  a  surplus  to  dispose  of.  .  .  So  in  the 

1531 


IS4  DOOMED 

homes  of  both  the  toilers  on  the  lands,  and  in 
those  of  the  artisans  toiling  in  shops,  there  was  a 
plenty  of  foods,  and  of  household  utensils,  and 
embellishments,  beyond  all  previous  standards. 

Nowhere  did  all  this  Crown  land  prosperity  dis- 
play itself  more  visibly  than  on  the  happy  counte- 
nances of  its  freed  slaves  that  now  beamed  with 
joy  where  formerly  they  had  exhibited  sullen 
scowls. 

And  now  the  Koms  also,  seeing  the  magical 
change  wrought  on  the  Crown  lands,  took  steps  to 
free  the  slaves  upon  their  lands,  though  only  to 
divide  with  the  toilers  the  surplusage  they  would 
produce.  And  even  the  Kones,  in  order  to  keep 
up  appearances,  were  also  forced  to  reduce  their 
exactions,  so  as  to  take  no  more  from  the  toilers 
than  did  the  Koms. 

So  a  new  freedom  began  to  breathe  in  all  quar- 
ters of  Omshola,  whose  free  slaves  well  realized 
they  owed  it  all  to  their  Melka — the  new  ruler  on 
the  throne.  Through  the  successful  results  of  the 
step  I  had  taken,  I  became  endeared  to  them;  and, 
day  by  day,  the  power  of  the  throne  became 
stronger,  enabling  me  to  push  on  the  work  of 
emancipating  the  toilers  of  Omshola. 

With  the  might  of  the  toiling  multitudes  behind 
me,  I  was  soon  able  to  reduce  the  military  forces 
of  the  Crown;  and  that  without  breeding  dlscon- 


FROM  FREE  SLAVE  TO  FREE  MAN        155 

tent,  since  there  was  no  lack  of  work  to  do  In  shop 
and  field — profitable  work,  under  conditions  mak- 
ing toil  attractive.  For  the  same  reasons,  I  was 
also  now  able  to  greatly  reduce  the  force  of  useless 
servants  and  hangers  on  in  the  palace.  So  that 
when  the  next  harvest  came,  the  portion  of  the 
toilers  became  much  larger  than  before. 

In  the  years  that  followed,  the  tollers  replaced 
their  slovenly  one-room  huts,  in  which  poultry  and 
pigs  had  shared  their  beds  with  them,  and  had 
erected  huts  holding  each  several  rooms,  and  sepa- 
rate ones  for  the  poultry  and  pigs.  The  change 
was  a  marvelous  one,  shown  in  greater  cleanliness 
in  households  and  on  the  person. 

It  was  wonderful  to  behold  the  greater  skill  and 
speed  with  which  artisans  now  pursued  their  call- 
ings, doing  all  things  on  a  much  larger  scale,  that 
enabled  them  to  apply  more  labor-saving  methods. 
And  this  was  also  true  upon  the  lands,  where 
labor-saving  devices  were  coming  into  use,  and 
productive  efl^ciency  seemed  to  advance  with 
leaps  and  bounds. 

So  a  new  Omshola  was  rising,  to  supersede  the 
old — an  Omshola  wonderfully  expanded,  with 
shops  and  factories  more  than  trebled  In  dimen- 
sions and  In  efficiency,  and  with  broader  and  richer 
fields  than  had  ever  here  been  dreamed  of. 

Along  with  all  this,  I  also  had  their  market 


156  DOOMED 

houses  enlarged  so  as  to  meet  all  the  demands  of 
the  new  prosperity.  .  .  .  And  here  the  klbos  were 
rapidly  performing  the  functions  of  money;  for 
there  was  constantly  more  selling  and  buying  with 
kibos  being  done  than  there  was  of  bartering — a 
practice  that  was  rapidly  waning. 

To  guard  against  the  hoarding  of  kibos,  I  now 
Issued  a  decree  forbidding  their  accumulation  in 
very  large  quantities,  lest  an  artificial  scarcity  be 
produced  and  profiteering  with  them  should  induce 
hoarding  to  a  dangerous  extent.  For  the  present, 
this  might  answer,  though  I  well  realized  that  in 
time  I  should  be  obliged  to  make  the  kibos  un- 
hoardable,  just  as  we  in  Atlo  made  our  shekels 
unhoardable. 

Among  other  changes  I  Instituted,  was  the  estab- 
lishment of  schools  in  which  all  were  to  learn  the 
rudiments  of  ordinary  speech  and  knowledge — to 
read,  to  write  and  to  reckon.  Gi-ls  were  also  to 
learn  the  rudiments  of  housework,  and  boys  to 
acquire  the  training  of  finger  and  arm  and  limb 
in  the  use  of  ordinary  tools.  They  were  also  to 
learn  how  to  raise  vegetables,  rear  plants  and 
trees,  and  to  understand  the  principles  governing 
the  growth  of  plant  life. 

So  attractive  now  became  labor  on  the  Crown 
lands,  that  as  news  thereof  filtrated  into  the  re- 
gions surrounding  Omshola,  large  numbers  of  its 


FROM  FREE  SLAVE  TO  FREE  MAN        157 

savages  drifted  in  and  took  work  upon  the  Crown 
lands.  They  came  ever  in  greater  numbers  also, 
not  waiting  till  famine  might  drive  them  to  accept 
servitude,  as  it  had  done  in  past  generations.  All 
this  went  to  add  mightily  to  the  power  of  the 
Crown,  which  was  recognized  by  all  toilers  as  their 
true  friend,  their  liberator  and  their  staunch 
supporter. 

I  had  thus  far  retained  full  possession  of  the 
lands,  the  buildings  and  the  work  outfits  on  the 
Crown  lands;  for  their  use  I  had  made  no 
charge  beyond  what  was  required  for  the  support 
of  the  Crown — a  charge  I  had  also  materially 
reduced. 

But  my  future  plans  contemplated  that  all  these 
properties  should  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  toilers 
using  them,  and  that  the  burden  of  supporting  the 
Crown  should  be  divided  between  all  the  toilers  of 
Omshola.  My  plans  also  contemplated  that  the 
properties  now  used  by  the  toilers  on  the  Komyim 
lands  should  ultimately  belong  to  the  toilers,  with- 
out having  to  pay  any  further  toll  for  their  use. 
All  this  was  to  be  effected  by  purchase,  paying  for 
the  Komyim  properties,  those  of  both  Koms  and 
Kones,  in  regular  instalments  drawn  from  their 
surplus  produce  till  the  whole  was  paid  for,  and 
the  toilers  finally  all  were  possessors  and  were 


1S8  DOOMED 

able  to  toil  without  having  to  support  In  luxurious 
ease  any  idle  or  unproductive  class.  These  steps 
were  to  complete  the  emancipation  of  the  Omsho- 
lan  toilers.  In  this  purchase  the  Crown  land  toil- 
ers were  to  contribute  a  portion,  in  lieu  of  what 
they  saved  in  obtaining  their  properties  from  the 
Crown  without  charge. 

After  all  this  had  been  achieved,  the  property 
laws  prevailing  in  Atlo  were  to  be  enacted  and 
enforced,  together  with  the  use  of  a  complemen- 
tary kibo,  to  be  used  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
bronze  shekels  of  Atlo.  By  these  steps  Omshola 
would  be  gradually  Atlonized,  and  Atlism,  or 
Perfected  Capitalism,  established. 

Already  there  was  spreading  a  spirit  of  dis- 
content, arising  from  the  fact  that  toilers  were 
beginning  to  ask  themselves  why  they  should  go  on 
supporting  in  luxury  a  class  of  drones  on  one  side 
and  of  charlatans  on  the  other.  For  with  the 
broadening  of  their  minds,  under  the  new  condi- 
tions, they  were  daily  losing  faith  in  the  preten- 
sions of  the  Kones. 

Realizing  also  the  danger  of  a  violent  uprising, 
I  promptly  summoned  the  Komylm  to  an  audience, 
in  which  I  detailed  to  them  the  state  of  the  public 
mind,  and  warned  them  of  the  danger  imminent. 
...  I  also  now  announced  to  them  the  plans  I 
had  designed  by  which  the  toilers  were  to  buy 


FROM  FREE  SLAVE  TO  FREE  MAN       159 

their  complete  liberty.  There  was  no  reason,  I 
urged,  why  the  Komyim  should  draw  a  perpetual 
income  from  the  toilers.  Whatever  services  the 
Komyim  may  ever  have  rendered  were  necessarily 
of  a  limited  character,  and  by  no  stretch  of  the 
imagination  could  be  justly  transformed  into  a 
perpetual  claim. 

My  plan  therefore  contemplated  the  purchase 
of  the  properties  in  question,  to  be  paid  for  in 
not  less  than  ten  years,  during  which  time  the 
Komyim  would  have  ample  opportunity  to  adapt 
themselves  to  the  new  conditions.  I  have  no 
objections  to  either  Kones  or  Koms;  but  I  would 
have  them  prepare  themselves  to  earn  their  liveli- 
hood by  such  services  as  were  acceptable  to  others, 
whether  these  were  as  counselors  in  matters  spirit- 
ual or  temporal.  But  such  services  must  not  be 
imposed  on  people  against  their  will,  by  indirect 
threats  of  deceitful  misrepresentations.  Crime  in 
spiritual  affairs  is  to  be  equally  as  punishable  as  in 
affairs  temporal. 

That  the  nobles  were  horrified  at  the  audacity 
of  my  proposals  was  to  be  expected.  They  were 
dumbfounded  and  alarmed. 

The  Kones,  who  were  more  deft  of  tongue,  and 
better  versed  in  the  law,  were  first  to  rise  in 
protest. 

"What?"  shouted  Kone  Sobrati,  foaming  at  the 


i6o  DOOMED 

mouth,  "are  we  who  have  for  untold  generations 
held  these  properties  unchallenged,  to  be  suddenly 
deprived  of  them  by  a  mere  trick — by  purchase?" 

"Then  you  do  not  regard  purchase  as  a  fitting 
title  to  these  properties?  How  then,  pray  you, 
came  your  ancestors  into  possession,  and  by  what 
means  did  you  retain  possession  all  these  genera- 
tions?" 

"Partly  by  conquest,  Gracious  Melka,  and 
partly  by  surrender  of  famished  savages,  came  we 
into  possession"  ;  was  the  reply,  "and  by  the  strong 
arm  we  have  held  our  possessions.  We  never 
sought  other  title." 

"Very  well,"  I  replied.  "Then  we  shall  have  no 
change  in  the  law  of  property.  Its  title  is  still  to 
inhere  in  the  power  of  might.  Your  rights  are 
not  to  be  disturbed  in  the  least." 

A  gleam  of  light  brightened  the  dour  counte- 
nances of  the  Kones,  on  hearing  my  remarks.  But 
it  quickly  passed  away  when  I  followed,  remarking 
that  while  the  law  governing  the  title  to  the  prop- 
erty was  not  to  be  changed,  the  position  of  the 
might,  by  which  it  had  been  retained,  had  been 
materially  altered.  The  power  of  might  now  in- 
hered in  the  toilers  and  the  Crown.  That  alone 
had  changed.  Hereafter  the  arms  that  were 
strong  in  toil  would  also  be  strong  in  retaining 
possession  of  the  properties  requisite  to  the  pur- 


FROM  FREE  SLAVE  TO  FREE  MAN        i6i 

suit  of  labor.  The  refinements  of  gentlemanly 
idleness  and  delusive  charlatanry  were  no  longer 
sufficient  claims  upon  a  life  of  luxurious  ease." 

It  was  with  downcast  mien,  and  no  little  mur- 
muring, that  the  Komyim  left  the  audience  cham- 
ber, after  dismissal.  And  now  the  die  had  been 
cast,  and  Omshola  was  about  to  enter  upon  a  new 
career  of  progress. 


CHAPTER  yil 

The  End  of  the  Goro  Goros 

Through  four  years  of  steadfast  resistance 
had  King  Mozo  led  the  struggle  against  the  dread 
man-beasts;  and  though  his  term  of  office  was 
nearing  its  end,  he  kept  on  with  indefatigable 
pertinacity. 

Steadily  had  he  narrowed  the  cordon  by  which 
the  goro  goros  were  being  driven  eastward  and 
confined  within  smaller  territory.  Lacking  cultiva- 
tion, the  territory  also  was  steadily  yielding  less 
and  less  toward  the  subsistence  of  the  foe.  With 
the  more  thorough  barricading  of  the  oros,  the 
superapes  also  were  securing  fewer  human  victims 
on  which  to  feed.  With  each  successive  year  they 
were  betraying  loss  of  spirit  and  more  signs  of 
emaciation.  If  they  had  begun  to  place  the  Atlons 
under  siege,  that  condition  was  now  being  re- 
versed. They  were  themselves  actually  under 
siege,  cut  off  from  return  to  Atlora  through  the 
fact  that  they  had  been  driven  beyond  the  under- 
ground outlet  to  Atlora. 

It  was  now  getting  to  be  a  case  of  subsisting 
more  and  more  on  the  bodies  of  the  slain  goro 

162 


THE  END  OF  THE  GORO  GOROS    163 

goros — thus  being  forced  to  make  of  their  own 
bodies  their  commissary  stores. 

Quite  different  was  the  state  of  affairs  among 
the  Atlons,  who  were  by  this  time  suffering  no 
lack  of  food  or  raiment  or  comfortable  housing. 
.  .  .  Trade  was  in  progress,  if  not  in  full  normal 
volume,  at  a  rate  allowing  industry  to  go  on 
unabated,  diminished  only  by  the  labors  of  the  men 
devoted  to  resisting  the  enemy  and  producing  war 
supplies.  .  .  .  While  conditions  had  been  con- 
siderably perverted  during  the  first  stage  of  the 
war,  such  had  been  their  enormous  stores  of  sup- 
plies that  it  caused  them  to  suffer  no  want.  The 
state  of  industrial  organization  was  a  powerful 
resource  and  war  weapon,  than  which  none  better 
could  have  been  desired.  It  was  in  fact  the  most 
potent  of  all  their  implements  of  war — the 
dominant  one. 

It  is  not  to  be  denied  that  it  was  a  terrible 
cruelty  to  impose  on  the  beasts  the  dire  torture  of 
slow  starvation.  But  what  other  course  was  left 
in  dealing  with  these  monsters,  who  could  not  be 
made  captives  of  war,  as  human  beings  might  have 
been?  Their  unconquerable  ferocity  had  to  be 
met  by  a  fight  to  the  death;  and  as  long  as  their 
numbers  were  large,  It  would  have  been  foolhardy 
to  attempt  their  slaughter  in  any  other  way. 


i64  DOOMED 

It  is  true  that  In  wars  between  nations  of  human 
beings,  no  such  necessity  exists  to  palliate  the  hor- 
rible alternative.  Neither  does  the  fact  that  the 
torture  by  slow  starvation  carries  with  it  the  ruth- 
less slaughter  of  infants  and  the  aged,  of  mothers 
with  infants  on  their  arms  and  women  in  the  full 
blossom  of  youth,  help  in  the  slightest  degree  to 
extenuate  the  fiendish  inhumanity  of  such  a  course. 
.  .  .  When  nations  a:-e  assailed  with  this  foul 
weapon,  than  which  there  never  was  one  fouler, 
what  wonder  that  they  are  ready  to  retaliate  with 
what  otherwise  were  indefensible  modes  of  war- 
fare? 

Pitiful  now  became  the  sights  coming  daily 
before  our  eyes,  the  gaunt  monsters  slinking  from 
place  to  place,  mere  skeletons  of  their  former 
selves,  staring  through  their  wan  features  with 
empty  gaze,  and  now  and  then  giving  vent  to 
lamentable  moans  or  guttural  groans,  as  from 
internal  pain.  They  were  beginning  to  die ;  and  it 
was  no  uncommon  sight  to  see  them  fighting 
fiercely  among  themselves  over  the  carcases  of  the 
deceased. 

Tired  at  length  of  these  revolting  sights,  an 
aggressive  campaign,  to  effect  their  final  annihila- 
tion, was  ordered.  And  as  their  numbers  had  by 
this  time  become  considerably  reduced,  it  took  not 
long  before  we  saw  the  last  of  the  goro  goros. 


THE  END  OF  THE  GORO  GOROS    165 

The  terrible  conflict  was  finally  over,  and  once 
more  peace  reigned  in  all  parts  of  Atlo;  and  after 
a  brief  respite,  the  work  of  restoring  the  land  to 
its  normal  state  was  begun.  There  was  much  to 
do  in  removing  the  barricades  from  the  oros,  re- 
storing the  avenues  from  the  delapidated  condi- 
tion in  which  the  beasts  had  left  them,  and  also 
restoring  to  cultivation  the  large  tracts  of  land 
that  had  been  occupied  by  the  superapes.  But  all 
this  was  a  trivial  matter  in  a  land  so  profuse  with 
industrial  facilities  as  was  victorious  Atlo. 

It  IS  needless  to  say  there  was  great  rejoicing 
in  all  parts  of  the  land,  and  that  the  orotos  re- 
sounded with  celebrations  of  the  great  triumph. 
The  whole  nation  was  thrilled  with  the  enthusi- 
asm of  a  well  earned  victory. 

While  all  these  events  were  transpiring  In  Atlo, 
the  constant  report  reaching  me  from  expeditions 
sent  to  the  mouth  of  the  tunnel  to  Atlo  were  dis- 
appointing. It  was  always  the  same.  The  beasts 
still  held  the  ground  at  the  Fiery  Pit,  making  exit 
impossible,  and  Information  far  from  attainable. 
During  all  this  time,  my  whereabouts,  and  the 
question  whether  I  were  still  living,  was  as  much  a 
mystery  as  ever  to  my  parents  and  my  betrothed. 
Whatever  shred  of  hope  they  still  clung  to,  was 
obscured  In  the  shadow  of  their  despair. 

My  parents  had,  during  the  first  period  of  the 


i66  DOOMED 

war,  been  kept  busy  attending  and  nursing 
wounded  Atlons,  not  only  of  the  Red  Star,  but 
many  brought  in  from  neighboring  oros.  In  the 
later  stages,  their  lives  jogged  on  in  the  usual  cur- 
rents, differing  from  normal  times  only  in  their 
close  confinement  within  their  own  and  adjoining 
oro?,  since  underground  communication  had  been 
established.  But  until  the  last  month  of  the  siege, 
they  dared  not  venture  on  the  streets  or  avenues. 

With  the  war  ended,  Atlons  at  once  decided 
upon  beginning  a  campaign  for  the  ultimate  anni- 
hilation of  the  dangerous  beasts  on  the  adjoining 
peninsula,  Atlora. 

The  peninsula  of  Atlora  lay  directly  west  of 
Atlo  and  was  connected  with  it  by  the  isthmus  of 
Long  Neck.  It  was  a  region  covered  with  tower- 
ing mountain  ranges  and  penetrated  by  mighty 
streams.  It  had  also  barren  plains  of  seemingly 
endless  stretch,  on  which  hunger  and  thirst  were 
more  menacing  than  the  wildest  beasts.  .  .  .  Be- 
yond It  lay  the  peninsula  of  Atloraba,  making  a 
turn  directly  southward,  into  a  torrid  region.  This 
was  a  land  of  miasmatic  swamps,  uninhabitable  to 
man,  and  infested  with  mammoths  of  gigantic 
stature,  griffins,  dragons,  flying  serpents  and  the 
elephantlgos  who  resembled  elephants  but  were  of 
double  their  height  and  of  many  times  their  bulk. 


THE  END  OF  THE  GORO  GOROS    167 

These  beasts  were  flesh  eaters,  who  would  catch 
lions  and  tigers  and  devour  them  as  cats  would 
mice.  There  were  also  serpents  and  reptiles  of  all 
degrees  of  venom;  hideous  vultures  as  large  as  an 
ox;  venemous  bats  and  insects;  and  creatures  of 
endless  variety,  all  devouring  each  other  and  teem- 
ing in  great  profusion.  But  their  mammoth  di- 
mensions, and  the  distance  from  Atlo,  made  these 
sluggish  monsters  less  dangerous  to  Atlo  than 
were  the  nearer  and  fiercer  beasts  of  Atlora.^ 

In  this  campaign,  planned  for  the  ultimate  exter- 
mination of  all  dangerous  beasts  in  Atlora,  expedi- 
tions were  to  be  undertaken,  in  a  preliminary  way 
to  determine  the  routes  to  be  fitted  as  permanent 
roadways.  These  were  afterwards  to  be  fitted  for 
the  rapid  conveyance  of  troops  and  supplies.  They 
were  to  have  suitable  forts  and  stations  at  con- 
venient distances;  and  wells  were  also  to  be  dug 
where  water  was  otherwise  out  of  reach. 

It  was  on  one  of  the  first  of  these  pioneering 
expeditions  that  my  betrothed,  Loab  Ben  Phra, 
had  been  assigned  at  the  close  of  the  superape  war; 
and  concerning  some  of  his  experiences,  we  will 
learn  before  long  in  his  own  words. 

*  Besides  being  antediluvian,  these  beasts  belonged  to  a  dis- 
tinct continent,  thus  accounting  for  their  marked  variation  from 
modern  beasts. 


CHAPTER  VIII 
Good  News  from  Atlo 

More  than  a  year  had  elapsed  since  the  pur- 
chase of  the  Komyim  estates  for  the  tollers  had 
been  made,  and  affairs  in  Omshola  were  daily 
bristling  with  numerous  tokens  of  progress  and 
prosperity,  all  moving  along  at  an  unprecedented 
pace,  when  a  succession  of  eventful  occurrences 
followed  each  other. 

The  first  of  these  came,  following  an  unusually 
tempestuous  night  in  which  one  incessant  roar  of 
terrible  thunder  blasts  besieged  our  ears,  and  the 
crystal  roof  of  the  land  became  one  unbroken  sur- 
face of  intensely  blazing  gems,  now  darkening  and 
anon  bursting  in  dazzling  brilliance — a  grand 
color  exhibition  that  fascinated  In  the  midst  of  the 
awful  terror  It  inspired. 

Here  and  there,  where  the  roof  was  of  thinner 
body,  the  lightning  blasts  crashed  sections  into 
splinters  or  melted  a  portion  of  the  surface,  leav- 
ing open  gaps  through  which  poured  the  waters 
from  the  clouds  In  the  upper  world.  Of  such  gaps 
there  were  many  In  the  land,  serving  well  to  help 
in  purifying  its  air.    But  in  a  far  off  region  there 

i68 


GOOD  NEWS  FROM  ATLO  169 

was  one  wide  gap  through  which  tan  down  in  one 
perpetual  stream  a  vast  body  of  water  that  cut  its 
way  out  into  the  sea,  forming  on  the  way  a  mighty 
river.  Other  rivers  penetrated  and  helped  to 
water  the  lands  of  Omshola,  but  of  much  smaller 
dimensions;  and  one  of  them  carried  its  waters  to 
sC  broad  lake  that  seemed  bottomless,  never  rising 
above  its  usual  level. 

But  all  these  matters  are  only  incidental.  On 
the  morning  after  the  tempest,  what  was  the  sur- 
prise of  the  Omsholans  to  see  the  lands  surround- 
ing Omsh  covered  with  a  great  sheet  of  water,' 
more  than  a  cubit  in  depth.  How  far  the  flood 
extended,  none  knew.  It  was  a  new  experience, 
causing  much  alarm — especially  to  the  supersti-' 
tlous,  who  attributed  it  to  the  anger  of  the  spirits 
in  the  upper  world.  ' 

From  the  numerous  alarm  signals  coming  In,  it 
was  to  be  surmised  that  the  flood  was  spread  over 
a  wide  region,  much  of  which  was  more  deeply 
immersed. 

In  this  emergency,  it  was  not  the  Komyim,  but 
the  toilers,  who  were  first  to  interest  themselves  in 
dealing  with  the  situation.  Learning  of  their  zeal, 
I  summoned  a  goodly  number  of  them  to  the  pal- 
ace, where  I  allowed  them  to  give  their  views  as 
to  the  best  way  of  dealing  with  the  situation. 


170  DOOMED 

The  general  opinion  was  that  this  body  of  water 
had  come  from  a  rising  of  the  sea  to  a  height 
above  the  level  of  Omshola;  and  this  view  was 
further  sustained  by  the  brackish  taste  it  had. 

By  dint  of  much  questioning,  I  learned  from 
them  that  to  the  south,  perhaps  a  day's  jour- 
ney off,  there  lay  a  stretch  of  low  land  that  might 
serve  as  a  feasible  basin  for  the  waters,  if  they 
could  be  transferred  thither. 

From  one  of  them,  who  was  quite  familiar  with 
the  territory  surrounding  Omsh,  I  also  learned 
that  by  cutting  through  two  intervening  ridges  the 
waters  could  easily  be  drawn  into  the  projected 
basin.  Seeing  also  that  this  man,  Dolfo  by  name, 
had  experience  in  ditching  operations,  I  at  once 
submitted  the  task  to  his  charge,  allowing  him  to 
engage  the  necessary  help  and  guaranteeing  all 
costs  to  be  paid  from  the  Crown  funds,  at  a  liberal 
rate. 

So  it  was  that  work  was  at  once  begun;  and  on 
the  third  day  thereafter,  the  waters  had  so  sub- 
sided that  affai:'s  soon  moved  on  again  in  their 
usual  way,  as  if  nothing  had  intervened. 

It  was  only  upon  the  second  day,  after  I  had 
received  reports  that  the  last  of  the  ridges  was 
being  cut,  and  that  the  outlet  would  soon  be  ready, 
that  a  deputation  of  Komyim  made  their  appear- 
ance with  loud  lamentations,  deploring  the  dread- 


GOOD  NEWS  FROM  ATLO  171 

ful  situation.  They  saw  the  ruin  of  Omshola  in 
the  stretch  of  waters  that  now  engulfed  it.  Agri- 
culture could  no  longer  be  pursued;  and  even 
travel  and  transportation  could  only  with  the 
greatest  difficulty  be  carried  on.  What  was  to  be 
done? 

Large  numbers  of  the  Kones  had  succeeded  in 
reaching  the  temples,  where  they  were  now  plead- 
ing with  the  spirits  of  the  upper  world  to  abate  the 
flood.  They  promised  sacrifices,  and  they  tore 
their  hair  and  inflicted  bloody  gashes  upon  their 
flesh,  in  expiation  of  the  sins  they  had  committed, 
for  which  they  believed  the  spirits  had  sent  the 
flood.  .  .  .  But  they  went  much  further,  In  Inter- 
preting the  wrath  of  the  spirits.  To  the  people 
assembled  they  attributed  the  inundation  to  their 
violation  of  all  former  precedents  In  taking  pos- 
session of  Omsholan  properties — a  thing  unheard 
of  before.  Woe  to  them,  lest  a  great  Inundation 
follow,  and  drown  them  all.  Surely  this  would 
happen,  unless  they  returned  to  the  Komyim  the 
properties  now  in  their  hands.  So  the  Kones  actu- 
ally believed,  deluded  by  the  common  weakness  of 
mortals  in  clothing  their  wishes  with  the  garb  of 
reality. 

Had  not  the  flood  soon  subsided,  there  Is  no 
doubt  that  such  representations  as  those  made  by 
the  Kones  would  have  gradually  influenced  the 


172  DOOMED 

superstitiously  inclined  toilers,   and  led  them  to 
return  to  the  foTmer  status  of  chattel  slaves. 

Another  event,  that  ultimately  proved  of  far 
greater  moment,  occurred  shortly  after,  though  at 
the  time  it  attracted  little  attention  beyond  the 
small  circle  of  my  palace  intimates.  This  was  the 
unaccountable  disappearance  of  my  little  minstrel, 
Borok,  of  whom  not  the  least  trace  was  to  be 
discovered. 

He  had  often  hinted  to  me  his  thorough  distrust 
of  the  Kones,  warning  me  to  be  on  my  guard 
against  their  machinations.  While  outwardly  sub- 
mitting to  the  new  order,  they  would  secretly  be 
conspiring  to  restore  the  previous  order  by  work- 
ing on  the  superstitions  of  the  people.  I  had  con- 
fided to  him  my  desire  to  some  day  visit  Atlo  and 
enter  into  a  comme'rcial  treaty  with  it,  by  which  a 
mutually  beneficial  trade  could  be  engaged  in 
between  Omshola  and  Atlo,  and  under  which  also 
a  mutual  alliance  could  be  effected  that  would  bind 
to  each  other  the  two  lands  in  supporting  the  per- 
petuation of  Atlism.  .  .  .  To  this  suggestion  the 
dwarf  had  pointed  out  the  danger  of  communica- 
tion through  the  tunnel  being  obstructed  by  a  wall- 
ing in  of  the  passage.  He  had  some  idea  that 
another  outlet  might  be  discovered  more  prac- 
ticable for  the  purpose  than  the  tunnel;  but  no 
more  was  said  concerning  it. 


GOOD  NEWS  FROM  ATLO 


173 


He  had  also  often  heard  me  tell  of  the  fabulous 
value  placed  abroad  upon  the  gold  and  the  pre- 
cious gems  that  here  abounded  in  such  profusion  as 
to  be  worth  no  more  than  the  labor  of  picking 
them  from  the  ground.  He  seemed  to  be  greatly 
impressed  by  the  fact,  and  often  sighed  when 
thinking  how  impossible  it  would  be  to  leave 
Omshola  if  the  beasts  should  prove  victorious  in 
Atlo. 

Surely,  all  this  vast  treasure  of  gold  and  gems 
was  wasted,  'remaining  In  Omshola.  He  must 
have  been  dreaming  night  and  day  of  the  possi- 
bilities in  store  for  the  person  who  managed  to 
reach  the  outer  world  with  a  supply  of  these  gems. 

As  a  freeman,  he  had  the  right  to  go  whither 
he  pleased,  and  I  therefore  made  no  attempt  to 
Intercept  him,  believing,  in  my  heart  of  hearts,  that 
he  had  gone  forth  in  search  of  the  other  outlet 
from  Omshola,  of  which  he  had  hinted. 

Following  the  disappearance  of  my  minstrel, 
came  the  pleasing  report  that  the  beasts  had  de- 
parted from  the  territory  adjacent  to  the  Fiery 
Pit,  and  that  people  were  moving  about  in  Nungo 
Park  without  restraint.  This  was  glad  news, 
Implying  the  successful  end  of  the  great  beast  war. 
^  Now  at  last  the  opportunity  was  open  for  a 
visit  to  my  parents,  my  betrothed  and  my  native 


174  DOOMED 

land.  Of  course  there  would  be  many  changes, 
and  who  knows  how  many  friends  missing.  Would 
all  my  people  be  there  to  meet  me?  If  so, 
what  a  glad  reunion  it  would  bring  about.  I 
could  hardly  await  the  day,  my  heart  so  throbbed 
with  expectancy. 

But  how  was  I  to  leave  Omshola,  and  how 
meanwhile  provide  for  its  safety?  Why  not 
appoint  Kosoki  Samba  as  regent  in  my  absence? 
He  had  been  faithful  in  setting  me  upon  the 
throne,  and  true  also  to  the  interests  of  Omshola. 
If  any  man  was  worthy  of  the  trust,  it  was  Kosoki 
Samba. 

My  first  step  was  therefore  to  hold  a  consulta- 
tion with  this  man,  who  was  still  holding  office 
as  Crown  Counselor.  To  him  I  now  confided  my 
intentions,  adding  by  way  of  further  motive  my 
desire  to  effect  a  treaty  with  Atlo  by  which  the 
two  lands  would  be  united  in  defense  of  Atlism, 
whether  assailed  by  beasts  or  by  conspirators  in 
either  land.  The  treaty  was  also  to  establish 
commercial  relations  between  the  two  lands. 

Put  in  this  shape,  Kosoki  Samba  was  inclined  to 
favor  my  departure,  but  warned  me  to  return  as 
soon  as  possible,  lest,  in  my  absence,  the  Kones 
should  stir  up  a  revolution.  For,  like  my  little 
minstrel,  he  regarded  the  Kones  with  distrust. 

Together  we  planned  to  make  my  departure  as 


GOOD  NEWS  FROM  ATLO  175 

early  as  possible  and  with  as  little  show  as  would 
be  compatible  with  such  a  move — thereby  giving  to 
the  Kones  as  small  a  start  as  possible  In  carrying 
out  their  aims.  In  addition  to  this,  the  report  was 
diligently  to  be  circulated  that  my  stay  was  to  be 
for  a  long  period — a  subterfuge  that  proved  of 
much  avail  on  the  day  of  my  return,  after  having 
had  to  submit  to  many  unforeseen  delays. 

Before  another  moon  had  passed,  the  expedi- 
tion was  started  in  royal  state,  followed  by  a  corps 
of  deputies  empowered  to  add  their  approval  in 
signing  with  me  the  contemplated  treaty,  and  also 
a  body  of  attendants  and  servants.  The  entire 
party  were  mounted  on  tofos,  the  long  horned 
beasts  of  burden  of  Omshola.  We  took  with  us 
an  abundant  supply  of  kibos  and  also  of  gems,  to 
be  traded  for  Atlon  productions  and  services,  such 
as  we  should  need. 

In  publicly  announcing  my  departure,  Kosoki 
Samba  was  made  regent  in  my  absence,  empowered 
to  rule  until  my  return,  three  moons  hence.  The 
trip  through  the  tunnel  was  a  tedious  one  and  led 
me  often  to  think  of  the  suggestion  made  by  Borok 
of  another  outlet  from  Omshola;  and  I  even  re- 
solved on  my  return  to  have  steps  taken  for  the 
discovery  of  some  such  outlet. 


CHAPTER  IX 

The  Plot  of  the  Kones 

That  my  departure  from  Atlo  had  so  readily 
been  assented  to  by  the  Komylm  was  due  to  no 
love  they  bore  me — rather  welcoming  my  pro- 
posed departure  as  an  opportune  occasion  for  set- 
ting upon  the  throne  one  of  their  own  members, 
recovering  their  properties,  and  compelling  the 
freedmen  now  in  possession  to  return  to  their 
previous  status  of  bondsmen. 

At  the  head  of  the  plotters  was  the  astute  Kone 
Sobrati,  lean,  sad-eyed  and  gloomy,  whom  the 
spirits  of  the  upper  world  allowed  no  rest  till 
the  old  order  should  be  re-established.  All  the 
Kones  were  ardently  supporting  the  movement, 
determined  to  revive  the  old  order  under  which 
they  might  secure  a  fat  living  in  return  for  a  lean 
service. 

Even  the  Koms  had  been  won  over,  and  stood 
ready  to  mount  Kone  Sobrati  upon  the  throne, 
when  the  time  came.  They  all  regretted  the  liber- 
ation of  their  slaves;  and  far  more,  the  sale  to 
them  of  their  lands  and  Improvements.  They  did 
not  ignore  the  commercial  value  to  be  paid  them 

176 


THE  PLOT  OF  THE  KONES  177 

by  the  purchasers;  but  saw  clearly  that  in  the  end, 
they  would  be  reduced  to  an  equality  with  their 
former  slaves  and  obliged  to  earn  their  bread  by 
the  sweat  of  their  brows.  It  was  that  dire  neces- 
sity that  jarred  against  their  sensitive  nerves  and 
refused  to  harmonize  with  their  inherited  custom 
to  live  in  luxury  and  ease  and  the  pompous  pride 
of  a  class  of  superior  beings. 

Hardly  had  the  party  of  the  Melka,  therefore, 
been  gone  a  day,  when  burly  Kom  Zum,  with  a 
strong  party  of  Koms,  followed  it,  keeping  far 
enough  behind  to  escape  discovery.  With  them 
were  a  force  of  masons  and  a  lot  of  tofos  laden 
with  sacks  of  cement,  ostensibly  to  make  some 
repairs  at  the  tunnel  outlet. 

Arriving  at  the  tunnel  outlet,  the  masons  were 
told  that  an  outlet  at  a  higher  elevation  was  to  be 
cut  through  the  rock  wall,  by  which  the  Melka 
would  have  a  more  convenient  means  of  entrance 
on  her  return.  But  before  the  cutting  was  begun, 
the  old  entrance  was  to  be  sealed. 

Misled  by  this  cunning  explanation  of  the  object 
in  view,  the  artisans  entered  upon  the  task  without 
the  least  suspicion,  gathering  all  the  loose  rocks 
they  could  find  and  cementing  them  into  a  rising 
wall  which  they  filled  up  with  cement  all  the  way 
to  the  tunnel  outlet.  To  this,  as  the  wall  rose 
higher,  they  kept  on  adding  more  cement,  so  that 


178  DOOMED 

in  a  few  days  the  cement  filling  reached  to  the  toof 
of  the  gallery. 

It  was  at  this  stage,  that  the  Koms  drew  their 
swords  and  mercilessly  slew  the  masons,  hewing 
their  bodies  into  fragments  which  they  sank  into 
the  cement  before  it  had  had  a  chance  to  harden. 
When  the  cement  finally  hardened,  there  was  no 
visible  trace  left  of  the  massacred  masons;  and  a 
barrier  of  fifty  cubits  length  of  solidified  cement, 
as  impenetrable  as  rock,  closed  the  tunnel  mouth. 
Their  object  had  been  achieved;  and  now  the 
success  of  their  plot  was  assured. 

Upon  their  return  it  was  reported  that,  while 
making  necessary  repairs  in  the  tunnel,  the  party 
had  been  assailed  by  a  much  larger  party  of 
Atlons,  and  the  masons  had  been  captured  and 
borne  away,  while  the  Koms — armed  with  swords 
in  whose  use  they  were  skilled — managed  to  effect 
a  safe  retreat.  .  .  .  For  days  they  had  remained 
sufficiently  near,  to  observe  the  actions  of  the 
Altons,  who  finally  barricaded  themselves  behind 
a  barrier  of  rocks  they  had  raised  and  behind 
which  they  were  filling  in  cement  till  up  to  the  roof 
of  the  tunnel — the  thick  wall  of  hardened  cement 
forming  an  impassable  barrier  now  separating 
Omshola  from  Atlo.  This  ended  the  dynasty  of 
Atlon  Melks.  In  future,  Omsholans  would  have 
to  find  rulers  from  their  own  people. 


THE  PLOT  OF  THE   KONES  179 

But  what  capped  the  climax  of  their  mendacity, 
was  the  added  report  that  my  entire  party  had 
been  slain  by  the  Atlons,  and  my  body  had  been 
exhibited  from  a  distance  to  the  Koms,  by  whom 
it  had  been  identified.  Not  only  was  I  no  longer 
among  the  living;  but  were  I  still  living,  my  return 
would  now  be  absolutely  impossible. 

With  the  work  of  the  Koms  such  a  complete 
success,  the  plot  began  to  thicken.  The  Kones, 
under  the  direction  of  Kone  Sobrati,  began  to 
appeal  to  the  superstitions  of  the  Omsholan  temple 
visitors. 

With  tear-bedimmed  eyes,  and  voices  of  heart- 
breaking anguish,  the  Kones  now  made  the  an- 
nouncement from  their  temple  pulpits,  detailing 
minutely  how  their  Melka  and  her  entire  party 
had  met  their  deaths  at  the  hands  of  the  enraged 
spirits  of  the  upper  world;  and  how  that  these  had 
thereafter  also  sealed  up  the  mouth  of  the  tunnel, 
that  no  more  spirits  might  be  induced  to  leave  the 
upper  world  to  rule  Omshola.  "Our  dear  Melka 
is  dead.  Let  us  mourn  her  loss !"  were  invariably 
the  closing  words  of  their  appeals. 

The  people  had  ever  been  accustomed  to  take 
the  words  of  the  Kones  as  the  very  fountain  of 
truth.  How  could  they  now  doubt  them?  So 
they  deeply  mourned  the  loss  of  their  Melka — 
their  beloved  liberator,  and  dearest  friend. 


i8o  DOOMED 

The  Kones  were  far  too  shrewd  to  make  any 
immediate  reference  to  the  succession.  Before  the 
first  hint  of  this  aim  could  be  given,  the  minds  of 
the  people  must  be  wrought  up  with  a  supersti- 
tious dread,  and  also  by  degrees  educated  to 
knowledge  of  the  iniquity  of  their  elevation  to  the 
level  of  their  unquestionable  superiors,  the 
Komyim, 

Taking  advantage  now  of  every  passing  thun- 
derstorm, the  Kones  stormed  the  superstitious 
minds  of  the  Omsholan  toilers  with  reminders  of 
the  unappeased  wrath  of  the  spirits,  who  were 
demanding  a  return  of  the  people  to  the  old  order. 
Nothing  less  would  ever  satisfy  them;  and  in  the 
meantime  the  air  overhead  would  again  and  again 
be  heard  roaring  the  wrath  of  the  enraged  spirits, 
and  the  roof  of  Omshola  would  blaze  Vv'ith  the 
spirit  flames  spit  against  it.  Nor  would  their 
wrath  be  felt  alone  in  this  manner;  for  as  each 
Omsholan  freedman  hereafter  entered  the  spirit 
world,  the  awful  sin  committed  in  aspiring  to  the 
level  of  the  nobles  would  be  punished  by  burning 
in  fires  eternal.  Let  each  of  them  therefore  think 
well,  before  withholding  the  properties  that  had 
for  ages  belonged  to  the  Komyim,  and  that  now 
were  in  their  hands. 

Such  were  the  wily  appeals  by  which  the  Kones 
looked  to  restore  the  iniquitous  status  under  which 


THE  PLOT  OF  THE  KONES  i8i 

the  toilers  of  Omshola  had  been  shackled  In  bond- 
age. By  degrees  the  minds  of  the  toilers  were 
being  prepared  for  a  return  to  the  shameful  status 
of  their  former  bondage.  Habits  of  faith,  super- 
stition and  fear  are  terrible  foes  to  contend  with; 
and  the  Omsholans  were  not  equal  to  a  contest 
with  such  a  combination. 

Following  these  adroit  appeals,  the  day  soon 
arrived  when  the  Kones  were  ready  to  take  active 
measures  for  placing  a  successor  on  the  vacant 
throne. 

Their  first  step  was  to  publicly  declare  the 
throne  vacant,  calling  for  a  meeting  of  the  Kom- 
yim  to  elect  a  successor.  In  reply,  Kosoki  Samba, 
who  was  acting  as  regent,  demanded  the  formal 
presentation  of  evidence  to  prove  the  declared 
vacancy. 

Kosoki  Samba  had  his  suspicions  regarding  what 
had  really  occurred  in  the  tunnel,  though  he  had 
no  evidence  with  which  to  controvert  their  repre- 
sentations. His  step  aimed  mainly  to  cause  delay, 
in  the  hope  that  I  might  in  the  meantime  return 
to  expose  the  terrible  fraud  they  were  perpetrat- 
ing. Yet,  believing  that  the  tunnel  mouth  had  at 
least  been  sealed,  it  was  mere  hoping  against  hope. 

It  is  true,  he  might  have  enlightened  the  be- 
nighted toilers  as  to  the  falsity  of  the  representa- 
tions made  concerning  the  attitude  and  threats  of 


i82  DOOMED 

the  spirits  above.  But  it  was  very  doubtful  that 
his  word  alone  would  have  had  weight  against  that 
of  the  Kones.  Besides,  he  also  realized  that,  even 
if  he  induced  the  toilers  to  stand  up  for  their 
liberties,  it  would  only  provoke  a  civil  war  whose 
outcome  would  be  dubious  and  disastrous.  What 
was  he  to  do?  In  the  face  of  the  representations 
that  were  to  be  attested,  the  throne  would  be  indis- 
putably vacant,  and  some  successor  would  have  to 
be  chosen. 

Decked  In  their  finest  garbs,  and  thefr  faces 
wreathed  in  smiles,  the  Komyim  were  at  length 
assembled  in  the  royal  audience  chamber  of  the 
palace,  to  elect  a  successor.  In  an  adjoining  hall 
a  sumptuous  feast  was  in  preparation  to  follow  the 
formal  election;  and  the  odors  of  the  cooking 
viands  were  permeating  the  gaily  decorated  audi- 
ence chamber,  causing  many  a  hint  at  the  hurrying 
on  of  the  work,  which  was  only  formal — the  deci- 
sion having  long  since  been  made  to  place  Kone 
Sobrati  on  the  throne. 

Long-visaged  Kone  Sobrati,  for  once  in  his 
career  wearing  a  smiling  countenance,  addressed 
the  assembled  Komyim  in  glowing  phrases  inflated 
with  lofty  promise  proportionately  empty  of 
meaning.  He  assured  his  auditors  that  democracy 
in  Omshola  was  to  remain  a  permanent  boon  to  all 


THE  PLOT  OF  THE  KONES  183 

its  people,  though  its  properties  were  to  be  re- 
placed in  the  hands  of  the  Komyim,  who  were  the 
time-honored  class  fitted  for  their  administration. 

So  far  did  his  liberal  spirit  also  carry  him,  that 
he  assured  to  all  toilers  a  chance  to  acquire  prop- 
erties, after  the  Komyim  were  restored  into  pos- 
session— each  toiler  doing  so  through  his  savings 
—though  he  well  realized  how  meager  these  neces- 
sarily would  be;  and  this  was  to  be  the  ideal  of 
Omsholan  democracy. 

The  address  was  greeted  with  loud  shouts  of 
applause. 

And  now  the  balloting  for  a  successor  was  to 
begin,  ushers  distributing  blank  ballots  among  the 
respective  members  of  the  Komyim.  .  .  .  When 
the  result  of  the  first  ballot  was  announced.  It  was 
plain  that  the  majority  of  them  were  mere  compli- 
ments to  various  members.  ...  At  the  next  bal- 
loting, Kone  Sobrati  was  within  but  three  votes  of 
election.  ...  A  third  ballot  was  taken,  and  lo, 
Kone  Sobrati  had  every  vote  of  the  assembly. 

The  court  herald  was  on  the  point  of  formally 
announcing  the  result,  and  proclaiming  Kone 
Sobrati  as  successor  to  the  throne,  when  their  ears 
were  besieged  with  an  unearthly,  terror-inspiring 
sound,  seeming  to  command  a  halt  in  the  proceed- 
ings. From  all  sides  of  the  palace  came  the  ter- 
rifying sounds,  shriek  after  shriek.     Could  it  be 


i84  DOOMED 

the  spirits,  knowing  the  fraud  about  to  be  perpe- 
trated, had  descended  to  stay  its  progress? 

While  the  Komyim  quivered  with  fear  and 
blanched  faces,  a  force  of  armed  men  stalked  into 
the  audience  chamber — men  covered  from  head  to 
foot  in  shining  armor,  and  with  stern  faces  of  a 
type  unknown  to  Omsholans. 

But  what  added  further  to  their  terror,  was  the 
entrance  of  their  Melka  on  the  arm  of  Kosoki 
Samba,  who  led  her  to  the  throne,  and  with  a 
significant  gesture  bade  her  be  seated. 

The  regency  was  ended,  and  I  once  more  occu- 
pied the  throne  of  Omshola. 

In  clear  and  incisive  tones  I  now  addressed 
them: 

"So,  members  of  the  Komyim,  you  had  me  slain 
by  the  tales  you  spread,  and  my  return  cut  off  by 
having  the  tunnel  opening  sealed,  and  the  poor 
masons,  who  did  the  work  under  your  misrepre- 
sentations, coldly  murdered.  Then  you  carried 
your  deceit  further  by  misrepresentations  made  to 
the  toiling  people  as  to  the  attitude  of  the  spirits 
above  toward  their  liberty.  You  sought  to  again 
fasten  shackles  on  their  limbs — to  again  deliver 
them  into  bondage.  Do  you  know  that  your  crime 
was  treason,  and  Is  punishable  with  death?" 

Upon  hearing  these  dreadful  revelations,  the 


THE  PLOT  OF  THE  KONES  185 

nobles  all  threw  themselves  upon  their  faces  and 
began  to  grovel  in  disgusting  self-abasement. 

I  could  not  look  upon  the  sight;  so  I  commanded 
them  to  rise,  and  then  I  resumed  : 

"Your  offense  is  not  alone  against  me  and  the 
realm  of  Omshola,  but  also  against  the  upper 
world— the  land  of  Atlo,  with  which  I  have 
jomed  in  a  bond  for  mutual  defense.  Into  their 
hands  will  you  therefore  be  committed,  to  be  tried 
and  dealt  with  according  to  their  mercy.  As  for 
myself,  and  for  Omshola,  we  wash  our  hands  of 
you.  The  Atlon  warriors  now  in  this  hall  will 
take  you  in  charge,  and  under  their  care,  you  will 
be  transported  at  once  to  the  land  of  Atlo— there 
to  be  tried  and  dealt  with  according  to  your 
offense." 

^  At  a  signal  from  me,  the  Atlon  guard  took  them 
m  charge,  and  marched  them  in  a  body  to  the  train 
of  war  jubros  waiting  outside  to  bear  them 
speedily  from  the  realm. 

So  ended  the  conspiracy,  and  the  career  in  Om- 
shola, of  these  trouble  makers;  for  I  realized  that 
whatever  sentence  was  imposed  on  them,  they 
would  never  again  be  allowed  to  return. 


CHAPTER  X 

BoROK  Springs  a  Sensation 

At  dusk  on  the  day  previous  to  Borok's  dis- 
appearance, the  dwarf  might  have  been  seen 
mounted  on  a  swift  tofo,  headed  for  the  outskirts 
of  Omsh.  He  was  clad  in  a  dark  canvas  suit  made 
for  the  occasion,  of  strong  fiber,  and  fitted  with 
more  than  the  usual  number  of  pockets.  The  coat 
lining  was  also  sewed  up  in  squares,  at  the  top  of 
each  of  which  was  visible  a  small  opening,  through 
which  they  could  easily  be  filled  with  either  gold 
or  gathered  gems. 

He  was  evidently  bent  on  making  a  long  jour- 
ney; for  he  carried  on  his  back  a  pouch  filled  with 
dried  meats  and  cakes  to  be  used  only  when  no 
longer  able  to  find  the  usual  food  at  the  wayside 
inns,  upon  which  he  mainly  depended. 

Desiring  also  to  avoid  recognition,  he  deviated 
from  the  direct  route,  so  as  to  give  a  wide  berth  to 
the  village  of  his  native  home.  On  the  sixth  day 
he  arrived  at  what  was  the  last  settlement  before 
entering  the  region  of  wilderness  extending  to  the 
eastern  wall  of  Omshola. 

For  three  wearisome  days  he  patiently  pushed 
his  way  over  marshy  lands  and  through  briery 

i86 


BOROK  SPRINGS  A  SENSATION  187 

jungles,  in  which  the  heat  was  stifling.  Then  in 
the  middle  of  the  day,  reaching  an  elevated  piece 
of  ground,  there  suddenly  loomed  up  before  him 
the  eastern  wall  of  crystal,  here  of  a  dark  hue, 
giving  to  the  surroundings  a  gloomy  aspect. 

To  Borok,  however,  the  appearance  of  the  wall 
imparted  a  feeling  of  joy,  telling  him  he  was  soon 
to  ascertain  whether  the  object  of  his  adventure 
was  attainable,  as  he  had  surmised. 

By  evening  he  had  arrived  at  the  wall  itself, 
which  was  here  no  higher  than  three  cubits,  and 
rose  with  a  slight  inchne  till  it  merged  in  the  roof, 
a  hundred  cubits  above.  Here  he  found  a  con- 
venient place  to  rest,  picketing  his  tofo  to  a  small 
tree  that  was  surrounded  with  an  abundance  of 
rich  verdure,  on  which  the  beast  might  feed. 

Following  the  wall  northward  on  the  next  day, 
and  closely  scrutinizing  its  entire  length,  he  sud- 
denly came  on  a  spot  he  seemed  to  recognize.  For 
quite  a  distance  the  wall  was  here  completely  con- 
cealed by  a  clump  of  thorn  bushes.  It  was  back  of 
this  very  clump  he  believed  that  lay  the  opening 
he  had  in  his  youthful  days  once  discovered.  Was 
this  the  place  ?  And  if  so,  what  was  there  beyond  ? 
That  he  had  never  ascertained,  but  was  now 
determined  to  learn — provided  he  found  the 
opening. 

Expecting  to  proceed  alone  on  his  further  jour- 


i88  DOOMED 

ney,  he  let  his  tofo  wander  at  Its  pleasure,  after 
having  wound  the  picketing  thong  around  his 
breast.  He  also  added  some  to  his  store  of  hid- 
den gems  in  the  lining  of  his  coat  and  filled  a  still 
empty  pocket  with  a  lot  of  nuggets  and  coarse 
sands  that  were  rich  with  gold. 

With  his  knife  in  hand,  he  now  proceeded  to 
slowly  carve  his  way  through  the  bushes,  till  he 
reached  the  wall;  and  thence  he  forced  himself  on 
northward,  patiently  sweating  and  toiling  as  he 
progressed.  All  this  time  he  was  crawling  upon 
hands  and  knees;  and  he  was  already  nearing  the 
end  of  the  bushes,  and  just  ready  to  abandon 
further  search,  when,  to  his  amazement,  a  pale 
light  became  visible,  gleaming  through  the  bushes 
only  a  few  steps  ahead.  It  was  the  very  aperture 
he  had  been  looking  for. 

Reaching  It,  he  crawled  through;  and  then,  ris- 
ing and  passing  around  a  rising  knoll,  a  great  sight 
confronted  him — a  vast  surface  far  down  beneath 
his  feet  glimmering  like  a  sheet  of  liquid  emerald. 
Overhead  rose  a  dome  of  solid  blue,  In  the  midst 
of  which  blazed  a  huge  round  face  of  crimson 
flame.  Could  this  be  the  face  of  the  Great  Spirit 
ruling  over  all  the  worlds,  of  which  the  Kones  had 
taught  him  ?  Was  this  the  Lord  who.  In  his  anger, 
spoke  In  voice  of  thunder  and  shot  long  sheets  of 
flame  against  Omskola's  roof? 


"Could  this  be  the   face  of  the   Great   Spirit   ruling  over 
the   worlds,   of   which   the   Kones   had   taught    him  ?" 


BOROK  SPRINGS  A  SENSATION  189 

Awed  by  the  spectacle,  and  filled  with  dread  of 
this  mighty  being,  little  Borok  fell  upon  his  face, 
and  in  solemn  words  pledged  his  loyalty  to  the  will 
of  this  monarch  over  all  the  worlds. 

He  was  now  surely  in  that  other  world,  of 
which  he  had  heard  so  much  from  his  beloved 
Melka.    He  could  not  be  mistaken. 

Glancing  around  him,  his  eye  soon  caught  sight 
of  what  he  recognized  as  an  ancient  stairway  lead- 
ing down  to  the  sea  level  more  than  fifty  cubits 
below.  Though  largely  hidden  from  the  eye  by 
an  overgrowth  of  weeds,  the  stairs  were  clearly 
discernible.  But  before  descending,  he  gathered 
some  large  stones  which  he  piled  up  behind  the 
aperture,  lest  it  be  discovered  by  possible  pursuers. 

It  took  him  not  long  to  make  the  descent;  and 
after  a  day's  lonesome  journeyin^f  along  the  sea- 
coast,  he  came  to  the  outskirts  of  the  coast  city 
of  Umla,  which  lay  at  the  western  extremity  of 
the  Atlic  Canal.  In  this  last  stage  of  his  journey, 
he  used  the  utmost  precaution,  moving  stealthily 
on  among  the  numerous  huge  rocks  at  the  foot  of 
the  mountainous  embankment.  This  was  for  fear 
of  meeting  with  any  of  the  beasts  besieging  Atlo. 
But  he  met  with  no  trace  of  them;  and  finally,  dis- 
cerning the  approach  of  a  human  being,  he  ven- 
tured to  show  himself. 

From  this  Atlon  he  soon  learned  that  the  beast 


190  DOOMED 

war  was  nearing  an  end — the  superapes  being  con- 
fined within  a  narrow  strip  of  territory,  in  which 
they  would  soon  be  exterminated.  His  appear- 
ance as  a  stranger  in  the  land  made  it  necessary  to 
confide  to  the  Atlon  the  fact  of  his  coming  from 
Omshola,  of  which  he  had  much  to  tell.  By  the 
advice  of  this  man,  he  at  once  proceeded  to  Umla, 
and  there  presented  himself  before  its  Dodor  or 
governor.  To  the  Dodor  he  now  confided  his 
story  concerning  the  land  of  Omshola  and  its 
riches,  in  proof  of  which  he  exhibited  a  lot  of  the 
gold  and  gems  he  carried  on  his  person. 

The  story  seemed  incredible,  though  the  gems 
he  exhibited,  and  the  fact  that  little  Borok  was  a 
stranger  and  of  a  different  type  from  the  Atlons, 
went  far  toward  winning  at  least  some  consider- 
ation. 

Led  by  the  Dodor  to  his  oroto,  Borok  was 
formally  introduced,  and  allowed  to  tell  his  story. 
That  another  world  should  exist  so  near  to  Atlo, 
and  yet  never  have  been  heard  of  before,  seemed 
unbelievable.    What  were  they  to  think  of  it? 

But  when  he  spoke  of  their  Melka  as  a  woman 
who  had  been  abducted  from  Atlo  while  visiting 
a  friend  in  the  city  of  Nungo,  there  were  several 
among  his  hearers  who  recalled  hearing  of  the 
mysterious  disappearance  of  this  woman. 

The  news  of  his  strange  arrival,  and  of  his  tale. 


BOROK  SPRINGS  A  SENSATION  191 

was  now  bell-slgnalled  to  the  authorities  at  Atllc, 
who  immediately  replied  by  asking  for  the  dis- 
patch of  the  stranger  to  Atlic,  where  they  would 
examine  into  the  details  of  his  remarkable 
revelation. 

So  it  came  that,  borne  in  a  swift  jubret,  Borok 
the  next  day  found  himself  in  the  city  of  Atlic, 
lodged  in  White  Wing  oro  as  a  guest  of  the  State. 
Taken  afterwards  to  the  House  of  State  and 
brought  before  Melk  Mozo,  he  was  soon  engaged 
in  picturing  to  that  high  official  the  details  of  Om- 
sholan  life  and  its  government.  Its  crystal  roof  and 
gold-besprinkled  ground,  of  Its  Komylm  and  its 
free  tollers — of  the  old  rule  and  the  new  rule  insti- 
tuted through  the  wisdom  of  their  Melka — Queen 
Metel. 

King  Mozo  was  particularly  Interested  In  the 
route  by  which  he  had  left  Omshola,  and  also  that 
by  which  Metel  had  been  brought  Into  that  land. 

It  was  not  long  after,  before  Melk  Mozo  had 
dispatched  two  separate  expeditions  to  Investigate 
and  report  on  these  gateways  to  Omshola.  The 
expedition  to  the  sea  shore  entrance  was  accom- 
panied by  Borok,  and  had  no  difficulty  In  finding 
the  opening  and  effecting  an  entrance.  What  they 
saw  verified  his  story,  and  they  waited  not  any 
longer  to  return  and  report  what  they  had  found. 
..    .,  .  The  other  expedition  descended  the  Fiery 


192  DOOMED 

Pit,  but  only  to  find,  instead  of  an  opening  or  a 
door,  the  traces  of  an  opening  tliat  had  been  sealed 
up  with  cement.  Efforts  to  penetrate  this  barrier 
were  all  made  in  vain;  and  so  the  expedition  had  to 
report  failure. 

With  the  existence  of  Omshola  verified,  Borok 
found  ready  listeners  to  his  tales  concerning  this 
strange  land,  and  was  being  invited  to  entertain  in 
one  oroto  after  the  other — a  service  his  profession 
of  minstrel  well  fitted  him  for,  and  in  which  he 
delighted.  It  opened  a  new  and  highly  remuner- 
ative field  for  him,  and  led  him  soon  to  dismiss  all 
thought  of  using  the  gems  of  Omshola  to  buy 
castles  and  lands  in  the  outer  world.  It  is  also 
needless  to  say  that  what  he  learned  in  Atlo  went 
far  to  dispel  all  such  sordid  thoughts. 


CHAPTER  XI 

The  Invasion  of  Omshola 

In  leaving  the  Omshola  tunnel,  I  was  seated  in 
a  closed  conveyance  that  was  raised  to  the  level  of 
Nunga  Park,  when  its  door  was  opened  by  one  of 
my  attendants,  and  I  was  led  to  a  seat,  to  await  the 
exit  of  the  remaining  members  of  the  party. 

It  was  early  dawn,  and  our  first  move  was  to 
find  a  park  pavilion,  and  there  take  a  good  rest 
before  proceeding  any  further.  Accompanied  by 
an  attendant,  I  then  made  an  incursion  into  the 
town,  to  arrange  for  my  further  course. 

The  first  thing  I  therefore  did  was  to  visit 
Flying  Arrow  oro,  to  see  if  my  friend  Lesba  was 
still  there.  At  the  oro  I  was  sorely  disappointed 
on  learning  that  she  had  only  recently  left  for  the 
city  of  Gegra,  on  the  western  frontier,  so  as  to  be 
nearer  her  husband,  who  was  soon  to  start  on  a 
pioneering  expedition  in  Atlora.  The  oro  mother 
who  received  me  was  not  the  same  one  that  had 
taken  me  in  charge  on  my  previous  arrival;  and  so 
I  wasted  no  time,  but  left,  to  engage  a  number  of 
jubros  to  take  my  party  to  the  city  of  Atlic;  but 

193 


194  DOOMED 

not  before  T  had  sent  my  folks  a  bell-signal  dis- 
patch, saying  "Someone's  coming  up  tonight  from 
Nungo.    Will  be  a  surprise." 

From  the  jubro  agent  I  learned  that  the  beast 
war  was  still  on,  though  in  its  final  stage.  Within 
a  few  days  they  would  have  the  last  of  the  beasts 
exterminated.  They  were  at  present  hemmed  in 
within  a  narrow  strip  of  territory,  and  were  on  the 
verge  of  starvation. 

With  my  attendant,  I  now  stepped  into  one  of 
the  jubros;  and  soon  we  were  at  the  park  entrance, 
where  our  party  joined  us,  and  was  speedily  being 
borne  on  toward  our  destination  in  Atlic.  We 
made  no  stops,  save  for  food  and  refreshments, 
which  I  obtained  for  the  party  through  bartering 
away  my  store  of  kibos — these  being  gladly  re- 
ceived and  accepted  as  rare  curios,  which  in  this 
land  they  surely  were. 

It  was  just  the  hour  of  dusk  when  we  finally 
reached  Atlic;  and  making  straight  for  the  Red 
Star  oro,  I  was  rather  astonished  to  see  a  large 
assemblage  before  the  oro,  shouting  their  greet- 
ings; while  my  parents,  at  the  curb,  rushed  for- 
ward to  embrace  me.  One  after  the  other  seized 
me  in  their  arms,  and  with  tears  of  joy  gave  vent 
to  their  boundless  delight. 

I  was  immediately  ushered  into  our  family  quar- 
ters, and  my  party  was  taken  to  the  oroto.     To 


THE  INVASION  OF  OMSHOLA  195 

each  of  them  was  assigned  a  private  guest  room, 
and  every  attention  given  to  enable  their  toilet  to 
be  made  prior  to  re-assembling  for  supper  in  a 
dining  hall  reserved  for  their  exclusive  use. 

"How  did  you  know,  mother/'  I  afterwards 
asked,  "that  the  dispatch  was  from  me?" 

"We  had  heard  but  yesterday  a  report  of  your 
strange  adventure.  We  could  at  first  hardly  be- 
lieve it;  but  your  dispatch  seemed  to  confirm  the 
truth  of  the  report." 

"That  I  have  come  from  this  strange  under- 
ground world,  of  which  I  am  the  queen,  is  true, 
every  word  of  it.  But  I  cannot  comprehend  how 
news  of  the  affair  could  have  reached  Atlo.  That 
puzzles  me." 

"The  report  came  to  Atlo  through  a  dwarf, 
who  seems  to  have  discovered  a  new  outlet  from 
Omshola.     Do  you  know  of  such  a  person?" 

"Why,  that  must  be  my  court  minstrel,  Borok, 
who  disappeared  mysteriously  only  a  few  days 
before  my  departure.    Is  he  still  In  Atlo?" 

"I  believe  he  has  left,"  Interposed  my  father, 
"to  accompany  the  expedition  sent  out  to  investi- 
gate his  discovery.  They  are  expected  back  in 
another  day,  and  you'll  then  have  a  chance  to  see 
him.  .  ,  .  But  did  you  know  that  the  Omsholan 
tunnel  mouth  in  the  Fiery  Pit  had  been  located, 


196  DOOMED 

and  found  sealed  up  with  an  Incredibly  hard 
cement?     It  will  never  be  used  again." 

This  unexpected  news  led  me  at  once  to  suspect 
the  closing  to  be  the  work  of  conspirators.  It  was 
done  undoubtedly  by  the  Komyim,  with  the  object 
of  barring  my  return  and  setting  on  the  throne  one 
of  their  number,  through  whom  the  toilers  of  the 
land  would  again  be  doomed  to  bondage.  I  could 
attach  no  other  significance  to  the  act. 

How  important  now  was  the  discovery  made  by 
little  Borok!  I  could  have  hugged  him  for  joy, 
to  think  how  my  return  now  would  take  the  con- 
spirators by  surprise,  and  save  my  people  from  the 
degradation  and  wrong  sought  to  be  imposed  on 
them.  I  did  not  need  to  await  the  return  of  the 
expedition.  The  presence  of  Borok  in  Atlo  was 
proof  enough  of  the  genuineness  of  the  discovery. 

What  joy  we  had  in  the  hours  now  spent  in 
rehearsing  the  varied  experiences  of  the  past 
years,  those  of  my  parents  in  Atlic,  and  mine  in  the 
land  of  Omshola.  How  much  there  was  to  tell  of, 
and  how  much  that  was  reminiscent  of  my  former 
days  in  Atlo.  Regarding  my  betrothed,  I  learned 
that  he  had  served  creditably  throughout  the  war, 
winning  more  than  one  decoration  for  his  bravery; 
also  that  he  was  at  present  engaged  in  one  of  the 
many  pioneering  expeditions  sent  into  the  wilds 
of  Atlora. 


THE  INVASION  OF  OMSHOLA  197 

On  the  following  day,  I  went,  accompanied  by 
my  father  and  my  official  deputation,  to  be  pre- 
sented to  King  Mozo. 

The  news  concerning  me,  he  had  learned 
through  Borok;  and  also  of  the  sealing  of  the 
Omsholan  tunnel  mouth.  He  was  therefore  de- 
lighted to  learn  that  I  had  come  and  might  now 
take  advantage  of  the  newly  discovered  outlet  to 
return  and  surprise  the  conspirators,  who  had 
manifestly  taken  advantage  of  my  absence  to  bar 
my  return. 

When  I  mentioned  to  him  the  main  object  of 
my  call  and  visit  to  Atlo,  to  enter  into  a  treaty 
with  Atlo  by  which  the  two  lands  would  be  united 
for  their  mutual  defense  and  for  their  mutual 
benefit  in  carrying  on  trade  between  them,  he  cor- 
dially approved  the  idea.  Through  Minstrel 
Borok  he  had  already  acquired  some  insight  into 
the  extent  of  Omshola  and  the  form  of  its  govern- 
ment, as  well  as  the  goal  toward  which  it  was 
being  guided.  All  this  he  heartily  approved;  and 
so  it  was  not  long  before  a  treaty  was  formulated, 
to  the  satisfaction  of  both  principals. 

The  substance  of  this  treaty,  which  was  after- 
wards duly  signed  by  the  members  of  my  deputa- 
tion, and  also  by  the  proper  signatories  of  Atlo, 
called  for  the  trade  between  the  two  lands  to  be 
reduced  to  a  basis  of  barter,  though  for  some  time 


198  DOOMED 

kibos  might  be  acceptable  as  commodities — there 
being  a  certain  prospect  of  a  large  demand  for 
them  in  Atlo,  to  serve  as  curios.  As  soon,  how- 
ever, as  the  simultaneous  use  of  silver  and  bronze 
shekels  could  be  inaugurated  in  Omshola,  the  use 
of  bronze  shekels  would  automatically  confine 
trade  to  a  basis  of  barter.  As  in  Atlo,  its  prop- 
erties were  all  to  be  made  inalienable,  by  endow- 
ing all  persons,  at  the  proper  time,  with  a  prop- 
erty portion,  as  the  reader  already  understands. 
None  were  to  be  born  as  either  chattel  or  free 
slaves.  Its  world  was  to  be  divided  into  no  such 
riff  raff  as  lords  and  outcasts.  They  who  by  birth 
inherited  the  NEEDS  of  civilization  were  also  to 
inherit  its  MEANS.  Society  had  rights  over  its 
members  and  it  also  had  obligations  to  them. 

In  the  future  government  of  Omshola,  whether 
it  was  to  be  monarchical  or  democratic,  or  a  min- 
gling of  the  two  extremes,  all  authority  was  to  be 
limited  within  the  purposes  for  which  It  was  given. 
Usurpation  of  authority,  and  evil  use  of  power, 
were  to  be  severely  dealt  with,  penalties  ranging 
according  to  the  degree  of  usurpation.  .  .  .  Politi- 
cal organizations  had  Invariably  to  state  their 
objects  in  definite  form;  and  when  these  had  been 
achieved,  they  passed  out  of  existence.  They  were 
not  allowed  to  develop  into  domineering  machines; 
nor,  as  in  Mamnist  lands,  to  become  the  Instru- 


THE  INVASION  OF  OMSHOLA  199 

merits  of  organized  wealth,  ruling  all  parties  In 
the  major  matters  of  government  by  which 
profiteering  was  kept  fortified,  and  in  minor  mat- 
ters keeping  up  to  the  people  the  pretense  of  self- 
government.  Such  political  masquerading  was 
not  to  be  carried  on  in  the  new  Omshola.  Its 
scheme  of  government  was  not  to  hold  down  Its 
masses  while  their  pockets  were  being  picked. 

The  uses  of  both  money  and  wealth — the  domi- 
nant implements  of  Industrial  co-operation — were 
also  to  be  confined  within  the  purposes  they  had  to 
serve.  They  were  under  no  circumstances  to  de- 
generate into  implements  of  perversion  and  extor- 
tion. They  were  to  remain  as  SERVANTS  of 
toil,  and  not  its  MASTERS. 

With  the  administrative  departments  of  govern- 
ment given  long  terms  of  office,  when  not  for  life, 
but  subject  to  ejection  on  gross  Incompetency  or 
misbehavior,  separated  from  and  not  In  control  of 
the  department  assigned  to  guard  its  fundamental 
law — the  primary  requisites  of  Atlism — there 
could  be  little  danger  of  any  serious  disturbance 
ever  Interfering  with  Its  affairs.  ...  Its  funda- 
mental law  was  also  made  practically  unalterable, 
by  requiring  three  successive  majority  votes  of  the 
people,  given  at  periods  of  ten  years  apart  for  any 
modification. 


200  DOOMED 

With  this  program  decided  on,  preparations 
were  at  once  begun  for  the  invasion  of  Omshola, 
and  my  re-establishment  on  its  throne,  should  such 
a  step  be  required. 

Since  the  roadway  for  a  long  way  on  the  sea 
front  was  impassable  for  vehicles,  we  made  use  of 
a  few  large  jubrets  to  convey  our  expedition  to  the 
spot  of  the  stairway,  which,  with  Borok's  help, 
was  finally  distinguished.  A  suitable  landing  place 
was  also  located  not  far  away;  and  after  prodi- 
gious labors,  the  stairway  was  remodeled  Into  an 
inclined  plane,  extended  with  numerous  twists  and 
turns,  so  as  to  make  the  ascent  by  jubros  possible. 

The  next  step  was  to  enlarge  the  opening 
through  the  wall  of  Omshola;  and  after  that,  to 
cut  down  and  remove  the  thorn  bushes  in  the  inter- 
vening jungle.  .  ,  .  With  a  large  force  of  men  all 
these  things  were  easily  accomplished;  and  soon 
our  jubros  were  pushing  their  way  through  the 
wilds  of  Omshola. 

Arriving  in  the  settled  portions  of  the  land,  we 
hurried  forward,  letting  our  jubros  shriek  their 
terrifying  sounds  Into  the  ears  of  the  natives,  who 
thereupon  hid  In  their  houses,  allowing  us  to  move 
on  toward  Omsh  without  news  of  our  coming 
teaching  the  capital  before  us. 

Arriving  at  Omsh,  we  at  once  made  'for  Its  royal 
palace,   which  we   surrounded  with  our  jubros, 


THE  INVASION  OF  OMSHOLA  201 

within  whose  circle  none  were  allowed  to  pass. 
...  I  then  sent  Borok  for  Kosoki  Samba;  and, 
after  a  brief  consultation  with  him,  in  which  I 
learned  of  what  had  transpired  in  my  absence,  and 
of  the  present  state  of  affairs,  I  at  once  arranged 
to  have  our  jubros  shriek  an  alarm  that  would 
arrest  all  further  proceedings  in  the  audience 
chamber.  Then,  accompanied  on  the  arm  of 
Kosoki  Samba,  and  preceded  by  a  force  of  armed 
Atlons,  I  was  taken  into  the  hall  of  assembly  and 
seated  on  the  throne,  in  the  manner  previously 
described.  As  to  what  followed,  the  reader 
already  knows, 


PART  in 


UNITED  AT  LAST— AS  TOLD  BY 
PRINCE  LOAB 


CHAPTER  I 

The  Beast  Behind  the  Cloud 

Several  years  had  I  now  been  traversing  the 
wilds  of  Atlora,  engaged  in  the  pioneering  branch 
of  Atlo's  mihtary  service,  encountering  dangers, 
and  enduring  hardships  I  would  never  have 
deemed  possible  for  me  to  survive.  But  such  is 
life — a  grand  episode  of  plunging  into  dangers, 
courting  doubts  and  facing  perplexities,  while  ever 
dreading  and  resisting  them.  How  many  bogeys 
our  energies,  in  their  pent  up  confinement,  raise, 
meaning  no  more  than  shadow  to  substance. 

I  was  by  this  time  a  lieutenant,  serving  under 
Captain  Kapso,  the  husband  of  Metel's  friend, 
Lesba.  Poor  fellow,  doomed  soon  after  to  meet 
a  dreadful  fate ! 

How  deeply  some  of  our  adventures  remain  im- 
pressed upon  my  mind !  None  more  so  than  that 
in  which  we  slew  the  great  mammoth — the  fiery 
dragon  we  caught  napping  in  a  vast  cavern.  How 
stealthily  we  approached  the  monster;  and  then, 
unexpectedly,  as  one  of  us  stumbled  over  a  rock, 

205 


9o6  D(X)MED 

he  was  awakened,  and  with  a  thunderous  roar 
sprang  at  us,  scattering  us  in  a  panicky  fright  be- 
fore we  had  the  chance  to  fire  a  single  poison  dart 
into  his  huge  body.  I  still  wonder  how  we  man- 
aged to  get  out  of  the  cavern. 

To  this  day  I  pride  myself  on  the  fact  that, 
reaching  the  exit,  I  was  the  first  to  recover  my 
senses  and  to  puncture  the  breast  of  the  mammoth 
with  one  of  our  deadly  darts.  Others  followed 
my  example;  and  before  one  could  count  twenty, 
as  many  darts  were  embedded  in  the  monster's 
flesh.  He  was  now  practically  done  for,  all  but 
the  fearful  convulsions  of  his  gigantic  frame, 
wildly  flopping  about  with  tremendous  bounds  and 
thumps,  with  deep  bellowing  and  blood-curdling 
shrieks. 

Not  till  the  beast  had  ceased  to  move,  did  any 
of  us  dare  to  emerge  from  beneath  the  ledge  of 
rock  on  the  cliff  side,  where  we  had  taken  refuge 
— long  after  his  struggles  had  ceased,  and  the 
flames  issuing  from  his  huge  mouth  had  subsided. 

Six  members  of  our  force  were  slain  in  this  en- 
counter, and  as  many  more  had  received  serious 
wounds,  while  not  one  but  was  covered  with 
bruises  or  lamed  with  sprains. 

There  was  another  strange  adventure  we  had, 
in  which  our  entire  corps  remained  treed  in  an  oak 


THE  BEAST  BEHIND  THE  CLOUD         207 

grove  for  nigh  two  whole  weeks,  imprisoned  there 
by  a  host  of  spiked  reptiles,  called  daggersnakes, 
who  closely  resembled  the  crocodiles  I  had  seen 
m  the  river  Nil,  save  that  they  were  much  larger 
and  had  bodies  covered  with  horny  projections 
sharp  as  thorns.  The  hunger  and  thirst  we  suf- 
fered on  this  occasion  were  excruciating;  and  al- 
ready we  had  given  up  hope  of  escape  from  the 
doom  of  starvation. 

We  had  been  following  along  the  banks  of  a 
great  river,  approach  to  which  was  barred  by  an 
endless  line  of  these  monsters.    Desiring  to  ascer- 
tain how  aggressive  they  were,  we  had  determined 
on  having  a  trial  combat,  for  which  purpose  we 
had  smgled  out  a  big  bull  daggersnake  basking  in 
the  sun  all  by  himself.     While  this  combat  was  in 
progress,  those  not  engaged  therein  climbed  into 
the  tree  tops  of  an  oak  grove  nearby,  from  which 
to  witness  the   affair.   .  .  Though  our  men  suc- 
ceeded m  slaying  the  beast,  they  had  a  narrow 
escape— taking  refuge  finally  with  their  compan- 
ions m  the  grove,  since  the  shrieks  of  the  dying 
monster  had  attracted  to  the  spot  a  large  number 
of  beasts  from  the  river  bank. 

Contrary  to  expectation,  however,  the  beasts 
would  not  take  their  departure— more  and  more 
of  them  gathering  in  the  grove,  and  remaining 
motionless  as  if  to  keep  us  under  siege. 


2o8  DOOMED 

That  was  evidently  their  intention,  for  they  re- 
mained on  guard  nearly  two  weeks  that  seemed 
longer  than  eternity,  while  we  had  nothing  better 
to  assuage  our  thirst  than  the  chewing  of  the  oak 
leaves  and  naught  else  to  appease  our  hunger 
than  the  bitter  acorns  with  which  the  grove 
abounded. 

We  were  already  reduced  to  mere  skeletons 
when,  glancing  downward,  one  morning,  we  be- 
held the  entire  ground  black  with  creeping  things 
I  was  told  were  scavenger  ants.  They  were  on 
the  march,  and  the  daggersnakes  dared  not  impede 
their  way  lest  the  countless  myriads  of  tiny  crea- 
tures should  devour  them  as  if  they  were  no  more 
than  so  much  vegetation. 

It  was  after  the  scavenger  ants  had  passed,  that 
we  decided  on  a  desperate  course — descending 
while  the  beasts  were  still  hiding  in  the  depths  of 
the  stream,  and  fortunately  thus  making  our 
escape. 

Our  jubros,  whose  food  stores  had  been  un- 
touched, were  still  where  they  had  been  left;  and 
so  we  clambered  hastily  into  them  and  speeded  be- 
yond reach  of  the  beasts,  before  we  stopped  to 
appease  our  hunger  and  thirst.  We  were  cured 
of  all  further  desire  to  witness  any  combats  with 
daggersnakes,  and  were  happy  to  have  escaped 
with  our  lives. 


THE  BEAST  BEHIND  THE  CLOUD  209 

But  what  were  these  adventures  compared  with 
that  which  we  had  a  few  days  later,  terminating 
so  disastrously,  I  never  can  think  of  it  without 
tears  gathering  in  my  eyes. 

Upon  what  trifling  incidents  our  fates  often 
hinge !  Who  would  have  thought  that  the  dark 
eye  glasses  in  my  pocket  at  the  time  of  being  cast 
upon  the  seashore  at  Atllc,  were  to  save  me  from 
a  dreadful  calamity,  through  which  my  body  and 
my  soul  would  have  been  forever  merged  in  a 
granite  image  of  myself.  Of  our  entire  corps,  I 
alone  escaped  this  awful  doom. 

How  this  came  to  pass,  I  will  now  endeavor  to 
explain.  My  eyes  having  on  divers  occasions  suf- 
fered from  the  intense  glare  of  the  desert  sands, 
I  one  day  bethought  me  of  wearing  those  dark 
eye  glasses  of  which  I  but  now  made  mention. 
These  afforded  me  such  substantial  relief,  that  I 
continued  to  wear  them;  and  because  of  their  cov- 
ering my  eyes  at  the  time  our  corps  was  assaulted 
by  a  mysterious  beast  never  before  encountered  in 
Atlo,  had  I  the  good  fortune  to  escape  with  my 
life. 

We  were  following  the  course  of  a  wide  but 
shallow  stream  that  crept  along,  with  many  turns, 
over  the  sandy  soil.  Though  easily  fordable  at 
most  points,  one  might  also  anywhere  encounter 
therein  treacherous  quicksands. 


210  DOOMED 

Now  a  peculiar  feature  of  this  sluggish  stream 
was  its  frequent  disappearance,  only  later  on  to 
reappear  from  the  underground  channels  it  had 
meanwhile  followed.  This  queer  diversion  into 
the  bowels  of  the  earth,  reputed  to  be  infested 
with  legions  of  foul  spirits,  demons  and  jinns,  be- 
longing in  the  domains  of  Sat,  the  Evil  One,  gave 
us  much  uneasiness,  as  if  auguring  the  approach  of 
some  impending  catastrophe.  For  who  had  ever 
heard  of  a  stream  acting  with  siich  contrariety? 

Of  daggersnakes  its  water  contained  no  trace; 
but  of  deadly  serpents  the  number  was  beyond 
count.  On  its  banks  we  frequently  encountered 
huge  hillocks  formed  of  nothing  but  these  writh- 
ing creatures,  all  interwoven  in  one  loathsome 
mass,  with  hissing  heads  protruded  at  all  points. 

Our  aborigine  guide,  little  Nobo,  who  was 
familiar  with  the  region,  and  had  a  keen  scent  for 
every  change  in  the  state  of  the  atmosphere,  was 
standing  near  me,  one  morning,  sniffing  the  air, 
with  a  very  puzzled  expression  upon  his  counte- 
nance. 

"Him  smell  no  much  like!"  was  the  muttered 
refrain  he  kept  constantly  repeating,  while  dubi- 
ously shaking  his  head.  "No  like  him  smell,  no 
like  him!" 

Nothing  more  explicit  could  be  drawn  from  the 
native;  and  his  baffled  air  made  me  apprehensive. 


THE  BEAST  BEHIND  THE  CLOUD         211 

To  all  my  attempts  to  coax  out  of  him  an  ex- 
planation, he  made  no  answer;  and  then  suddenly 
pointed,  triumphantly,  to  a  faint  speck  on  the 
horizon. 

"Him  cloud,  him  smell.  Nobo  sure  him  cloud 
smell!" 

What  could  the  little  rascal  mean?  Whoever 
heard  of  a  cloud  possessing  an  odor? 

Time  brings  forth  many  surprises;  and  for  me, 
this  was  one  of  them.  For  soon  after,  both  Lieu- 
tenant Marco  and  myself  were  able  to  detect  the 
peculiar  odor  to  which  our  guide  had  referred.  It 
was  now  noticeable  as  a  distinct  and  pronounced 
odor,  as  If  coming  from  burning  sulphur.  There 
was  no  way  of  accounting  for  its  presence  in  the 
open  desert,  any  more  than  of  attributing  Its 
source  to  a  cloud. 

Steadily  the  cloud  was  coming  nearer,  growing 
more  ominous  as  it  approached. 

"What  sort  of  devil  can  it  be,  hiding  In  the 
cloud?"  I  asked,  throwing  out  a  random  guess. 

"It's  some  sort  of  devil,"  my  comrade  jestingly 
retorted,  "for  It's  my  humble  opinion,  I  assure 
you,  that  the  odor  comes  from  some  fiery  creature 
— If  not  a  devil,  perhaps  a  dragon." 

"If  it's  a  dragon,  Marco,  he'll  soon  have  to 
show  himself.     He  can't  keep  on  forever  follow- 


212  DOOMED 

ing  the  uncertain  course  of  an  Idle  cloud.     He 
surely  isn't  glued  to  it." 

"But  what  if  this  were  a  cunning  old  dragon 
making  use  of  the  cloud  merely  as  a  screen,  thq 
better  to  surprise  his  quarry,  in  swooping  down 
upon  it?" 

"At  any  rate,"  I  concluded,  "he'll  bear  close 
watching;  and  I,  for  one,  will  keep  my  eye  on 
him." 

While  intently  observing  this  mysterious  cloud, 
we  were  not  a  little  astonished  to  see  the  dark 
mass  make  a  sharp  turn  from  its  previous  course 
— an  act  so  uncloudlike  and  contrary  to  all  our 
previous  conceptions  of  cloud  decorum,  it  put  our 
nerves  on  edge. 

For  a  dragon  to  suddenly  swerve  from  its 
course  was  to  be  expected;  but  for  a  cloud  to  do 
so,  was  in  defiance  of  all  precedent.  Was  a  dragon 
really  behind  it?  If  so,  what  had  become  of  him, 
after  the  swerving  of  the  cloud?  Can  he  also 
have  made  the  sharp  curve? 

The  queer  antics  of  this  odorous  cloud  were  a 
puzzle  to  baffle  wiser  heads  than  ours.  Nor  was 
the  matter  any  nearer  solution  when,  soon  after, 
the  cloud  took  another  flie^ht,  alighting  upon  the 
crest  of  a  grassy  knoll  not  far  away. 

Nobo,  seeming  to  comprehend  our  bewilder- 
ment, shook  his  frowsy  head,  entreating  us  to  stay 


THE  BEAST  BEHIND  THE  CLOUD  213 

away.  "No  go  him!  No  go!  Him  devil — kill 
you.  No  go  him,  no,  no!"  he  fairly  shrieked  at 
us. 

But  we  officers  were  broadminded  Atlons,  to 
be  frightened  by  no  devil.  We  had  also  an  ex- 
ample to  set  for  our  followers. 

So,  heedless  of  the  guide's  expostulations,  we 
determined  to  investigate  the  strange  cloud.  Ac- 
companied therefore  with  an  ammunition  jubro, 
and  each  of  us  carrying  his  blow  gun  and  darts, 
we  followed  Captain  Kapso  to  the  outskirts  of 
the  cloud-capped  knoll,  leaving  our  force  of 
civilians  with  the  camp. 

Arrived  at  the  base  of  the  knoll,  an  impene- 
trable darkness  confronted  us,  impregnated  with 
a  powerful  sulphurous  odor.  If  the  cloud  really 
veiled  some  horrible  mammoth,  devil,  dragon  or 
other  weird  monster,  it  were  well,  so  we  reasoned, 
to  avoid  entering  its  dark  interior  until,  after 
skirting  its  edges,  we  had  obtained  some  glimpse 
of  the  beast  it  held  within. 

While  thus  engaged  in  peering  into  the  dark 
mass,  an  unearthly  shriek  suddenly  issued  from 
its  interior — proclaiming  unmistakably  the  pres- 
ence therein  of  some  dread  terror,  a  mammoth, 
devil  or  unknown  horror,  about  to  spring  upon  us. 

Our  blow  guns  were  all  charged  with  darts 
ready  to  be  fired  Into  the  beast;  but  unfortunately, 


214  DOOMED 

the  creature  remained  Invisible  beneath  its  thick 
veil  of  smoke. 

How  eagerly  we  craned  our  necks  to  secure  the 
merest  glimpse  of  the  horror;  but  all  in  vain. 
Then  unexpectedly,  and  all  too  soon,  our  eyes 
were  blinded  by  the  flash  of  two  great  eyes  glar- 
ing an  intense  light  into  our  faces.  My  blood  in- 
stantly seemed  to  be  curdling  in  my  veins,  as  if 
atrophied  under  some  dread  spell.  I  should  have 
instantaneously  succumbed,  but  for  intuitively 
concentrating  every  shred  of  vital  energy  into  one 
tremendous  mental  effort,  under  which  the  force 
of  the  spell  was  broken,  and  I  regained  some  con- 
trol of  myself. 

With  a  superhuman  energy,  I  leaped  into  the 
ammunition  jubro,  and  started  it  off.  Its  driver 
sat  beside  me,  staring  vacantly — a  mere  form  in- 
animate. I  happened  to  touch  his  hand,  only  to 
feel  it  hard  as  rock,  clammy  and  cold.  He  had 
been  turned  into  stone. 

Reaching  the  camp,  I  found  the  civilians  In  a 
flutter  of  excitement,  and  quaking  with  fear.  They 
had  heard  the  weird  cry  of  the  beast,  and  seen 
the  terrible  light  flashing  from  its  eyes;  and  they 
had  also  noted  Its  paralyzing  effect  upon  the  corps, 
with  a  single  exception  left  standlnoj  Immovable  in 
their  posture  of  tense  gazing,  with  heads  still 
craned  forward,  like  a  group  of  lifeless  statues. 


THE  BEAST  BEHIND  THE  CLOUD         215 

Observing  the  staring  figure  of  the  jubro  driver 
at  my  side,  they  sadly  shook  their  heads ;  and  point- 
ing to  Captain  Kapso's  corps,  cried  with  one  ac- 
cord :  "Let's  away,  comrades,  lest  we  also  perish 
in  this  manner!" 

The  guide,  Nobo,  whose  timely  warning  had 
gone  unheeded,  now  assured  us  the  beast  was  noth- 
ing less  than  a  basilisk — one  of  the  various  flying 
serpents  haunting  the  fens  of  Atloraba.  This 
beast,  half  bird,  half  serpent,  exudes  from  its  body 
a  heavy  vapor,  much  resembling  smoke,  and 
emanating  from  the  furnace  heat  of  its  body, 
whence  are  derived  the  intense  lights  flashing 
from  its  eyes. 

Nobo's  version  was  undoubtedly  correct,  since 
rumors  of  such  a  beast  had  been  current  in  Atlo; 
and  even  in  Phoenicia;  and  also,  while  at  Athens, 
reports  of  its  dreadful  powers  were  not  wanting. 
There  It  was  known  as  cockatrice,  and  often  as 
tsepha,  as  well  as  basilisk.  That  the  cloud  was 
merely  the  exudation  from  its  body,  readily  ex- 
plained why  beast  and  cloud  kept  such  close  com- 
pany— as  if  they  had  been  body  and  skin. 

We  lost  no  needless  time  In  starting  upon  our 
mournful  journey  to  Gegra,  where  report  would 
have  to  be  made  of  the  disastrous  catastrophe  to 
our  expedition. 


2i6  DOOMED 

On  the  way  back,  the  thought  came  to  me,  what 
if  this  terrible  beast  were  to  invade  and  ravage 
Atlo?  What  if  this  were  merely  a  straggler  in  ad- 
vance of  a  host  of  similar  beasts?  What  hope 
could  there  be  for  Atlo  in  a  conflict  with  beasts 
whose  mere  glance  could  slay  men  by  the  hun- 
dreds? And  flying  in  the  upper  atmosphere,  how 
was  their  advance  to  be  checked?  Our  ironclad 
jubros  would  be  of  small  avail  against  such  a  foe. 
The  very  thought  of  this  dire  menace  made  my 
poor  head  swim. 

I  had  heard  of  a  wonderful  magician  named 
Gauril,  who  resided  at  Gegra,  and  was  reputed  a 
perfect  genius.  For  three  years  he  had  been  en- 
gaged in  designing  a  magic  bird  that  was  to  soar 
in  the  heavens,  carrying  upon  its  back  human  rid- 
ers— a  sort  of  air  jubro.  Perchance  this  man 
might  succeed  in  perfecting  his  bird,  perched  on 
which,  we  might  cope  with  the  dread  basilisks. 
Why  not  see  this  man,  and  stir  him  up  to  hasten 
the  perfection  of  his  bird. 

This  I  determined  to  do.  But  what  a  slender 
thread  it  was  on  which  to  hang  the  fate  of  Atlo! 

To  the  home  of  this  famed  magician  I  never- 
theless hastened,  on  my  arrival  at  Gegra,  finding 
him  in  Raven  Oro.  The  tale  of  our  sad  experience 
appalled  him,  and  was  the  greater  shock,  since  a 
beloved  nephew  of   his   was   a  member   of   the 


THE   BEAST  BEHIND  THE  CLOUD  217 

stricken  corps.  The  deplorable  fact,  however, 
only  spurred  him  to  apply  greater  energy  to  the 
completion  of  his  bird. 

"My  bird,  I'm  sure,  will  do  the  work,  friend 
Loab,"  said  he,  "and  go  far  in  helping  us  destroy 
the  basihsks.  There's  only  a  single  detail  still  to 
be  mastered;  and  then  she'll  be  ready  to  soar  over 
the  very  clouds!" 

How  well  I  knew  this  hope  had  been  his  light 
from  day  to  day,  for  two  long  years,  and  that  his 
three  days  might  stretch  into  three  centuries.  Only 
too  well  I  knew  this ;  and  yet  I  also  began  to  hope ; 
for  despair  is  an  addled  bug,  that  catches  at 
straws. 

From  Gauril's  I  proceeded  to  military  head- 
quarters, as  the  only  surviving  officer  of  our  corps, 
to  make  an  official  report.  I  had  hardly  finished, 
when  Chief  Matla,  all  in  a  tremor  of  agitation, 
recited  to  me  the  substance  of  a  message  just  re- 
ceived from  Mother  Mafra.  The  seer  had  been 
visited  in  a  dream  by  the  goddess  Atl,  who,  from 
the  heavens  above,  had  witnessed  the  fate  of  our 
corps.  She  had  also  recognized  in  the  basilisk 
mask  the  demon  god  Mam.  To  this  evil  spirit, 
the  struggle  had  been  merely  a  trial  combat,  whose 
outcome  had  already  decided  Mam  to  raise  hosts 
of  basilisks  in  Atloraba,  with  which  to  invade  Atlo 
and  destroy  her  people. 


ex8  DOOMED 

Preparations  for  the  new  movement  had  al- 
ready begun  in  the  desert  of  Korol,  where  a  host 
of  the  beasts  were  assembled  to  cover  the  desert 
sands  with  their  eggs;  after  hatching  which,  the 
young  were  to  be  allowed  to  mature,  and  were 
then  to  be  led  on  to  Atlo. 

As  a  counterstroke,  the  great  god  AT,  aware 
of  the  wicked  design,  had  already  begun  the  frus- 
tration of  Mam's  scheme  by  hurling  from  the 
clouds  vast  showers  of  hailstones  that  were  smash- 
ing the  basilisk  eggs  as  fast  as  laid.  This  com- 
pelled the  beasts  to  leave  the  desert  and  to  con- 
ceal their  eggs  in  caves.  But  the  caves,  being  cold 
and  damp,  permitted  not  of  any  hatching  until 
after  the  Evil  One,  from  the  lower  world,  had 
shot  upward  Into  that  region  vast  heat  blasts, 
through  which  the  eggs  might  in  time  hatch.  AT'S 
counterstroke,  while  not  preventing  the  eggs  from 
being  hatched,  was  of  inestimable  service  for  the 
delay  it  caused,  as  shall  in  time  be  seen. 

Returning  to  the  shop  of  Magician  Gaurll,  to 
urge  him  to  speed  his  work,  I  was  pushed  aside  by 
the  frenzied  man,  who  was  rushing  madly  hither 
and  thither  among  the  junk  of  queer  contrivances 
lumbering  up  his  shop. 

"Can't  you  see,  my  friend,"  he  shouted,  "that 
I've  no  time  to  spare  1    My  bird's  all  ready,  and 


THE  BEAST  BEHIND  THE  CLOUD         219 

I  must  take  it  at  once  to  military  headquarters. 
It's  all  together  now,  and  in  yon  sack."  With 
these  words,  he  grabbed  a  huge  sack,  flung  it  over 
his  shoulders,  and  started  with  a  limp  to  drag  it 
off. 

Seeing  the  sack  was  much  too  heavy  for  him,  I 
relieved  him  of  the  burden — striding  off  with  it, 
while  he  followed  panting  at  my  heels. 

*'Do  you  know  I've  tried  my  bird  already  on 
the  oro  roof?  Yes,  friend,  it's  at  last  perfected. 
Got  the  missing  idea  just  after  you  left.  It  works 
like  a  charm !  Why,  before  a  week  Is  past,  you'll 
see  me  soaring  over  Atlic  with  one  so  big,  your 
people  will  think  it's  a  dragon  coming  after 
them!" 

We  soon  had  the  model  at  Chief  Matla's  for 
another  trial;  and  there,  to  the  amazement  of  all 
spectators,  it  performed  wonderful  gyrations  as 
gracefully  as  a  live  bird.  It  was  undoubtedly  a 
complete  success;  and  should  a  full  grown  craft 
do  as  well,  it  augured  well  for  Atlo's  outlook  in 
the  approaching  basilisk  war. 

So  pleased  with  the  exhibition  were  Chief  Matia 
and  his  staff,  that  Gauril  was  at  once  given  a  free 
hand  in  further  operations,  and  assured  all  the 
help,  financial  and  otherwise,  he  would  call  for 
from  Atlo's  Push  Wing. 


220  DOOMED 

A  fact  that  Gauril  had  at  the  time  failed  to 
mention  was  that  his  final  inspiration  had  come 
from  the  goddess  Atl,  whose  spirit  had  mingled 
with  his  own  and  so  stimulated  his  imaginative 
powers  as  to  immediately  evolve  the  idea  he  had 
so  long  vainly  striven  for.  Many  a  time  since 
has  he  mentioned  the  part  the  goddess  Atl  had  in 
perfecting  his  great  bird. 


CHAPTER  II 

The  Basilisk  Invasion 

Granted  a  brief  furlough,  on  my  return  to 
Gegra,  I  hastened  to  pay  a  visit  to  my  early  friends 
and  benefactors  at  Atlic,  the  worthy  physician 
Gomar  and  his  spouse  Mafra.  Were  they  still 
living,  and  had  they  heard  aught  regarding  their 
lost  daughter,  my  betrothed? 

I  met  them  both  at  the  Red  Star,  where  they 
gave  me  a  hearty  welcome,  both  betraying  signs 
of  having  somewhat  aged  through  the  sorrows  and 
anxieties  to  which  they  had  been  subjected.  For 
the  first  time  I  now  learned  of  the  safe  return  of 
Metel,  and  of  her  strange  rise  to  the  throne  of 
Omshola — a  world  I  surmised  as  lying  underneath 
a  portion  of  Atlora  that  was  inhabited  by  neither 
man  nor  beast,  being  one  barren  vast  of  impene- 
trable crystal  soil,  chippings  of  which  I  had  there 
gathered  and  still  carried  about  my  person. 

The  joy  upon  learning  of  the  rare  fortune  of 
my  betrothed  was  not  without  its  sting,  leaving 
us  parted  now  by  an  impassable  abyss  as  wide  as 
that  of  death.     How,  occupying  the  exalted  sta- 


222  DOOMED 

tion  on  the  Omsholan  throne,  could  I  now  offer 
her  my  hand?  1  said  nothing  to  hec  parents.  Let 
the  secret  of  our  betrothal  be  buried  with  our 
bones.  No  one  should  ever  learn  of  it  from  my 
lips;  that  I  vowed. 

To  both  Physician  Gomar  and  Mother  Mafra, 
I  had  come  as  one  risen  from  the  dead,  though 
they  carefully  concealed  the  fact.  Had  they  not 
known  of  the  destruction  of  the  entire  corps  of 
Captain  Kapso?  And  was  not  I  a  member  of  the 
corps?  Imagine  then  their  astonishment  when  1 
informed  them  of  the  manner  of  my  escape;  and 
the  joy  they  felt,  on  being  told  of  the  success  of 
Gauril's  model  bird. 

It  was  late  that  night  before  we  separated,  lis- 
tening to  my  recitals  of  experiences  in  Atlora  and 
their  tales  enlightening  me  regarding  the  world 
of  Omshola  and  Metel's  success  in  wielding  the 
scepter  there. 

"Is  not  the  story  of  Omshola  like  a  fairy  tale?" 
suggested  Mafra. 

"So  also,"  I  replied,  "is  all  history,  rightly 
viewed  and  rightly  told — but  a  fairy  tale  for 
adults,  and  one  adults  should  never  despise." 

"And  you  once  thought  Atlo  was  a  fairy  world, 
did  you  not?" 

"And  think  so  still — in  fact  much  more  so  than 
Omshola." 


THE  BASILISK  INVASION  223 

Sauntering  along  on  Grand  Avenue,  in  Atlic, 
a  few  days  later,  I  beheld  a  great  concourse  of 
people  gazing  skyward  and  showing  a  strange 
alarm  upon  their  countenances.  No  wonder,  see- 
ing that  from  afar  could  be  seen  approaching  a 
great  mammoth,  buzzing  away  with  a  weird,  ear- 
splitting    sound Suddenly    it    dawned 

upon  me  that  this  was  nothing  less  than  Gauril's 
bird,  enlarged  and  made  in  the  form  of  a  gigantic 
wasp,  whose  sonorous  buzzing  was  enough  to 
frighten  men. 

Nearer  and  nearer  it  approached,  until  the 
crowd  began  to  scatter,  flying  from  it  in  terror. 
I  could  soon  distinguish  the  figure  of  a  man 
mounted  upon  its  back.  It  was  none  other  than 
my  friend  Gauril. 

"Be  not  alarmed,  good  people,"  he  cried,  "I'm 
riding  neither  dragon  nor  basilisk,  but  an  artificial 
wasp,  to  sting  basilisks  with.  I'll  be  down  with  it 
in  an  instant." 

It  was  a  sight  to  wonder  at,  to  see  the  way  the 
mammoth  wasp  came  circling  down — finally  strik- 
ing the  earth  with  a  loud  thud.  It  was  my  good 
fortune  to  help  extricating  the  magician  from  its 
mysterious  depths. 

"Didn't  I  tell  you,  Loab  Ben  Phra,  I'd  soon  be 
soaring  over  Atlic?"  he  ejaculated. 

"So  this  big  iron  mammoth  is  your  bird  growa 


224  DOOMED 

up,  Gauril?"  I  responded.  "Why,  he  can  outbuzz 
and  outfly  any  wasp  ever  seen,  and  I  believe  he'll 
also  outsting  any  wasp  before  his  career  is  over. 
You  can  well  be  proud  of  the  achievement!" 

"Proud,  eh — of  what?  Of  the  extra  brains  At! 
put  Into  my  head?  Don't,  pray,  fill  my  head  like 
an  empty  bladder,  and  let  it  go  on  forever  noising 
its  emptiness." 

Brave  Gauril!  He  had  come  all  the  way  from 
Gegra,  on  the  back  of  this  artificial  bird;  and  no 
jubro  on  solid  earth  could  have  made  the  journey 
in  double  the  time. 

Iron  works  in  all  parts  of  the  land  were  already 
engaged  making  preparations  for  the  manufacture 
of  wasps  large  enough  to  carry  two  men  on  them, 
one  to  steer  and  the  other  to  fire  poisoned  darts 
into  the  beasts,  after  first  having  struck  them  with 
illuminating  rockets  that  splashed  over  them  large 
surfaces  of  a  luminous  paint,  such  as  the  Omsho- 
lans  had  used  in  lighting  up  their  tunnel.  So 
luminous  was  the  paint,  that  objects  were  made 
visible  through  a  barrier  of  smoke. 

Schools  were  also  to  follow,  for  training  men 
for  this  service. 

All  this  augured  well  for  Atlon  success,  pro- 
vided the  invasion  began  not  too  soon. 

Months  had  passed,  and  still  the  Atlon  iron 


THE  BASILISK  INVASION  225 

works  were  kept  busy  night  and  day,  the  opera- 
tives changing  shifts  every  three  hours,  and  tak- 
ing but  Httle  time  for  rest. 

So  the  wasp  fleet  kept  on  growing,  till  it  could 
count  its  mammoth  birds  by  the  tens  of  hundreds, 
with  a  much  larger  number  of  experts  to  man 
them.  It  now  began  to  look  as  if  the  basilisk 
hosts  were  to  meet  with  a  reception  such  as  the 
Evil  One  had  not  reckoned  on. 

Squads  of  the  giant  wasps  were  already  being 
pushed  to  the  front,  gradually  forming  a  complete 
line  across  Long  Neck,  where  the  beasts  were  ex- 
pected to  enter  Atlo;  though  the  possibility  of 
their  attempting  entrance  from  the  sea  shores  was 
not  being  overlooked. 

The  wasps  stationed  across  Long  Neck  were 
soon  daily  scouring  the  adjoining  territory  to  re- 
port the  movements  and  the  approach  of  the 
enemy. 

Larger  and  larger  grew  the  fleet,  until  there 
were  three  lines  stretching  across  the  Isthmus. 
And  now  we  were  beginning  to  feel  secure,  let  the 
invasion  begin  when  it  would;  for  the  later  it  be- 
gan, the  larger  a  fleet  of  wasps  would  there  be 
ready  to  resist  Its  advance. 

The  day  at  length  arrived  when  our  scouts  re- 
ported the  approach  of  the  basilisk  hosts  In  a 


226  DOOMED 

vast  black  cloud  stretched  over  the  entire  horizon* 
Well  did  we  know  what  lightnings  were  hidden 
within  the  dense  clouds,  what  deadly  bolts  were 
ready  to  be  flashed  upon  us.  But  apart  from  our 
wearing  dark  eye  glasses,  we  also  had  our  bolts 
of  death  to  hurl;  and  it  was  to  be  seen  which 
wei^e  the  deadlier. 

None  too  rapidly  for  us  approached  the  beasts 
of  Mam ;  for  we  were  one  and  all,  as  if  on  needles, 
awaiting  them. 

Stationed  on  the  third  line,  it  was  easy  for  me 
to  see  the  wasps  of  the  first  line  rise,  on  receiv- 
ing orders,  whirling  in  large  circles  as  they 
mounted  higher  and  higher  upward,  till  above  the 
host  and  following  behind  them,  as  they  poured 
volley  upon  volley  of  darts  into  their  huge  bodies. 

By  the  time  the  second  line  went  Into  action, 
mounting  upward,  we  already  heard  the  raucous 
cries  of  pain  and  anger  mingled  with  sounds  of 
falling  beasts  as  they  came  hurtling  down  from 
the  heights  above,  adding  fresh  wounds  to  those 
received  from  our  darts. 

Soon  our  line  had  its  orders  to  rise;  and  now, 
amid  a  pandemonium  of  horrible  noises,  we  did 
our  circling  upward,  and  were  soon  pursuing  the 
dark  line  of  beasts.  We  were  now  quite  near  the 
brutes;  and  It  seemed  as  if  every  dart  we  fired  sent 
down  its  separate  victim  with  a  bellowing  cry, 


THE  BASILISK  INVASION  227 

while  from  below  came  up  the  piercing  groans  of 
the  dying  beasts. 

On  and  on  we  now  kept  up  the  pursuit,  the 
beasts  filled  with  terror  from  what  they  felt  was 
an  invisible  foe  wreaking  merciless  havoc  upon 
them.  Turn  whither  they  would,  their  fearful 
death  weapon  was  useless,  no  foe  coming  in  range, 
though  the  rasping  buzz  of  the  wasps  was  con- 
stantly ringing  in  their  ears.  ' 

Yet  with  all  our  destruction,  no  noticeable 
diminution  seemed  visible  in  the  dark  mass.  There 
seemed  no  end  to  their  number.  All  the  way  to 
Atlo  followed  the  relentless  pursuit.  It  was  im- 
possible to  hold  them  back.  Streams  of  them  we 
also  now  saw,  in  the  distance,  entering  from  the 
northern  seaside. 

And  now  we  began  to  discern  a  new  fact — that 
within  their  ranks  were  also  large  numbers  of 
fire-spitting  dragons.  With  these  we  would  also 
have  to  reckon.  If  they  entered  Atlo,  their 
breath  might  prove  an  incendiary  torch  to  spread 
a  holocaust  of  flame  over  the  land,  working  its 
destruction. 

The  city  of  Gegra  was  already  menaced,  and 
its  people  were  fleeing  in  all  directions,  but  mostly 
toward  Umla,  which  was  a  seaport  from  which 
they  could  scatter,  taking  jubrets  as  their  means 
of  conveyance.    But  more  than  half  the  population 


228  DOOMED 

found  refuge  in  the  underground  tunnels  still  left, 
by  which  the  oros  were  connected  with  one  an- 
other, and  in  which  stores  of  food  could  be  safely 
kept. 

Bell-signal  reports  were  being  dispatched  in  all 
directions,  announcing  the  danger,  and  advising 
the  people  everywhere  to  guard  against  fire,  by 
putting  the  underground  channels  in  preparation 
to  meet  the  danger. 

All  day  long  was  the  pursuit  continued;  and 
special  detachments  were  also  sent  to  combat  the 
beasts  attacking  towns  and  cities. 

By  nightfall  we  were  well  into  Atlo,  still  firing 
our  deadly  missiles  into  the  mass  of  mammoths. 

And  now  at  length  the  superiority  of  our  wasps 
began  to  be  manifested;  for,  whereas  they  were 
still  fresh  and  tireless,  the  beasts  began  to  betray 
signs  of  exhaustion — large  numbers  of  them 
alighting  to  the  earth,  gasping  for  breath  and 
alternately  groaning  from  sheer  weariness.  There 
w^e  now  had  them  at  our  mercy,  slaying  them  with 
great  rapidity  and  loss  of  little  time. 

Rapidly  the  ranks  of  the  foe  were  now  being 
decimated;  and  the  less  there  remained  of  them, 
the  greater  dispatch  were  we  able  to  make  in  fin- 
ishing the  rest. 

By  midnight  there  w^as  little  more  to  be  seen 
of  them;  and  then  we  began  to  scour  the  land  in 


"By  midiiight 
directions 
complete." 


we    began    to    scour    the    land    in    many 
to   make   the   extermination   of   the   beasts 


THE  BASILISK  INVASION  229 

many  directions,  seeking  far  and  wide  to  make  the 
extermination  of  the  beasts  complete. 

Meanwhile  the  city  of  Gegra  had  suffered  the 
most,  nearly  half  of  her  oros  having  been  razed 
by  dragon  flames.  Other  towns  in  western  Atlo 
also  suffered  losses,  though  none  so  severely  as 
Gegra.  In  their  attempts  to  escape,  a  number  of 
jubros  were  also  wrecked  by  the  monsters,  and 
not  a  few  passengers  were  slain. 

In  the  closing  hours  of  the  terrible  conflict,  I 
happened  to  launch  a  dart  into  the  body  of  a 
dragon  engaged  in  pushing  his  flaming  snout  into 
an  oro  window,  while  clutching  with  his  talons 
the  sill  beneath,  so  as  to  support  himself  there 
till  the  fire  became  well  started.  More  than  a 
score  of  oros  had  the  beast  in  this  manner  set 
afire.  And  now,  suffering  excruciating  pains  from 
the  dart,  the  monster  made  a  swift  dash  at  my 
wasp,  overturning  it,  so  that  both  wasp  and 
dragon  came  crashing  to  the  earth. 

For  me,  this  was  the  end  of  the  battle — having 
not  the  least  recollection  of  what  followed. 


CHAPTER  III 

The  Loyalty  of  Metel 

As  in  a  dream,  I  had  been  lying — time  and  place 
fitfully  changing  in  riotous  incongruity,  taking  me 
alternately  whirring  over  tall  mountain  peaks  and 
across  interminable  desert  wastes,  and  again  let- 
ting me  rest  by  the  side  of  cooling  streams  while 
balmy  winds  kissed  my  cheeks.  Now  I  sat, 
mounted  on  the  back  of  a  giant  wasp,  and  anon  on 
the  neck  of  a  soaring  serpent,  spear  in  hand,  giv- 
ing chase  to  grotesque  beasts  and  weird  specters 
with  which  the  air  was  filled.  Now  it  was  plung- 
ing through  sheets  of  blazing  flame;  and  anon  we 
pierced  our  way  through  mountains,  as  if  mere 
shadows  in  our  path.  There  were  no  disturbing 
doubts  to  mar  the  dire  intensity  of  the  life  I  was 
leading. 

In  such  a  delirium,  days  and  weeks  must  have 
passed,  while  I  was  lying  helpless  in  the  hospital 
room  of  Red  Star  oro,  at  Atlic,  in  charge  of  physi- 
cian Gomar.  Many  a  time  I  recall  spitting  back 
at  him  the  nauseous,  bitter  stuff  with  which  he  was 
dosing  me,  which  at  one  time  he  had  actually  to 

230 


THE  LOYALTY  OF  METEL  231 

force  down  my  throat.  ...  It  was  after  what 
seemed  ages  of  this  weird  life,  that  I  one  day- 
awoke,  to  see,  bending  over  me,  a  fair-featured 
woman,  whom  I  suddenly  recognized.  It  was  my 
betrothed. 

"Metel!  Metell  Is  It  you?"  I  joyfully  cried, 
doubting  the  reality  of  her  presence. 

"Yes,  Loab,  it's  your  own  Metel";  she  re- 
sponded, "but  do  be  quiet,  for  you're  not  yet  well 
enough  to  hold  conversation.  So  rest,  dear,  and 
believe  me,  I'll  return  as  soon  as  you're  better." 

With  a  smile  radiating  sweetness,  and  with 
throwing  me  a  parting  kiss,  she  was  gone. 

As  I  felt  the  sweat  oozing  from  my  brow,  I 
seemed  much  reheved.  But  tired,  oh  how  tired  I 
was,  soon  falling  into  another  sleep. 

The  day  at  length  arrived  when  I  was  able  to 
sit  up;  and  Metel  now  was  frequently  at  my  bed- 
side, giving  me  comfort.  As  I  grew  stronger,  our 
conversations  became  longer  and  more  free,  soon 
demonstrating  our  mutual  loyalty  to  the  be- 
trothal. As  soon  as  I  would  have  sufficiently 
recovered  to  go  about,  I  looked  forward  to  taking 
steps  for  our  marriage. 

But  now,  earlier  than  I  had  anticipated,  Metel 
took  the  matter  into  her  own  hands,  acting  under 
the  privilege  belonging  to  her  high  station.  While 
I  was  still  in  the  robes  of  a  convalescent,  she  one 


232  DOOMED 

day  entered,  decked  in  simple  but  elegant  bridal 
garments,  and  with  a  becoming  garland  over  her 
brow.  Accompanying  her  was  an  official  priest 
of  the  hearth,  and  a  priestess,  and  also  Metel's 
parents. 

Without  many  words,  it  was  explained  to  me 
that  our  wedding  ceremony  was  now  about  to  be 
performed,  to  which  I  had  not  the  least  objection. 
And  so  a  very  simple  ceremony  was  at  once  en- 
acted, consisting  of  verbal  queries  put  and  an- 
swered; and,  following  these,  a  document  was 
presented  to  us  for  our  joint  signatures.  This 
document,  which  not  only  bound  us  together,  but 
also  bound  us  into  a  union  with  the  State,  was 
afterwards  to  be  filed  in  the  archives  of  the  State 
— each  of  us  being  furnished  a  certified  copy  of 
the  same. 

The  vital  part  of  the  bond  lay  in  the  fact  that 
the  State  had  assumed  the  obligation  to  allow  us 
to  approach  the  altar  as  free  and  independent  man 
and  woman — each,  regardless  of  the  other,  en- 
dowed, the  man  with  a  property  portion  in  the 
shop  and  the  woman  with  an  income-provided 
home.  No  shadow  of  dependence  was  to  degrade 
the  union;  and  for  this  reason  they  were  expected 
to  choose  mates  with  such  care  and  caution  as 
would  insure  to  their  offspring  a  happy  and  united 
home.    The  man  was  pledged  to  labor  with  suf- 


THE  LOYALTY  OF  METEL  233 

ficient  diligence  to  justify  the  provisions  made  by 
the  State  for  the  family  welfare,  and  also  to  serve 
the  State  in  such  ways  as  were  needful  to  its 
preservation.  And  the  woman  was  pledged  to 
so  preside  over  the  home  as  to  make  it  a  haven 
of  rest  for  the  weary  and  indisposed,  and  to  make 
it  attractive  for  those  needing  entertainment.  As 
the  husband  was  ruler  of  the  shop,  so  was  the  wife 
to  be  ruler  of  the  home.  Both  husband  and  wife 
were  to  give  and  receive  counsel,  but  each  was  to 
be  the  final  authority  in  their  particular  spheres. 

So  it  came  about  that  we  were  united  for  life, 
without  having,  on  my  part,  undergone  any  of  the 
usual  fussy  preparations  attending  such  a  union. 

It  did  not  at  the  time  Impress  me  as  strange  that 
the  marriage  was  so  hastily  performed.  But  it 
afterwards  occurred  to  me  that  never,  since  my 
illness,  had  I  glanced  into  a  mirror;  and  also,  that 
no  mirror  had  ever  been  within  reach.  Upon  the 
only  instance  in  which  I  had  made  a  suggestion  of 
a  desire  to  have  a  look  at  myself,  Metel  had 
adroitly  changed  the  subject. 

Now,  however,  I  resolved  to  settle  the  matter, 
once  and  for  all.  A  strange  attendant,  passing  by 
the  door,  I  hailed  her  and,  not  without  some  per- 
suasion, managed  to  induce  her  to  bring  me  a  mir- 
ror. My  first  glance  into  it  gave  me  a  fearful 
shock.     Into  what  hideousness  had  my  features 


234  DOOMED 

been  distorted !  What  a  repulsive  monster  had  I 
become!  And  to  this  horrid  thing  had  the  radi- 
ant Metel  attached  herself!  What  a  sacrifice! 
How  dared  I  hold  her  to  the  bond? 

Still  in  a  tremor  from  the  shock,  I  began  to 
reproach  her  on  her  next  appearance :  "How  could 
you  deceive  me  so,  and  do  yourself  such  wrong? 
Oh  Metel,  Metel,  your  sacrifice  was  too  great." 

"Think  not,  my  Loab,  that  it  was  only  your 
outer  self  I  loved.  Though  the  rind  of  the  fruit 
was  bruised,  its  sweetness  to  me  has  not  been 
altered.  I  love  you  still,  Loab  mine;  and  even 
through  the  horrid  mask  you  wear,  I  see  ever  your 
real  self.  It  would  have  been  cruel  to  deny  your- 
self to  me!" 

"But  gazing  upon  me,  do  I  not  seem  loathsome 
in  your  eyes?  Tell  me  the  truth,  oh  Metel,  my 
own  darling!" 

"My  eyes  are  already  accustomed  to  the  sight, 
as  my  mind 'is  to  the  fact;  and  the  distortion 
makes  no  such  harsh  impression  as  you  would 
think.  But  lest,  to  strangers,  the  mask  of  distor- 
tion should  give  a  shock,  1  have  brought  you  a 
milder  mask  to  wear  over  the  other.    Here  it  is." 

With  that,  she  handed  me  a  soft,  silken  one, 
with  which  to  hide  my  ghastly  features;  and  this 
thoughtful  gift  I  still  wear,  and  will  never  part 
with  as  long  as  I  live. 


THE  LOYALTY  OF  METEL  235 

Metel  had  remained  In  Omshola  during  the 
period  of  the  basilisk  war,  seeing  to  It  that  Om- 
shola contributed  her  share  in  fighting  men  and  In 
supplies,  toward  the  defense  of  Atlo. 

Atlism  had  by  this  time  been  fully  established, 
and  her  people  bore  grateful  remembrance  of  the 
part  Atlo  had  played  in  their  deliverance.  .  .  . 
But  as  soon  as  the  crisis  was  over,  she  hastened  to 
pay  another  visit  to  Atlo,  both  to  see  her  parents 
and  to  ascertain  what  was  known  concerning  my 
fate.  There  It  was,  she  found  me  in  the  care  of 
her  father,  Physician  Gomar,  who  had  brought 
me  to  Atlic  on  a  canal  jubret. 

During  the  intervening  time,  prior  to  the  war, 
Metel  had  been  busy  Atlonizing  Omshola,  much 
assisted  in  the  work  by  the  members  of  the  depu- 
tation that  had  accompanied  her  there,  and  had 
there  seen  much  of  its  operation.  It  is  true,  con- 
siderable of  the  work  had  been  previously  ac- 
complished. But  the  final  steps  now  taken  were 
to  introduce  a  coinage  of  silver  and  bronze,  simi- 
lar to  that  used  in  Atlo;  and  also  to  introduce  the 
Atlon  system  of  making  their  properties  inalien- 
able. In  all  this  work,  however,  they  had  merely 
to  copy  after  what  was  already  tried  and  in  vogue 
in  Atlo. 

So  far  as  the  sums  still  due  the  Koms  and 
Kones  for  their  properties  was  concerned,  they 


236  DOOMED 

were  not  confiscated,  but  regularly  paid  to  the 
families  of  the  banished  nobility. 

The  fundamental  requisites  of  Atlism  were 
now  incorporated  in  constitutional  law,  to  be 
altered  only  after  three  successive  elections,  held 
not  less  than  ten  years  apart,  in  each  of  which 
the  alteration  was  favored  with  a  majority  of  the 
votes,  both  male  and  female. 

A  push  wing  was  also  instituted,  and  given  much 
the  same  powers  and  duties  as  that  in  Atlo. 

The  throne  was  also  to  be  made  an  elective 
office,  retained  for  a  period  of  ten  years;  and  with 
its  incumbents  subject  to  removal  and  severe  pun- 
ishments for  any  willful  abuse  of  the  power  placed 
in  their  hands. 

As  soon  as  these  changes  had  been  effected,  and 
a  successor  to  the  throne  elected  and  ready  to 
enter  upon  the  duties  of  the  office,  Metel  was  to 
retire — the  Omsholans,  under  Atlism,  being  fully 
capable  of  governing  themselves. 

Among  the  numerous  tasks  begun  by  the  Om- 
sholan  Push  Wing  was  the  reorganization  of  its 
homes  so  as  ultimately  to  evolve  in  oros  similar  to 
those  of  Atlo.  .  .  .  They  began  by  dividing  the 
urban  lands  into  uniform  squares,  erecting  on  a 
few  of  them,  at  the  time  vacant,  groups  of  de- 
tached homes,  with  an  oroto  in  each  group.    Into 


THE  LOYALTY  OF  METEL  237 

these  groups  of  dwellings  were  taken  the  residents 
on  squares  most  in  need  of  new  structures.  The 
vacated  squares  were  then  built  on,  square  after 
square,  till  the  entire  city  had  been  rebuilt.  .  .  , 
Thereafter  only  whole  squares  at  a  time  were  to  be 
reconstructed,  instead  of  having  to  endure  the  per- 
petual nuisance  of  interminable  obstructions  on  the 
streets  and  the  constant  scattering  of  dirt  and  filth 
upon  them  which  attends  promiscuous  building. 


CHAPTER  IV 
To  Atlonize  the  World 

Atlo  had  triumphed.  Her  fleets  of  giant 
wasps  had  overcome  the  basihsk  hosts.  Every 
corner  of  the  land  had  they  scoured,  and  not  a 
trace  of  basilisk  or  dragon  was  left.  The  huge 
carcasses  of  the  slain  had  been  immolated.  Thus 
had  the  mighty  hosts  of  Mam's  chosen  beasts 
been  annihilated;  and  armed  now  with  her  giant 
wasps,  what  more  had  she  to  fear  from  the  power 
of  this  goddess  of  gain  and  the  beasts  in  her 
service  ? 

In  all  the  burned  localities,  the  State  carried  on 
the  work  of  rebuilding  and  restoring  the  land  to 
its  former  condition. 

Great  therefore  was  the  rejoicing  In  every  At- 
lon  oro  upon  the  return  of  the  victorious  warriors; 
and  manifold  were  the  demonstrations  made  of 
their  hearty  appreciation  and  enthusiasm. 

As  the  weeks  sped,  out  of  all  this  patriotic  en- 
thusiasm something  new  crystallized.  The  spirit 
of  Atlon  thought  took  wing,  looking  beyond  her 
boundaries.  There  it  saw  a  world  still  groaning 
under  the  yoke  of  oppression,  lorded  over  by 

338 


TO  ATLONIZE  THE  WORLD  239 

idling  nobles  of  all  sorts,  who  lived  in  vice  and 
luxury,  and  sapped  the  vitality  of  the  masses.     It 
was  an  inverted  order,  in  which  rivalry  of  ostenta- 
tion and  love  of  power  led  the  proud  lords  into 
the  perpetration  of  every  cruelty.     They  saw  a 
world,  in  which  the  few  feasted  and  the  many 
starved;  in  which  every  man  jostled  his  neighbor 
for  the  crumbs  dropping  from  the  festal  board, 
and  in  which  peace  was  a  delusive  hope.  .  . 
They  saw  a  world  divided  against  itself,  nation 
arrayed  against  nation,  secretly  when  not  openly, 
and  filled  with  the  lust  of  plunder  by  violence  and 
by  profiteering — a  lust  for  lands  and  slaves  and 
loot.     In  this  world,  men  stooped  to  the  lowest 
depths,  in  order  to  rise — wholly  bhnd  to  what  fol- 
lowed. 

^  From  this  debased  world  came  to  their  ears 
piteous  cries  of  hunger  and  distress  from  famish- 
ing babes  and  heart-broken  mothers.  They  saw 
its  people  so  sorely  bitten  by  dispossession  that 
even  character  had  been  devoured,  and  only  the 
beast  remained.  The  great  body  of  humanity, 
they  saw  as  groveUIng  outcasts — vast  numbers 
sunk  so  low  that  all  incentives  to  rise  had  been 
destroyed.  It  was  a  hideous  spectacle,  that  which 
abroad  was  called  real  life. 

Oppressed  with  this  Image  of  a  distorted  world, 
they  took  refuge  in  the  divine  purpose  to  regen- 


240  DOOMED 

erate  It.  A  grand  crusade  was  to  be  organized, 
with  that  noble  object  in  view.  AT'S  world  was, 
through  Atlism,  to  supplant  Mamnism,  and  to  re- 
deem the  devil's  world.  No  longer  should  its 
children  inherit  the  curse  of  dispossession  and  the 
doom  of  abject  dependence.  No  longer  should  its 
children  hunger  that  an  ignoble  few  might  loll  in 
idle  ease.  The  honor  of  the  world  was  at  stake — 
its  very  soul  on  trial. 

Every  man  was  hereafter  to  be  shielded  by  pos- 
session of  an  inalienable  property  portion,  and 
every  woman  was  to  be  dowered  at  the  altar  with 
an  inalienable,  income-provided  home.  And  every- 
where the  shekel  was  to  be  made  unhoardable — a 
servant,  and  not  master  of  the  people. 

Atlo  had  twice  conquered  the  beasts  of  Mam. 
She  would  now  attempt  to  subdue  the  human 
beasts  who  were  devouring  the  very  flesh  of  their 
own  flesh,  in  the  world  outside  of  Atlo — mere 
superapes  wearing  the  form  of  man. 

Never  before  had  so  grand  a  project  appealed 
to  a  nation;  nor  ever  before  was  a  nation  so  well 
Instructed  and  equipped  for  its  execution. 
Equipped  with  their  giant  wasps,  their  dashing 
war  jubros,  and  capable  of  enlisting  in  their  ser- 
vice a  fleet  of  Atlene-propelled  jubrets  that  could 
plow  the  seas  regardless  of  wind  and  tide,  what 
nation  was  there  capable  of  withstanding  it? 


TO  ATLONIZE  THE  WORLD  241 

What  rulers  would  dare  jeopardise  their 
chances  to  realize  the  maximum  ACTUAL  value 
of  their  possessions  In  the  face  of  else  forfeiting 
all?  Would  they  wish  to  see  their  castles  and 
palaces  burned  over  their  heads,  with  streams  of 
Atlene  poured  on  them  by  giant  wasps  from  the 
upper  air?  Would  they  dare  oppose  their  awk- 
ward sailing  vessels  to  the  Atlene-propelled 
jubrets? 

Would  they  dare  reject  the  offers  made,  when 
the  object  of  the  Atlons  was  made  known  to  the 
people  through  messages  sent  down  from  the  skies, 
informing  them  how  they  were  all  to  be  made 
free-men  In  fact,  and  how  they  were  to  acquire  the 
properties  needful  to  real  freedom?  With  the 
lessons  of  Atlism  spread  broadcast,  would  the  rul- 
ers dare  face  their  own  people,  without  acqui- 
escence to  the  terms  proposed? 

There  could  be  no  question  as  to  the  outcome 
of  the  crusade.  It  was  Impossible  to  fail  of  its 
purpose. 

Thrilled  with  these  exalted  motives,  the  project 
met  with  no  difficulty  In  winning  popular  approval 
in  a  series  of  special  ballotlngs  held  to  legalize 
the  movement;  and  now  plans  were  soon  afoot  for 
providing  the  necessaries  of  the  expedition.  A 
vast  fleet  of  fighting  jubrets,  covered  with  a  metal- 
lic paint  that  made  them  fireproof,  was  to  be  con- 


242  DOOMED 

structed;  and  also  another  fleet  for  carrying  stores 
of  supplies  and  Atlene.  Of  wasps  they  had  al- 
ready enough  and  to  spare,  and  also  of  dash  ju- 
bros.  Before  another  year  had  passed,  it  was 
calculated,  the  expedition  would  be  ready  to  start. 
It  was  a  period  of  feverish  expectation  in  which 
the  entire  nation  was  alert,  watching  the  progress 
of  the  preparations. 

Omshola  had  meanwhile  been  voluntarily  an- 
nexed to  Atlo,  so  that  the  two  lands  came  under 
the  one  government.  Melka  Metel,  who  had 
previously  retired  from  the  throne,  and  had  re- 
tained only  what  was  an  elective  oflice,  now  also 
retired  from  office  to  indulge  in  a  few  years  of 
tranquil  obscurity  before  again,  if  ever,  taking 
part  in  public  affairs.  In  laying  down  her  crown, 
she  left  in  the  hearts  of  her  people  a  memory  more 
enduring  than  marble,  a  throne  they  would  never 
cease  to  honor  and  revere. 

Her  people  were  by  this  time  well  on  the  high- 
road to  enduring  liberty,  in  thought,  in  speech  and 
In  deed — the  broad  liberty  that  stretched  as  far 
as  one  might  go  this  side  of  infrfnging  upon  the 
liberty  of  others.  They  approached  the  work- 
shop, untrammeled  by  poverty;  and  the  altar,  with 
head  up — neither  sex  dependent  on  the  other — 
making  their  union  a  holy  one  formed  purely  of 


TO  ATLONIZE  THE  WORLD  243 

their  own  choice,  made  after  due  instruction  in  all 
matters  affecting  a  wise  selection  of  a  lifemate. 
The  solemn  union  was  made  more  than  an  empty- 
mockery  of  words — a  union  that  only  too  fre- 
quently soon  was  ruptured,  or  preserved  merely 
to  keep  up  an  outward  show,  from  pride  and  fear 
of  public  comment. 

The   Omsholan  belief  in  spirits   in   an  upper 
realm  was  relegated  to  the  realm  of  myths.   They 
were  taught  the  power  of  great  ideals,  such  as 
that  of  AT,  in  which  humanity — as  an  organic 
unity — a  living,   growing  organism,   interlocking 
its  individual  members  in  harmonious  co-operation 
for  the  most  efficient  supply  and  satisfaction  of  its 
needs^iplifted  every  member  to  loftier  standards 
and  higher  being.     They  were  taught  faith  in  the 
possibilities  of  the  world  by  which  they  were  en- 
vironed— of  which  they  were  to  make  the  most, 
and  whose  evils  they  were  to  submit  to  only  when 
vain  to  resist.     Under  no  circumstances  were  they 
to^  lapse  into  the  dangerous  lassitude  that  accepts 
blindly,  as  irreconcilable,  the  wrongs  and  ills  men 
suffer.     They  were   not  by  indifference   to   give 
countenance  to  and  foster  evils.    Indifference  had 
slain  more  men  than  had  the  sword,  and  was  the 
guiltier  weapon  of  the  two.     They  were  not  to 
hunt  with  the  Lord,  and  run  with  the  devil.     No 
man  could  follow  Mammon  and  worship  AT. 


244  DOOMED 

Such  was  the  new  creed  imparted  to  the 
Omsholans.  The  only  prayers  AT  ever  heard 
were  those  addressed  to  him  through  good  deeds 
done  to  his  children — our  fellowmen.  The  utter- 
ances, whether  thundered  or  whispered,  in  glit- 
tering temples,  never  reached  AT'S  ear.  They 
were  only  good  for  deluding  one's  self  or  deceiv- 
ing one's  fellowmen.* 

Some  time  after  our  union,  we  spent  a  happy 
honeymoon  on  a  visit  to  Omshola.  There  our 
wedding  ceremony  was  repeated  in  public,  and  a 

*The  religion  of  Atlo  manifestly  consisted  in  a  simple  faith  in 
Life  and  its  immeasurable  possibilities.  To  them  it  was  AN 
ETERNAL  HERE,  becoming  ever  more  just  as  they  made  it 
more  just,  and  more  plentiful  as  they  made  it  more  plentiful — 
a  grander  world,  as  they  kept  on  seeking  and  endeavoring  to 
fulfill  loftier  and  grander  ideals. 

Their  religion  was  the  frame  on  which  hung  their  faith, 
voicing  the  fires  of  vitality  from  which  their  lifelamp  drew  its 
light.  It  led  them  upward  and  onward  along  the  path  i^j  which 
AT  guided  them,  keeping  them  to  their  part  in  his  eternal  task 
of  creation.  .  .  By  this  course  they  avoided  the  bypaths  of 
division  and  discord — falling  neither  into  Nature  Worship  nor 
Fetishism,  into  neither  Fatalism  nor  Materialism,  into  neither 
Asceticism  nor  Stoicism,  into  neither  a  Mohammedanism  nor  a  Bud- 
dhism, into  neither  a  Judaism  nor  a  narrowed  Christianity.  .  .  . 
To  them  Faith  was  the  gauge  of  vital  energy;  and  whenever 
it  sank  low,  they  rested  from  all  present  labors  and  cares,  until 
recuperated.  What  other  peoples  did  through  prayers,  they 
did  through  rest,  attaining  the  same  end. 


TO  ATLONIZE  THE  WORLD  245 

great  ovation  was  given  us.  There  also  we  re- 
mained nearly  a  year,  until  I  was  called  to  take 
my  place  as  Chief  Interpreter  in  the  approaching 
crusade  for  the  world's  regeneration. 

What  happened  on  our  return  to  Atlic— but 
why  say  here  that  which  belongs  to  my  next  and 
last  chapter?  Tragedy  can  well  wait  its  hour  of 
telling. 


CHAPTER  V 
Atlo's  Tragic  End 

Great  was  the  enthusiasm  felt  throughout  all 
Atlo,  and  even  in  all  parts  of  crystal-roofed 
Omshola,  when  the  bell-signals  heralded  the  tid- 
ings announcing  the  readiness  of  our  grand  fleet 
of  soaring  wasps  and  swiftly  gliding  jubrets  to 
start  on  the  long  contemplated  crusade  for  the  re- 
demption of  the  Mamnist  world. 

Great  also  was  the  raging  fury  of  the  Evil  One, 
on  learning  of  this  menace  to  his  power. 

From  the  dark  gloom  of  his  underworld,  Sat 
recognized  his  utter  inability  to  cope  with  the  At- 
lons.  Therefore  was  his  rage  fierce  and  unquench- 
able. That  Mam's  sway  upon  this  earth  should 
be  broken,  was  a  thing  not  to  be  endured.  How 
else  was  mankind  to  be  kept  under  the  sway  of 
those  temptations  by  which  it  was  foredoomed  to 
come  into  his  realm,  and  into  his  power?  Were 
the  Atlon  crusade  to  succeed,  how  empty  would 
become  his  underworld! 

But  how  were  the  Atlons  to  be  defeated? 
Mam's  beast  hosts  had  proven  ineflicient  in  coping 

246 


ATLO'S  TRAGIC  END  247 

with  human  ingenuity  and  the  power  of  AT.  It 
was  useless  to  combat  them  in  the  upper  world. 
If  he  could  but  strike  them  from  below — from  his 
underworld!  At  the  thought,  a  malignant  smile 
lit  up  his  dire  countenance.  At  last  a  plan  had 
been  conceived.  He  had  hit  upon  their  vulnerable 
spot.  Had  not  the  continent  of  Atlantis  pillars 
reaching  down  into  his  realm  from  its  three  pe- 
ninsulas? He  had  but  to  remove  these  and  all 
Atlo  would  be  shattered,  and  cease  to  be.  ...  At 
this  dire  thought,  a  demoniac  roar  of  laughter 
rang  out  again  and  again  and  again,  reverberating 
throughout  all  the  deep  recesses  and  labyrinthian 
passages  of  his  dark  abode  and  shaking  the 
adamantine  walls  that  girded  in  his  realm. 

I  was  at  home  in  Red  Star  oro,  at  the  time  the 
signal  was  given,  announcing  the  readiness  of  our 
fleets  for  the  long  projected  expedition.  It  was 
therefore  also  a  summons  bidding  me  prepare  for 
parting  with  Metel — a  parting  we  both  dreaded, 
remembering  how  long  our  previous  separation 
had  kept  us  from  each  other. 

It  was  painful  to  think  of  having  so  soon  to 
leave  the  charm  of  my  oro  home,  whose  doors 
opened  into  the  oroto  and  Into  all  the  oros  of  wide 
Atlo,  making  the  land  a  single  home,  while  pre- 
serving for  each  family  the  utmost  privacy.    Yes, 


248  DOOMED 

in  Atlo  we  had  an  undivided  and  a  united  home  for 
all — a  real  brotherhood  of  man.  Yet  in  all  this 
world  was  no  sweeter  spot  than  in  our  little  oro 
home,  and  at  Metel's  side. 

How  I  longed  to  hear  the  light  tap,  tap,  tap  of 
the  footsteps  announcing  her  approach ! 

"So  you're  going  out  on  the  crusade,  Loab?" 
my  wife  tremuously  asked.  "I  wish  you  could 
remain.     For  my  sake,  why  couldn't  you,  dear?" 

"How  could  I  remain,  Metel,  after  having  ac- 
cepted the  post  of  chief  interpreter?  It  is  too  late 
to  withdraw  my  pledge.  Gladly  would  I  other- 
wise comply  with  your  wish." 

"I  should  not  ask,  Loab,  but  that  I  have  a  pre- 
sentiment as  of  some  dreadful  blow  impending; 
and  that  if  now  we  part,  it  might  be  never  to  meet 
again.  .  .  .  But  hush,  I  hear  a  footstep.  It's 
mother." 

"You've  dropped  in  like  a  good  fairy,  mother 
dear,"  joyfully  exclaimed  Metel,  as  her  mother 
crossed  the  threshold.  "I  was  just  deploring 
Loab's  departure.  But  pshaw,  what  man  is  worth 
a  tear!" 

"Don't  let  me  interrupt  you,  children!  If  you 
have  griefs,  out  with  them,  as  you  would  drive 
foul  spirits  from  within." 

"I've  said  I'd  grieve  for  no  man,  mother;  and 
why  for  one  who  refuses  to  heed  my  wishes?" 


ATLO'S  TRAGIC  END  249 

"Such  a  wish — that  I  desert  my  post  serving  the 
crusade!" 

"Tatler,  tatler,  babbletongue !  Go  now,  if* you 
will,  and  stay  as  long  as  you  please — forever 
even!" 

"What  an  ocean  of  wrath  to  spill  out  of  a  tum- 
blerful of  body!  Be  you  a  good  fairy,  mother, 
and  calm  this  tempest,  lest  it  wreck  our  jubret  fleet 
before  it  can  set  out." 

"An  elegant  comedy,  children!  By  all  means 
go  on,  and  recite  the  rest  of  it!" 

But  the  rest  of  the  comedy  was  never  recited; 
for  both  of  us  burst  into  a  chorus  of  laughter, 
while  the  former  Queen  of  Omshola  took  her  sta- 
tion beside  a  tall  harp  near  the  wall;  and  setting 
the  instrument  in  position,  began  to  strum  upon  it, 
accompanying  its  deep  notes  with  her  rich,  melo- 
dious voice.  The  words  of  her  song,  a  popular 
one,  ran  thus: 

Love,  true  love,  will  last  forever; 
Love  from  love,  death  cannot  sever; 
The  grave  is  but  the  stepping  stone 
From  lower,  to  a  higher  throne. 

The  remaining  stanzas  were  left  unsung. 
Mother  Mafra  being  at  that  moment  seized  with 
another  of  those  trance  spells,  one  of  which  I  had 
on  a  previous  occasion  witnessed. 


tSo  DOOMED 

A  cold  stare,  as  of  death,  now  held  her  fea- 
tures, which  displayed  traces  of  a  terrible  fear. 
The  sight  of  her  face,  full  of  evil  bodings,  sent  a 
chill  creeping  down  my  back. 

Metel,  more  self-possessed,  admonished  me  in 
a  whisper  to  remain  perfectly  still,  while  she  has- 
tened to  gather  materials  for  jotting  down  what 
her  mother  might  say. 

The  seer  of  Atlo,  after  mumbling  a  few  unin- 
telligible words,  became  distinctly  audible,  saying 
in  a  voice  inexpressibly  sad : 

"Dark  woe,  like  a  shroud,  is  falling  over  Atlo  I 
Alas,  alas  for  the  glory  of  her  triumph!  Alas 
for  the  joys  of  her  victory!  Black  sorrow  will 
soon  engulf  the  land,  and  the  vengeance  of  Sat 
overtake  it! 

"Terrible  is  the  rage  of  this  demon,  gnashing 
his  teeth  and  spitting  flames  of  fury,  as  he  paces 
the  floor  in  the  gloom  of  the  bottomless  pit.  All 
the  region,  from  end  to  end,  is  shaking  with  the 
vehemence  of  his  wrath! 

"Alas  for  Atlo !  Alas!  Alas!  For  her  doom 
is  sealed!  The  decree  of  the  Evil  One  has  been 
proclaimed.  From  the  bottom  of  the  continent  of 
Atlantis  will  he  pull  out  the  pillars  giving  it  sup- 
port. From  underneath  each  of  Its  three  pe- 
ninsulas will  he  withdraw  the  supports,  and  each 
of  them  will  he  snatch  from  its  place,  crumbling  in 


ATLO'S  TRAGIC  END  251 

his  mighty  hand.  .  .  .  With  Atloraba  will  he  be- 
gin: and  from  its  loathsome  fens  will  flock  to 
Atlora  and  Atlo  all  its  winged  horrors — fiery 
dragons,  mammoth  griffins,  giant  vultures,  ven- 
omous insects,  and  biting  bats  that  spare  no  life 
to  flesh  their  teeth  once  enter.  All  this  pest  of 
horrors  is  to  scourge  Atlo;  and  when  the  final 
crash  shall  sound  her  note  of  doom,  over  her  crum- 
bling breast  will  sweep  the  devouring  sea — her 
winding  sheet  and  tomb. 

"But  I  now  hear  the  voice  of  Atl,  saying  that, 
as  her  words  come  pouring  into  my  ear,  so  shall 
they  also  pour  into  other  ears,  until  all  Atlo  has 
heard.     These  are  her  words: 

"Hearken,  children  of  Atlo — of  Atlo  and  the 
new  Omshola :  From  the  region  of  darkness,  that 
is  in  the  bowels  of  the  earth,  and  that  is  beyond 
the  sway  of  AT,  has  the  Evil  One  decreed  the 
destruction  of  the  continent  of  which  your  lands 
are  a  part;  and  few  are  the  hours  left  you. 

"But  fear  not,  for  though  lives  may  end,  LIFE 
never  ends.  Into  the  body  of  its  eternal  stream 
pours  all  the  matter  and  all  the  spirit  of  its  indi- 
vidual lives,  returning  whence  they  had  come,  and 
passing  thus  into  the  everlasting  cycle  of  life.  It 
is  ever  from  grave  to  cradle  and  from  cradle  to 
grave;  for  naught  is  allowed  to  perish,  naught  is 
lost.    From  the  body  of  life,  all  life  is  drawn,  and 


252  DOOMED 

into  that  body  all  life  returns;  and  death  is  but  a 
shadow — a  veil  between  the  going  and  the  coming. 
"Hearken  ye  further,  and  have  no  fear  lest  At- 
lism  perish;  for  in  its  own  day,  far,  far  off,  will 
its  message  be  borne  into  the  world  by  one  who 
now  is  a  stranger  in  your  land,  when  its  words  will 
be  heard  and  heeded.  Then,  in  that  remote  day, 
its  law  will  become  the  law  of  all  the  world,  and 
so  remain  for  ages  and  for  ages." 

Thus  ended  Mafra's  prophecy  of  doom — of 
dark  doom  and  of  fair  hope. 

Waking  from  the  trance,  she  lost  no  time  read- 
ing the  transcription  of  her  speech,  appalled  by  its 
dread  purport. 

As  if  to  attest  the  truthfulness  of  Mafra's 
words,  an  ominous  sound — wide-circling,  deep, 
earth-shaking — began  booming  from  a  far,  far 
distance — a  distance  too  remote  to  be  calculable. 
Our  very  hearts  stood  still,  and  our  eyes  dilated, 
staring  in  mad  amazement,  while  fright  paralyzed 
our  limbs.  Our  oro  seemed  to  reel  like  a  storm- 
tossed  vessel,  while  loose  objects  came  clattering 
to  the  floors.  Shock  had  so  tied  our  tongues,  and 
fear  so  blanched  our  faces,  we  looked  like  disem- 
bodied spirits. 

"The  death  knell  of  Atloraba !"  calmly  an- 
nounced   Mafra,    after    we    had    recovered    our 


ATLO'S  TRAGIC  END  253 

senses.     "Atlora  will  follow,  and  last  the  final 
crash  destroying  Atlo." 

Then,  rising  to  her  full  height,  with  bowed 
head  and  in  a  deep,  reverential  tone,  she  spake 
once  more : 

"To  your  decrees,  oh  Fates,  we  Atlons  bow, 
submissive,  knowing  full  well  your  powers  are 
limited.  Well  we  know  you  lack  power  to  decree 
an  end  to  the  everlastingness  of  all  clay — of  all 
clay,  and  of  all  spirit.  Though  ye  close  our  eyes 
in  the  sleep  of  death,  ye  cannot  bar  our  return  into 
the  stream  of  eternal  life.  Ye  cannot  bar  the  way 
twixt  grave  and  cradle.  .  .  ,  And  as  our  goddess 
Atl  has  said,  though  Atlo  perish,  Atlism  will  be 
preserved." 

With  a  feeling  of  deep  reverence,  and  profound 
awe,  did  Metel  and  I  listen  to  Mafra's  words — 
words  voicing  the  spirit  of  Atlon  faith. 

The  dread  report  of  Atlo's  doom  had  been 
spread  to  all  parts  of  the  realm,  even  throughout 
Omshola;  and  though  the  Omsholans  gave  way 
to  cries  of  lamentation  and  despair,  Atlons  dis- 
played their  longer  rooted  faith,  accepting  the 
doom  in  a  spirit  of  resignation.  Unmurmuring, 
they  went  about  as  usual,  save  that  they  gave  con- 
sideration to  the  immediate  future.  Though  a 
great  dread  jarred  their  nerves,  they  sought,  for 


254  DOOMED 

the  sake  of  their  fellowmen,  to  conceal  It  as  far 
as  possible,  that  it  should  not  grow  into  a  general 
hysteria  and  madness. 

Late  In  the  afternoon  of  the  following  day, 
while  in  Mother  Mafra's  quarters,  a  strange  mani- 
festation upon  the  far  horizon,  toward  the  south- 
west, drew  our  attention.  Over  the  full  breadth 
of  the  sky  appeared  a  dark  ribbon  on  which  shone 
a  glimmer,  as  of  Innumerable  dancing  lights.  It 
was  impossible  that  it  could  be  a  cloud;  but  what 
else  it  might  be  was  for  the  while  a  mystery. 

As  night  fell,  the  glimmering  ribbon  seemed 
broader  and  much  nearer  the  city,  soon  emitting  a 
strange  buzzing  as  of  many  intermingled  and  In- 
harmonious sounds. 

"It's  the  scum  of  submerged  Atloraba,"  de- 
clared Mother  Mafra,  after  a  while,  "that's  what 
it  Is !  It's  the  flocks  of  winged  horrors  with  which 
we  were  to  be  visited — the  griffins  and  dragons, 
the  giant  vultures,  the  biting  bats  and  the  pest  of 
venomous  insects.  Not  long  indeed  have  we  to 
wait,  ere  Sat's  dire  vengeance  will  precede  destruc- 
tion with  tortures  of  flame  and  venom." 

The  seer's  prophecy  was  coming  true.  Step 
by  step,  the  approach  of  Atlo's  doom  was  being 
certified  by  events. 

"I  mind,  children,"  she  resumed,  "that  one,  now 


ATLO'S  TRAGIC  END  255 

a  stranger  In  the  land,  is  to  bear  the  message  of 
Atlism  to  the  people  of  the  far  off  age.  Who  can 
this  stranger  be,  since  there  is  none  I  know  of  here 
save  you,  Loab?" 

"It  is  none  other  than  Loab,"  responded  my 
spouse,  "since  he  has  the  purport  of  the  message 
all  embodied  in  a  book  we  have  written,  in  which 
he  and  I  have  contributed  the  tale  of  our  experi- 
ences, borne  down  to  the  day  of  our  union.  It 
tells  all  about  the  blessings  of  Atlism,  and  what 
is  required  to  secure  it." 

"Nor  is  there  aught  to  prevent  me  from  adding 
to  its  pages  the  story  of  what  has  transpired  since 
that  day.  Let  me  complete  the  work  and  launch 
it,  enclosed  in  a  safe  receptable,  upon  the  sea, 
where  it  may  be  found  in  that  far  off  day  pre- 
dicted." 

"We'll  place  it  in  the  golden  casket  I  brought 
from  Omshola,  and  put  the  casket  into  that  toy 
wasp  Gauril  presented  me  with;  and  we'll  send  it 
on  far,  far  away  from  Atlo — to  be  found  in  some 
distant  land,  after  we  are  all  gone  and  long  for- 
gotten." 

"That  toy  wasp  will  be  just  the  thing,  Metel. 
How  came  you  to  think  of  it?" 

"Never  mind  how,  Loab,"  retorted  Metel, 
"but  hasten  to  your  styl  and  inkpot,  and  finish 
the  book.    We've  no  moment  to  spare." 


2S6  DOOMED 

The  door  at  this  moment  suddenly  opened,  and 
in  rushed  a  man  whose  agonized  features,  black- 
ened and  trickling  blood,  were  bloated  with  dis- 
tortion. "The  healing  salve,  dear!"  he  feebly 
called,  casting  himself  upon  the  sofa,  with  a  sup- 
pressed groan. 

The  words  had  scarcely  passed  the  speaker's 
lips,  whom  the  reader  will  have  recognized  as 
Physician  Gomar,  ere  Mafra,  jar  in  hand,  was 
gently  administering  the  salve  over  his  blackened 
face. 

"Bitten  by  venomous  insects,"  he  laconically  ex- 
plained, gasping  for  breath,  "so  bid  me  a  last  fare- 
well, love;  and  you  too,  children;  for  their  bite's 
fatal." 

"Nay,  husband  dear,"  retorted  Mafra  through 
her  tears,  "we'll  all  soon  be  joining  you!" 

Both  Mafra  and  Metel  bid  him  their  last  fare- 
well, and  I  was  about  to  follow,  when  violent  con- 
vulsions shook  his  frame,  and  in  another  moment 
his  spark  of  life  had  ceased. 

As  we  were  mournfully  gazing  upon  the  re- 
mains, a  buzz  of  insects  fell  upon  our  ears;  and 
instantly  Metel  ran  out  for  veiling  with  which  to 
protect  our  faces  from  their  bite,  while  I  closed 
the  door  that  none  more  should  enter. 

Wrapped  in  the  veiling,  I  was  soon  after  en- 
gaged in  hurriedly  setting  down  on  my  papyrus 


ATLO'S  TRAGIC  END  257 

sheets  the  portion  of  my  tale  still  wanting;  and 
I  was  at  length  pondering  If  any  more  was  left  to 
be  added,  when.Metel  came  frantically  to  my  side, 
her  eyes  bedlmmed  with  tears. 

"Mafra  has  followed  Gomarl  Oh,  my  poor 
mother — gone,  too !  Fate  has  snatched  them 
from  me  before  my  very  eyes,  and  oh " 

"Mafra  also!"  I  cried,  dumbfounded. 

"Oh,  Loab,  Loab,  how  can  I  speak  of  it!  A 
horrid  bat — a  very  demon  of  fury — dashed  into 
mother's  face,  and  bit  clean  through  the  veiling. 
Why,  in  a  flash  it  was  all  over,  convulsions  shak- 
ing her  so  violently,  in  but  a  few  moments  she 
lay  stark  and  lifeless.  Oh,  Loab,  Loab,  the  end 
of  all  is  nigh.    For  me  it  cannot  come  too  soon!" 

"Be  calm,  dear,  be  calm,"  I  urged,  though  my- 
self trembling  in  every  limb.  I  then  took  her  arm, 
and  letting  her  lean  upon' my  shoulder,  I  bore  her 
to  the  scene  of  the  tragedy. 

Together  we  lifted  poor  Mafra's  body,  and 
placed  it  by  the  side  of  Gomar's.  Together  they 
now  lay;  and  together  let  their  successive  counter- 
tjrpes  reappear  through  cycle  after  cycle,  for  all 
eternity. 

Once  more  I  betook  myself  to  my  styl,  to  jot 
down  what  had  just  transpired,  when  a  second 
time  I  was  disturbed — this  time  by  a  mighty  sound 


2S8  DOOMED 

thundering  as  If  all  the  earth  were  being  crumpled 
into  bits.  It  was  a  noise  more  than  deafening, 
more  than  appalling — such  a  sound  as  no  words 
can  adequately  interpret. 

Metcl,  who  had  been  bent  over  me,  fell  into  a 
swoon;  while,  from  head  to  foot,  I  shook  like  an 
aspen.  The  sight  of  my  spouse,  stricken  at  my 
feet,  aroused  me  to  action.  Speedily  I  had  gotten 
a  bowl  of  water  from  which  to  sprinkle  her  face, 
while  also  warming  her  cold  hands  in  mine. 

Recovering  her  senses,  she  fortunately  recalled 
naught  of  what  had  occurred.  But  well  I  realized 
the  dreadful  sound  proclaimed  the  sinking  of  At- 
lora,  and  with  it  also  Omshola.  It  was  to  be  At- 
lo's  turn  next. 

Weird  lights  were  now  flashing  outside,  accom- 
panied with  an  ominous  discord  of  harsh  noises 
that  filled  the  darkness  with  a  terror  unspeakable. 
They  were  here  at  last — the  winged  horrors  of 
Atloraba.  Above  the  rasping  buzz  of  an  atmos- 
phere alive  with  one  solid  mass  of  stinging  in- 
sects and  biting  bats,  I  could  distinctly  hear  the 
deep  bellowing  of  fire-spitting  dragons,  the  high- 
pitched  shrieks  of  iron-taloned  griffins,  the  mani- 
acal screams  of  hideous  vultures,  and  the  sibilant 
hissing  from  myriads  of  flying  serpents,  all  rag- 
ing with  an  Indescribable  fury,  stinging  to  death 


ATLO'S  TRAGIC  END  259 

all  who  came  in  their  path  and  kindling  oros  with 
their  flaming  breath,  till  all  Atlo  stood  ready  to 
merge  into  one  vast  holocaust  of  flame — fit  climax 
to  Sat's  demoniac  revenge. 

Each  moment  is  bringing  fresh  tokens  of  Atlo's 
Hearing  end.     So  I  must  psrforce  be  brief. 

To  all  my  readers,  facing  me  across  a  gap  of 
time  counting  its  years  in  tens  of  centuries,  I  bid  a 
joyous  greeting: 

Under  the  light  of  Atlism,  be  not  surprised  to 
find  Mam's  shackles  still  upon  your  limbs,  nor 
curse  the  light  revealing  them;  but  I  pray  you, 
USE  the  light  to  BREAK  THE  SHACKLES 
OFF. 

REDEEM  YOUR  WORLD,  cleansing  It  of 
the  pollution  that  befouls  it.  SPREAD  this 
precious  light,  and  keep  on  spreading  it,  till  all 
can  see  the  truth,  and  all  can  see  the  way  to  justice. 

Haste  commands  few  words.  Metel  is  with 
me,  and  together  we  will  dispatch  our  messsage, 
praying  its  safe  arrival. 

When  you  read  these  lines,  we  shall  be  buried, 
hand  in  hand,  beneath  the  dust  of  scores  of  cen- 
turies, save  as  rebirth  shall  cause  us  to  reappear 
in  an  eternal  round  of  countertypes  of  our  pres- 
ent selves — perchance  to  be  among  you,  pouring 


26o  DOOMED 

over  these  lines  of  this  strangest  of  all  strange 
stories,  and  making  strange  comments  thereon. 
But  let  be  that  which  the  Fates  decree. 

And  now  in  this  last  moment,  we  send  you  our 
love  and  waft  you  many  kisses  from  this  far  off 
land  and  this  far  off  age.  Seek  ye  Atlism,  earth's 
fairest  jewel.  Plant  it  in  your  hearts,  and  in  your 
children's  hearts,  striving  that  it  may  blossom  into 
fruit.     Farewell,  farewell. 


;(Her  Seal).         METEL,  Daughter  of  Mafra. 
!(His    Seal).         LOAB,  Son  of  Phra. 

In  the  year  3,432  of  the  Sun  God  AT. 


A  PARTING  WORD 

By  the  Editors 

What  answer  is  to  be  made  to  the  call  for 
Atllsm  ? 

Is  our  world,  like  Pharaoh  of  old,  to  give  it  a 
deaf  ear? 

Are  the  insufferable  plagues  of  Profiteering 
Capitalism  to  be  borne,  plague  after  plague — war 
after  war,  dearth  after  dearth,  revolution  after 
revolution,  terror  after  terror? 

How  much  longer  are  we  to  see  our  loved  ones 
torn  from  us,  to  serve  the  beast  of  war;  our  sons 
and  daughters  to  be  crucified  on  the  cross  of 
hunger  and  cold  and  depravities,  bred  by  cruel 
want? 

How  much  longer  is  this  hand  of  profiteering 
thievery,  called  civilization,  to  be  shielded  by  the 
power  of  the  law?  How  much  longer  is  this 
whitened  sepulcher  of  disorder  and  lawlessness  to 
walk  this  earth  masqueraded  in  the  garments  of 
righteousness? 

How  much  longer  is  this  hideous  mask  of  an- 
archy to  go  on  unrecognized?  How  much  longer 
is  its  pretense  of  property  protection  to  keep  the 

261 


262  DOOMED 

multitudes  dispossessed  and  naked?  How  much 
longer  is  its  pretended  competition  to  hide  the 
burglar's  jimmy  of  monopoly?  How  much  longer 
is  its  honest  (?)  money  to  go  on  picking  our  pock- 
ets and  tyrannizing  over  us  as  master  instead  of 
heeding  our  needs  as  servant? 

How  much  longer  is  this  Bolshevism  of  the  rich 
to  play  havoc  with  us,  and  invite  the  Bolshevism 
of  the  poor  to  riot  in  Its  place? 

How  much  longer  are  our  eyes  to  remain  closed 
to  the  fact  that  all  these  desperate  revolts  at  Prof- 
iteering Capitalism,  from  individual  vice  and 
crime  to  political  revolt;  from  individual  anarchy 
to  the  wildest  extremes  of  Radicalism  and  Bol- 
shevism; and  from  the  common  inadequacy  of 
earnings,  to  the  horrors  of  industrial  crises,  are 
all  alike  symptoms  of  the  fundamental  defects  in- 
herent in  Profiteering  Capitalism?  Is  it  not  clear 
that  the  clash  between  Bolshevik  and  Profiteering 
Capitalism  is  irreconcilable?  Neither  is  sup- 
ported by  reason,  or  can  hope  ever  to  triumph 
long.  Only  violence  and  bloodshed  can  follow 
in  their  trail.  Humanity  has  nothing  to  gain  by 
either  of  them. 

Have  your  eyes  been  opened,  reader,  by  the 
message  of  Atlism?  Have  you  heard  the  appeals 
of  Loab  Ben  Phra  and  Metel,  Daughter  of 
Mafra,  in  their  last  words? 


A  PARTING  WORD  263 

What  then  Is  to  be  your  answer?  Surely  not  in 
a  surrender  to  the  hysteria  of  violence  and  mad- 
ness— not  in  abandonment  of  calm  reason  and 
resolute  action. 

It  will  not  be  necessary  to  appeal  to  physical 
force.  A  far  more  powerful  force  will  be  at  your 
command — MORAL  FORCE — a  compelling, 
uniting,  expanding,  overwhelming  and  irresistible 
force,  drawing  to  its  ranks  from  both  rich  and 
poor,  the  upper  and  the  lower  class — a  force  un- 
der which  men  will  remain  calm  and  resolute — 
steadily  moving  on  to  the  goal,  and  sweeping  aside 
all  opposition. 

Determined  patience,  while  daily  teaching  the 
lessons  of  Atlism  and  spreading  its  doctrines,  is 
bound  to  conquer,  and  in  time  to  suddenly  come 
down  sweeping  like  a  great  tidal  wave  over  coun- 
try after  country  in  our  Mamnist  world,  our  sor- 
did world  of  Commercialism — of  Profiteering 
Capitalism  and  of  arbitrary,  headlong  Bolshevism, 
neither  of  which  have  a  solid  footing  to  stand 
upon. 

And  when  both  Profiteering  and  Bolshevik 
Capitalism  will  have  passed  away,  as  pass  from  us 
they  inevitably  will,  may  their  going  be  in  peace ; 
and  may  they  trouble  our  dreams  no  more.  In 
that  day  will  the  world  breathe  easier,  and  a  new 
halo  will  glorify  this  earth. 


APPENDIX 

Editorial  Comment 

Irrepressible  Usury 

The  earliest  token  of  antipathy  to  Profiteer- 
ing Capitalism  was  displayed  in  ancient  legal 
enactions  aimed  to  suppress  the  exaction  of  in- 
terest, in  those  days  given  the  name  of  usury. 
Not  only  was  the  exaction  prohibited  by  the 
Hebrews  in  Palestine,  but  also  by  the  early  Greeks 
and  Romans  who  had  the  prohibition  incorporated 
in  their  statutory  laws.  .  .  .  Yet  in  spite  of  this 
far-reaching  antipathy  to  the  practice  of  exacting 
usury,  down  to  this  very  day  we  see  scarcely  any 
abatement  of  the  offense,  and  the  practice  con- 
tinues as  a  matter  of  fact  or  unavoidable  necessity, 
to  no  small  extent  defended  by  the  men  of  learn- 
ing in  our  universities  who  make  the  study  of 
economics  a  profession.  .  .  .  Why  all  this  persis- 
tence ?  Simply  because  in  the  absence  of  ability  to 
prevent  money  hoarding — out  of  which  the  power 
to  exact  interest  arises — to  forbid  the  exaction 
would  cause  the  pressure  of  hoarding  to  be  more 

265 


266  APPENDIX 

Intensified  and  make  matters  much  worse,  arrest- 
ing trade  and  Industry  and  precipitating  riot  and 
disorders  unendurable.  The  demand  of  the  money 
hoarders  was  one  made  on  society  for  Its  money 
or  its  Hfe ;  and  society  wisely  gave  up  its  money. 


Obstructive  Capitalism 

In  its  earliest  use,  money  was  preferred  above 
all  other  commodities  and  gathered  for  the  mere 
love  of  Its  accumulation.  It  was  the  true  and  tried 
rainy  day  friend  of  man — the  CAPITAL  he  relied 
on  in  emergencies  and  ventures.  .  .  .  Little  did  he 
in  those  days  think  of  the  OBSTRUCTIVE  and 
RETARDING  influence  brought  Into  force  by 
putting  Into  hoards  of  capital  the  medium  of  cir- 
culation. He  saw  only  POWER  in  capital,  and 
power  he  wanted,  at  any  price.  .  .  .  He  didn't  In 
that  stage  of  development  hoard  with  the  object 
of  exacting  interest,  but  by  degrees  part  of  his 
hoards  were  coaxed  from  their  hiding  places  with 
the  honey  of  interest;  and  later  on,  finding  it 
augmented  his  hoards,  he  passed  from  an  Obstruc- 
tive Capitalist  into  a  Profiteering  Capitalist;  and 
so  society  passed  from  OBSTRUCTIVE  to  the 
more  enterprising  and  progressive  PROFITEER- 
ING CAPITALISM. 


APPENDIX  267 

Bolshevik  Capitalism 

Under  the  leadership  of  Marxian  Socialists,  the 
aim  of  Russian  Bolshevism  seems  to  be  a  gradual 
evolution  to  Socialism  whose  form  Is  to  be  deter- 
mined by  the  circumstances  encountered  in  striv- 
ing for  the  goal.  .  .  .  Profiteering  Capitalism  is 
to  be  exterminated  at  all  hazards,  but  how  far  this 
step  will  sink  the  land  into  the  grip  of  Obstructive 
Capitalism  is  unseen.  As  the  ancients  tried  to 
prohibit  the  exaction  of  usury  by  statutory  law,  so 
now  it  is  proposed  to  exterminate  Profiteering 
Capitalism  through  arbitrary  steps  and  measures. 
A  degree  of  competition  Is  thus  far  still  retained, 
and  also  a  hoardable  money.  .  .  .  As  an  offset, 
it  is  perhaps  thought  this  defect  will  be  remedied 
in  overissues  of  paper.  But  if  acceptable,  paper 
will  be  as  subject  to  hoarding  as  gold,  and  if  re- 
jected it  will  depreciate  to  an  extent  defeating  the 
object  of  overissues.  .  .  .  With  eighty  per  cent, 
of  its  population  peasantry  scattered  over  a  wide 
region  and  primitive  In  their  wants,  how  is  a 
hoardable  money  to  coax  them  into  higher  stand- 
ards of  living  through  which  production  might 
be  carried  on  on  a  much  larger  scale  and  with  a 
much  greater  degree  of  efficiency?  And  how  will 
arbitrary  methods  prevent  obstructive  disorders 
from  arising  and  Its  arbitrary  disposition  of  toilers 


268  APPENDIX 

from  breeding  disturbances  inimical  to  success? 
Is  not  their  experiment  therefore  dragging  them 
as  deephy  into  Obstructive  Capitalism  as  it  is  re- 
lieving them  of  Profiteering  Capitalism?  Is  it 
not  to  be  feared  they  are  leading  Russia  fatuously 
on  from  the  frying  pan  into  the  fire  ? 


Communism  and  Socialism 

Like  their  sister  scheme  of  Co-operation,  Com- 
munism and  Socialism  both  depend  upon  the  arbi- 
trary methods  of  regulating  industries  met  with 
in  shop-wide  enterprises.  ,  .  .  Though  Socialism 
is  particularly  aimed  to  operate  on  a  nation-wide 
or  a  world-wide  scale,  its  design  to  avoid  the  uses 
of  either  a  transferable  money  or  of  automatic 
competition,  at  the  very  outset  casts  aside  the  very 
organs  necessary  for  carrying  on  so  wide  an  orga- 
nization of  industry.  It  also  casts  aside  the  help 
of  the  hundreds  of  millions  of  Industrial  partici- 
pants whose  daily  sales  of  labor  and  buying  of 
productions  automatically  puts  Into  motion  the 
process  of  value  determination  by  which  its  count- 
less daily  dispositions  are  guided.  ...  In  place  of 
these  tried  organs,  perverted  though  they  be  under 
Profiteering  Capitalism,  It  would  have  a  bureau- 
cracy of  statisticians  to  do  all  this  infinity  of  cal- 


APPENDIX  269 

culatlng  and  directing  from  day  to  day,  as  If  pos- 
sessed of  powers  of  lightning  speed  calculation  on 
such  a  vast  scale  and  also  powers  of  carrying  into 
operation  the  infinity  of  directions  to  be  deduced 
therefrom.  And  then,  to  expect  the  implicit  and 
prompt  obedience  necessary  from  all  these  hun- 
dreds of  millions  of  tollers !  Is  it  not  like  looking 
for  a  mere  wish  to  bring  the  moon  down  into  one's 
lap? 


Money — Paper  or  Metallic? 

Both  paper  and  metallic  currencies  have  their 
grave  defects  when  not  confined  within  their 
proper  functional  use  as  a  medium  of  exchange. 
Neither  offers  a  remedy  against  the  disastrous  con- 
sequences of  money  hoarding;  and  neither,  of 
Itself,  can  be  considered  sound  money  or  even 
honest  money.  .  .  .  Under  Atlism,  however,  both 
the  buying  and  the  selling  money  could  be  either 
metallic  or  of  paper,  provided  they  were  made  of 
different  materials  or  of  different  colors;  or  one 
might  be  metallic  and  the  other  of  paper,  as  pre- 
ferred. .  .  .  The  question  of  the  cost  of  the 
material  it  Is  made  of  Is  of  small  moment,  since 
metals  are  so  durable,  the  cost  would  have  small 
weight  against  other  considerations. 


270  APPENDIX 

Modern  Profiteering 

Modern  Profiteering  differs  from  Profiteering 
Capitalism  in  being  spasmodic,  confined  to  limited 
periods  of  time  and  to  very  limited  spheres  of 
action,  usually  touching  merely  on  a  single  article 
at  a  time.  It  is  a  species  of  raid  on  the  producers, 
guiltily  designed  and  perpetrated.  .  .  .  Profiteer- 
ing Capitalism,  on  the  other  hand,  is  an  indirect 
and  undesigned  outcome  or  accompaniment  of 
money  hoarding  simultaneously  carried  on  by  so 
many  persons  and  on  so  large  a  scale  as  to  give 
them  a  power  of  obstruction  and  monopoly  ena- 
bling the  exaction  of  interest  on  capital.  .  .  . 
Saving  seems  to  capitalists  a  wise  and  a  beneficent 
act,  enabling  them  to  serve  others  with  their 
hoards  and  therein  justifying  the  price  exacted  for 
the  "service."  That  they  carry  on  their  saving  to 
an  excessive  degree,  whereby  others  ARE  PRE- 
VENTED FROM  DOING  THEIR  OWN 
SAVING,  even  though  inclined  to  do  so — all  from 
inability  to  sell  their  services  or  to  obtain  for  those 
sold  its  real  and  full  value — the  Profiteering  Capi- 
talist fails  to  see.  He  is  blind  to  the  distinction 
between  harmless  abstinence  and  the  overahsti- 
nence  by  which  he  adds  millions  upon  millions  to 
his  hoards,  and  whereby  he  curtails  the  earnings 
and  acquisitions  of  other  men. 


APPENDIX  271 

Profiteering  Capitalism,  from  its  universality, 
its  great  scope  and  its  continuity  of  operation  is 
probably  a  thousand  fold  the  greater  evil  of  the 
two;  and  though  innocently  engaged  in,  is  a 
thousand  times  more  inimical  to  industrial  society. 
In  criminality  it  is  guiltless  much  as  kleptomania, 
though  entitled  to  no  more  toleration  than  other 
forms  of  theft . 

The  Marxian  Blunder 

Borrowing  his  conception  from  that  of  the 
British  economist,  John  Stuart  Mill,  Karl  Marx 
committed  the  grave  error  of  assuming  that 
LABOR  was  the  only  proper  ingredient  of  value. 
In  founding  his  economic  philosophy  on  this  as- 
sumption, he  lost  sight  of  the  mighty  influence 
upon  values  exerted  by  the  demand  for  labor  made 
by  buyers.  As  if  value  could  arise  in  the  absence 
of  any  demand  for  productions.  If  there  were  no 
buyers  of  productions,  of  what  use  would  labor  be 
in  a  system  of  industrial  co-operation  through  ex- 
change ?  It  could  have  neither  use  nor  value.  .  .  .. 
Through  this  oversight  he  was  left  in  the  dark 
and  forced  to  grope  in  his  search  for  economic 
light  in  a  maze  of  inextricable  confusion,  kept,  by 
his  own  confession,  moving  in  a  vicious  circle  that 
led  from  nowhere  to  nowhere. 


272  APPENDIX 

Mamnism  versus  Mammonism 

The  reader  should  be  cautioned  against  the 
assumption  that  the  words  "mammonism"  and 
"Mamnism"  are  synonymous  terms.  Mamnism 
is  a  piratic  industrial  system  described  in  these 
pages,  whereas  mammonism  is  merely  a  mental 
symptom  of  the  corrupting  Influences  of  Mam- 
nism. It  is  a  malevolent  growth  that  cannot  be 
dispelled  while  Mamnism,  its  root,  remains  alive. 

Banished  from  Atlo 

From  the  fact  that  our  Atlon  writers  make  no 
mention  of  Polygamy,  so  uniformly  prevalent  in 
Mamnlst  lands,  we  may  safely  Infer  Its  ab- 
sence in  the  New  Atlo  as  due  to  Its  superior  dis- 
tribution of  wealth  and  the  independent  position 
occupied  by  its  women.  The  same  causes  no 
doubt  obliterated  that  substitute  for  Polygamy 
usually  appearing  in  the  form  of  the  Social  Evil. 

A  Prince  of  Profiteers 

It  Is  almost  amusing  to  note  the  innocent  zeal 
with  which  Pharaoh,  through  his  minister  Joseph, 
on  receiving  the  tip  concerning  the  approaching 
famine,  bought  up  all  the  corn  in  Egypt,  holding 


APPENDIX  273 

an  absolute  monopoly  of  this  means  of  sustenance. 
.  .  .  With  the  arrival  of  the  drouth  year  we 
therefore  also  see  the  toilers  of  the  land  on  their 
knees  to  Joseph,  praying  for  corn  enough  to  save 
them  from  starvation.  .  .  .  How  they  were 
thereafter,  step  by  step,  profiteered  out  of  their 
money,  their  cattle,  their  lands  and  at  length  of 
their  very  persons,  to  become  forever  after  slaves 
of  Pharaoh,  is  unblushingly  told  in  the  book  of 
Genesis,  47,  beginning  with  verse  13.  .  .  .  In 
return  for  all  their  purchases  from  Pharaoh,  this 
Lord  of  the  Land  bought  not  a  stitch  of  their 
labor.  All  his  demand  for  more  temples  and 
tombs,  more  palaces  and  pyramids,  more  road- 
ways and  canals,  and  more  bridges,  not  to  men- 
tion more  soldiers,  this  shrewd  monarch  deferred 
till  AFTER  their  complete  dispossession  and  sub- 
jection as  slaves.  He  knew  how  to  secure  cheap 
labor,  and  he  got  it. 

Juggling  With  Values 

The  ready  explanation  of  value  given  by 
our  sober  economists  as  a  quantity  determined  by 
supply  and  demand  is  on  a  par  with  the  test  by 
which  witches  were  distinguished  from  the  inno- 
cent when  deemed  innocent  if  they  drowned  and 
guilty  if  they  swam.  .    .   .  The  economists  totally 


274  APPENDIX 

ignore  the  freedom  with  which  the  supply  of  com- 
modities is  allowed  to  be  monopolized,  and  also 
the  enormous  extent  to  which  the  labor  demand  is 
stuffed  with  demand  for  UNREMUNERATED 
LABOR  required  to  supply  the  UNEARNED 
income  on  capital;  also  the  extensive  WITH- 
HOLDING of  demand  for  labor  accompanying 
money  hoarding,  in  which  capital  originates. 
.  .  .  Of  course,  such  matters  are  too  trivial  for 
our  economists  to  consider,  and  are  not  brought 
forward  by  professional  economists  as  worthy  of 
serious  consideration. 

It  is  well  enough  to  tell  Socialists  that  demand, 
as  well  as  labor,  must  be  considered  in  determin- 
ing values;  but  it  is  not  well  enough  to  follow  up 
this  logic  by  pointing  out  that  the  capitalist  has 
never  contributed  the  least  element  of  genuine 
labor  demand  to  justify  the  value  of  his  wealth. 
In  its  origin,  the  capitalist  contributed  not  a  par- 
ticle of  labor  demand,  and  in  its  use  only  a  bogus 
demand— a  demand  for  UNREMUNERATED 
labor,  such  as  the  slave  was  given  when  more 
labor  was  exacted  from  him. 

All  this  might  have  been  expected  under  Profi- 
teering Capitalism,  operating  without  a  work- 
distributing  medium  such  as  Atlons  had  in  their 
bronze  shekels — a  medium  that  conserved  for  each 
toiler  his  portion  of  work — the  quantity  of  work 


APPENDIX  275 

he  made  by  his  spending — ^by  excluding  all  from 
any  share  in  the  work  output  who  did  not  help  in 
the  making  of  work  by  spending  money.  ...  If 
demand  for  labor  is  an  element  of  value,  as  it 
certainly  is,  its  makers  are  entitled  to  that  value 
and  ought  to  have  some  claim  on  it.  This  the 
Atlon  toilers  had  in  the  form  of  their  bronze 
shekels  which  saved  them  from  competition  with 
mere  money  hoarders  and  the  bogus  "services"  of 
capitalist  money-hoards  through  which  the  largest 
part  of  the  money  received  for  productions  was 
diverted  to  capitalists  under  Profiteering  Capital- 
ism. ...  As  well  try  to  apportion  the  product 
output  without  giving  to  the  toilers  who  contribute 
their  labor  to  its  making  any  tangible  claim  on  it — 
without,  In  other  words,  paying  them  a  money 
wage.  .  .  .  If  just  values  are  ever  to  prevail,  both 
the  work  and  the  product  outputs  must  each  have 
its  distributing  medium,  and  the  work-maker  must 
be  recognized  as  well  as  the  product-maker,  in 
the  apportionment  of  both  work  and  productions. 

Our  Palace  Poverty 

In  considering  the  nation's  vast  riches,  how 
many  of  us  think  of  the  enormous  burden  its  sup- 
port with  interest  heaps  upon  our  tollers.  The 
great  bulk  of  it  is  one  body  of  duplicated,  inflated 


276  APPENDIX 

and  fictitious  wealth — a  vast  balloon  filled  with  the 
gas  of  capitalized  monopoly.  But  for  its  power 
of  extortion,  it  would  have  small  value  indeed. 
.  .  .  And  yet  the  nation  upon  whose  labor,  manual 
and  mental.  Its  support  Is  burdened,  seems  to  feel 
proud  of  the  burden,  like  the  ass  whose  back  is 
bowed  with  a  load  of  golden  ingots.  .  .  .  Owning 
a  few  paltry  hundreds  or  thousands  In  property 
and  bank  accounts,  the  toller  is  deluded  into 
thinking  himself  prosperous,  blind  to  the  fact 
that  only  one-third  of  the  produce  of  his  labor 
ever  reaches  him,  and  the  loss,  equally  to  probably 
a  full  two  thousand  a  year,  is  as  much  as  one's  in- 
come from  $40,000.  What  a  lot  of  quackery 
and  fraud  is  concealed  In  the  representations  of 
the  stump  speakers  and  the  press  in  general  in 
flattering  our  people  with  pictures  of  their  pros- 
perity while  ignoring  the  real  truth  concerning 
their  status.  To  flatter  them  with  the  fact  that 
they  are  faring  better  than  toilers  in  other  lands  is 
like  the  burglar's  defence  that  he  left  the  victim's 
house  better  supplied  than  other  houses  he  had 
plundered.  .  .  .  But  what  of  the  millions  upon 
miUIons  of  tollers  whom  It  leaves  practically  pen- 
niless, in  debt  to  the  grocer,  the  butcher,  the  baker, 
the  tailor  and  the  dress  maker?  What  of  those 
pinching  from  hand  to  mouth,  worrying  and  fret- 
ting out  their  days  to  keep  out  of  the  poor  house? 


APPENDIX  277 

What  of  those  whom  it  drives  inco  abandonment, 
surrendering  to  vice  and  crime  ?  Are  they  weaker 
mortals?  So  much  the  worse  if  inducements  to 
lead  a  better  hfe  are  debarred  by  the  demand 
for  tribute  as  the  price  of  getting  work  and  bread. 
Are  they  who  steal  in  sheer  desperation  worse 
than  those  who  rob  in  ignorance  through  ex- 
tortion? 

How  much  longer  are  we  to  go  on  worshipping 
the  rod  that  smites  us  ?  How  much  longer  is  the 
glitter  of  wealth  to  delude  us  poor  lambs  from 
whose  back  its  golden  fleece  is  shorn  ?  How  much 
longer  are  we  to  be  blinded  by  the  glitter  of  a 
Palace  Plenty  conceahng  the  gloom  of  our  Pov- 
erty Barn? 

Christianity  and  Atlism 

If  Christianity  was  the  first  creed  to  proclaim 
the  doctrine  of  human  brotherhood,  Atlism  is  the 
first  to  point  the  way  to  a  practical  realization 
of  the  dream.  If  the  one  has  spent  twenty  cen- 
turies in  daily  prayers  for  peace  on  earth,  the 
other  has  shown  the  conditions  under  which  such 
a  peace  is  attainable. 

Is  Christianity  now  ready  to  take  the  forward 
step  and  give  its  support  to  the  cause  of  Atlism 
— to  the  realization  of  its  age-old  dreams?    Will 


278  APPENDIX 

it  be  true  to  Itself  and  to  the  humanity  whose 
salvation  has  been  Its  time-old  mission?  Let  it 
be  hoped  that  the  claws  of  the  beast  of  Mamnism 
hold  it  not  so  fast  it  cannot  break  loose  from 
the  monster's  grip. 

Can  Christianity  rise  to  the  level  of  its  lofty 
aims?  Can  it  cut  Itself  loose  from  the  worship 
of  Mammon  and  that  other  dread  idol,  literalism 
in  biblical  Interpretation — the  source  of  hopeless 
division  Into  sects  and  ceaseless  dissension?  Can 
It  free  itself  and  become  a  great  unifying  in- 
fluence, broad  enough  and  liberal  enough  to 
gather  under  its  wing  believer  and  unbeliever, 
Jew  and  Mahommedan  and  Buddhist?  If  it 
would  save  Itself,  this  forward  step  is  an  abso- 
lute necessity.     Let  It  be  warned. 


Modern  Push  Wings 

In  striking  contrast  with  Atlo's  beneficent  Push 
Wing,  leading  modern  nations  are  each  equipped 
with  a  push  wing  devoted  to  the  enlargement  of 
its  foreign  trade  and  Influence.  Ostensibly  oper- 
ated for  the  benefit  of  the  nation,  they  are  really 
in  the  hands  of  a  limited  number  of  our  billion- 
aires whose  power  determines  the  agents  through 
whom  they  are  ofl&clally  conducted. 


APPENDIX  279 


As  to  the  actual  need  of  a  larger  foreign  trade, 
press,  politicians  and  statesmen  are  united  in  main- 
taining a  clamorous  wail  bemoaning  our  inability 
to  dispose  of  ALL  we  are  able  to  produce  and 
to  keep  all  our  toilers  at  work.  How  otherwise 
fill  the  great  gap  of  deficiency  from  which  the 
home  market  must  else  collapse  ? 

That  our  enterprising  billionaires  pile  up  their 
surplus  millions  by  MAKING  this  gap  of  defi- 
ciency through  consuming  less  than  a  half  of  their 
vast  income— that  they  MAKE  THE  GREAT 
LEAK  in  the  home  market — is  far  too  insignifi- 
cant a  discovery  for  the  keen  and  sleepless  sleuths 
of  the  press  to  bother  with.     Such  revelations  are 
a   specialty   belonging  exclusively   to    economists 
serving    in    institutions    under    the    control    and 
patronage  of  the  billionaire  class.     Why  borrow 
trouble  when  we  already  have  more  than  enough 
of  the  commodity?    Is  it  not  enough  to  keep  the 
public  eye   glued  on   the   BIG,   BIG  WORLD 
MARKET,  even  though  every  portion  of  it  is 
starving  from  gaps  of  deficiency  at  home.     We 
have  only  to  dash  bravely  into  this  BIG  MAR- 
KET,  sharp  diplomacy  in  one  hand  and  heavy 
armaments  in  the  other,  to  compel  it  to  yield  us 
what  we  want  in  larger  trade. 

But  back  of  all  this  agitation  for  expansion  of 
our  foreign  trade — the  demand  of  all  our  great 


28o  APPENDIX 

nations — Is  not  merely  a  desire  to  conceal  and 
cover  up  the  big  gaps  of  deficiency  at  home  made 
by  the  home  capitalists,  but  a  call  to  indefinitely 
enlarge  the  volume  of  our  foreign  trade  and  to 
use  the  proceeds  In  adding  to  the  volume  of  our 
foreign  properties  and  the  Income  to  be  derived 
from  them?  Is  It  not  a  repetition  of  the  ancient 
trick  taught  mankind  by  the  devil's  dam,  Mam- 
mon? Do  not  the  properties  bring  with  them  the 
free  slaves  whose  unremunerated  toil  has  to 
supply  the  Income  they  yield?  Reduced  to  the 
naked  truth,  is  It  not  a  repetition  of  SLAVERY 
EXTENSION  with  free  Instead  of  chattel  slaves 
from  whom  to  grind  Its  extortions  ? 

What  a  profitable  and  respectable  calling  Is 
this  enterprising  piracy,  raking  over  the  high  seas, 
far  and  wide,  In  adding  to  Its  possessions  millions 
upon  millions  of  free  slaves  to  toll  abroad  for 
their  Invisible  masters.  With  what  pleasure  these 
knights  of  gold  can  lean  back  In  their  church  pews, 
wrapped  in  a  halo  of  righteousness  and  anointed 
with  the  oil  of  sanctity. 

What  If  this  sport  of  the  money  kings  embroil 
the  nations  in  the  turmoil  of  ceaseless  wars  and 
steep  them  In  rivers  of  human  blood?  Will  not 
the  cloak  of  patriotism  cover  all  the  sin  and  whiten 
its  dark  stains  like  purest  snow?  Is  it  not  a  part 
of  patriotism  for  the  home  free  slaves  to  open 


APPENDIX  281 

their  veins  in  the  glorious  cause  of  adding  more 
free  slaves  to  the  domains  of  our  kingly  billion- 
aires, our  glorious  saints  of  democracy?  Why 
not  sink  everywhere  the  lesson  of  this  new  patriot- 
ism— this  wider  patriotism — into  the  hearts  of 
the  free  slaves  at  home?  Why  not  spread  this 
latest  gospel  of  patriotism? 

Like  guilty  Macbeth,  Profiteering  Capitalism 
has  waded  so  far  in  blood,  returning  were  as  tedi- 
ous a  voyage  as  going  on.  RUIN  faces  it  abroad, 
and  at  home  the  Inevitable  call  for  repair  of  the 
trade  deficiency  in  the  home  market  by  making 
good  the  delinquent  spending  due  it  also  spells 
RUIN.  ...  In  the  heart  of  the  BIG  WORLD 
MARKET  the  bloody  maelstrom  of  interminable 
wars  forbids  these  uncrowned  kings  to  lead  their 
nations.  It  threatens  to  wash  home  the  cursed 
blood  and  mingle  it  with  their  own.  And  unless 
they  mend  the  gaps  of  trade  deficiency  at  home, 
a  bloody  doom  must  face  them. 

There  is  no  further  escape  from  the  dilemma. 
Profiteering  Capitalism  has  reached  the  end  of  its 
tether.  Its  wail  for  larger  foreign  markets  has 
sounded  its  death  knell — its  confession  of  break- 
ing down,  the  beginning  of  Its  end.  As  a  perma- 
nent Institution  it  Is  a  hopeless  failure. 

It  is  now  the  turn  of  Profiteering  Capitalism  to 


282  APPENDIX 

face  her  doom,  even  as  Atlo  had  to  face  hers. 
.  .  .  But  while  Athsm  is  to  be  restored,  the  scheme 
of  Sat's  spouse,  Mam,  is  doomed  to  sink  in  a  sea 
of  oblivion,  never  to  rise  again. 


THE  END 


